ELECRAFT 160-10 Meter SSB/CW Transceiver

ELECRAFT
K2
160-10 Meter
SSB/CW
Transceiver
Owner’s Manual
Revision G, May 29, 2007
Copyright © 2007 Elecraft, LLC
All Rights Reserved
Elecraft • www.elecraft.com
P.O. Box 69 • Aptos, CA 95001-0069
(831) 662-8345 • Fax: (831) 662-0830
®
ELECRAFT®
2
Table of Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.
PREPARATION FOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.
CONTROL BOARD ........................................................................................................................................................................... 13
5.
FRONT PANEL BOARD ................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.
RF BOARD ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
7.
FINAL ASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.
OPERATION...................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
9.
CIRCUIT DETAILS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 110
10. OPTIONS......................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................................................................................ APPENDIX A
SCHEMATIC............................................................................................................................................................................ APPENDIX B
BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................................................................................................................. APPENDIX C
PHOTOGRAPHS..................................................................................................................................................................... APPENDIX D
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................................................APPENDIX E
PARTS PLACEMENT DRAWINGS .........................................................................................................................................APPENDIX F
100-WATT STAGE AND RS232 I/O (K2/100) .......................................................... APPENDIX G (SUPPLIED WITH KPA100 OPTION)
Elecraft • www.elecraft.com
P.O. Box 69 • Aptos, CA 95001-0069
(831) 662-8345 • Fax: (831) 662-0830
ELECRAFT®
3
1. Introduction
The Elecraft K2 is a high-performance, synthesized, CW/SSB
transceiver that covers all HF bands. It is a true dual-purpose
transceiver, combining the operating features you’d expect in a
home-station rig with the small size and weight of a rugged,
go-anywhere portable.
The K2 is an intermediate-level kit, yet you’ll be pleasantly surprised at
how uncomplicated it is to build. All of the RF (radio-frequency)
circuitry is contained on a single board, while two plug-in modules
provide front panel and control functions. Wiring is minimal, unlike
traditional kits which depend on complex wiring harnesses.
The basic K2 operates on 80-10 meter CW, and provides over 10
watts of RF output. If you prefer a full-power station, you can
complete your K2 as a K2/100 at any time by adding the internal
100-watt final stage (KPA100 option). Assembly of the KPA100 is
covered in Appendix G, a separate manual supplied with the
KPA100 kit.
A unique feature of the K2 is that it provides its own built-in test
equipment, including a digital voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, complete
RF probe, and frequency counter. These circuits are completed early in
assembly, so they're ready to be used when you begin construction and
alignment of the RF board. We also provide complete troubleshooting
and signal-tracing information.
You can customize your K2 by choosing from a wide range of
additional options:
In addition to this owner’s manual, you’ll find extensive support for the
K2 on our website, www.elecraft.com. Among the available materials
are manual updates, application notes, photographs, and information on
new products. There’s also an e-mail forum; sign-up is available from
the web page. It’s a great way to seek advice from the K2’s designers
and your fellow builders, or to tell us about your first QSO using the K2.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
SSB adapter with optimized 7-pole crystal filter
Automatic antenna tuner (20 W internal or 150 W external)
160-m adapter with receive antenna switch
60-m adapter with low-level transverter interface
Computer control interface (RS232)
Noise blanker
Digital or analog audio filter, each with real-time clock
Internal 2.9-Ah rechargeable battery
Programmable band decoder
High-Performance VHF and UHF transverters
For a complete description of available options, see page 117. In
addition to the options, a companion enclosure the same size and
style as the K2 is available for those who wish to build their own
matching station accessories (model EC2).
We’d like to thank you for choosing the K2 transceiver, and hope it
meets your expectations for operation both at home and in the field.
Wayne Burdick, N6KR
Eric Swartz, WA6HHQ
Pre-Wound Toroids Available
You can obtain a set of pre-wound toroids for the K2 if you prefer not to
wind them yourself. Refer to our web site for details.
4
ELECRAFT®
Customer Service Information
Technical Assistance
If you have difficulty with kit construction, operation, or
troubleshooting, we’re here to help. You may be able to save time by
first consulting our web site, www.elecraft.com, or by posting your
question on our e-mail forum, elecraft@mailman.qth.net.
Telephone assistance is available from 9 A.M. to 5 P.M. Pacific time
(weekdays) at 831-662-8345. Via e-mail, use support@elecraft.com
for support and parts@elecraft.com to request replacement parts.
Please use e-mail when possible; this gives us a written record of the
details of your problem.
Repair Service
If necessary, you may return your completed kit to us for repair.
Contact Elecraft before mailing your kit to obtain current
information on repair fees. (Kits that have been soldered using acid
core solder, water-soluble flux solder, or other corrosive or
conductive fluxes or solvents cannot be accepted for repair.)
The following information should be provided to expedite repair:
your name, address, and phone number; your e-mail address (if
applicable); and a complete description of the problem.
Shipping: First, seal the unit in a plastic bag to protect the finish
from dust and abrasion. Use a sturdy packing carton with 3" or more
of foam or shredded paper on all sides. Seal the package with
reinforced tape. (Neither Elecraft nor the carrier will accept liability
for damage due to improper packaging.) Cover the "to" address label
with clear tape so it will be weatherproof. Finally, call or send e-mail
to obtain the proper shipping address.
Elecraft 1-Year Limited Warranty
This warranty is effective as of the date of first consumer purchase.
Before requesting warranty service, you should complete the assembly,
carefully following all instructions in the manual.
What is covered: During the first year after date of purchase, Elecraft
will replace defective parts free of charge (post-paid). We will also
correct any malfunction caused by defective parts and materials. You
must send the unit at your expense to Elecraft, but we will pay return
shipping.
What is not covered: This warranty does not cover correction of
assembly errors or misalignment; repair of damage caused by misuse,
negligence, or builder modifications; or any performance malfunctions
involving non-Elecraft accessory equipment. The use of acid-core
solder, water-soluble flux solder, or any corrosive or conductive flux or
solvent will void this warranty in its entirety. Also not covered is
reimbursement for loss of use, inconvenience, customer assembly or
alignment time, or cost of unauthorized service.
Limitation of incidental or consequential damages: This warranty
does not extend to non-Elecraft equipment or components used in
conjunction with our products. Any such repair or replacement is the
responsibility of the customer. Elecraft will not be liable for any special,
indirect, incidental or consequential damages, including but not limited
to any loss of business or profits.
ELECRAFT®
5
2. Specifications
Frequency ranges,2 MHz
All measurements were made using a 14.0 V supply and 50-ohm load
unless otherwise indicated. Values are typical; your results will be
somewhat different. Specifications are subject to change without
notice. (See option manuals for additional specifications.)
Basic kit
160 m (opt.)
60 m (opt.)
General
VFO
Size
3.0" H x 7.9" W x 8.3" D
(7.5 x 20 x 21 cm)
3.4" H x 7.9" W x 9.9" D
(8.5 x 20 x 25 cm)
Stability
< 100 Hz total drift typ. from
cold start at 25° C
Accuracy3
+/- 30 Hz over a 500 kHz range
(typ) when calibrated
Weight
3.3 lbs. (1.5 kg), excluding options
Resolution
10 Hz
Supply voltage
9 to 15 VDC;
reverse-polarity protection;
internal self-resetting fuse
Tuning steps
10 Hz, 50 Hz, and 1000 Hz nominal
(other step sizes available via menu)
Memories
20 (10 assigned to 160-10 m
Bands; 10 general-purpose)
Cabinet
Overall
Current drain,
RIT/XIT range
Receive 120-150 mA in minimum-current
configuration; 180-250 mA typical
Transmit1
Frequency control
1
3.5-4.0, 7.0-7.3,
10.0-10.2, 14.0-14.5, 18.0-18.2,
21.0-21.6, 24.8-25.0, 28.0-28.8
1.8-2.0
5.0-5.5
+/- 0.6 to +/- 4.8 kHz (selectable);
10-40 Hz steps depending on range.
Fine RIT mode steps 2-3 Hz typ.
2.0 A typical at 10 watts;
programmable current limiting
PLL synthesizer w/single VCO
covering 6.7-24 MHz in 10 bands;
fine steps via DAC-tuned reference
Current varies with band, supply voltage, configuration, and load
impedance. We recommend a minimum 3.5-amp power supply.
2
The K2 can receive well outside the indicated bands, but this extended range
is not specified or guaranteed. Transmit ranges may be limited for export to
some countries. The K2/100 (KPA100 option) limits transmit from 25-27.999
MHz to 10 watts or less.
3
See Frequency Calibration Techniques (page 105).
ELECRAFT®
6
Transmitter
Receiver
Preamp On
-135 dBm
0 to +7.55
+70
Preamp Off
-130 dBm
+10
+70
Blocking
125 dB
133 dB
Two-tone
96
97
Power output range
<0.5 W to >10 W (typ.);
power setting resolution 0.1 W,
accuracy 10% @ 5 W
Sensitivity (MDS)
3rd-order intercept
2nd-order intercept
Min. supply voltage
recommended4
9.0 V min for 2 watts out
9.5 V min for 5 watts out
10.0 V min for 7 watts out
10.5 V min for 10 watts out
Dynamic range,
Duty cycle
5 W, 100%; 10 W, 50%
Spurious products
-40 dB or better @ 10 W (-50 typ)
Harmonic content
-45 dB or better @ 10 W (-55 typ)
Load tolerance
2:1 or better SWR recommended;
I.F.
4.915 MHz (single conversion)
Selectivity,
will survive operation
CW
7-pole variable-bandwidth crystal
filter, approx. 200-2000 Hz
SSB6
7-pole fixed-bandwidth crystal
filter, 2.2 kHz typ.
into high SWR
T-R delay
approx. 10 ms-2.5 sec, adjustable
Audio output
1 watt max. into 4-ohm load
External keying
70 WPM max.
Speaker
internal: 4 ohm, 3 W;
CW sidetone
400-800 Hz in 10 Hz steps
Rear-panel jack for external speaker
Headphones
Keyer
Keying modes
Iambic A and B; adjustable weight
Speed range
9 - 50 WPM
Message memory
9 buffers of 250 bytes each; 1-level
chaining; auto-repeat (0 - 255 s)
5
4
For reference only; not guaranteed. If higher power than shown here is to be
used for a given supply voltage, monitor transmitter output signal.
4 - 32 ohms, stereo or mono
Varies with band.
With optional SSB adapter. Other CW and SSB fixed crystal filter options
may be available
6
ELECRAFT®
7
3. Preparation for Assembly
Overview of the Kit
The K2 uses modular construction, both physically and electrically.
This concept extends to the chassis (Figure 3-1). Any chassis element
can be removed during assembly or troubleshooting. (Also see photos
in Appendix D.) If the KPA100 is installed, it takes the place of the
original top cover.
As shown in Figure 3-2, there are three printed circuit boards (PCBs)
in the basic K2 kit: the Front Panel board, Control Board, and RF
board. Option modules plug into the RF or Control board, but are not
shown here.
Side
Panel
RF
Control
Top Cover
Heat
Sink
Front
Panel
Front
Panel
Bottom
Cover
(Right side panel
not shown)
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-1
ELECRAFT®
8
Board-to-board Connectors
The circuit boards in the K2 are interconnected using board-to-board
connectors, which eliminates nearly all hand wiring. Gold-plated
contacts are used on these connectors for reliability and corrosion
resistance.
board. Similarly, right-angle connector P1 on the Control Board mates
with J6 on the RF board. (Not shown in this drawing are two
additional right-angle connectors on the Control board, P2 and P3,
which mate with J7 and J8 on the RF board.)
Figure 3-3 shows a side view of the PC boards and board-to-board
connectors. As can be seen in the drawing, the Front Panel board has a
connector J1 which mates with right-angle connector P1 on the RF
These multi-pin connectors are very difficult to remove once
soldered in place. Refer to Figure 3-3 during assembly to make
sure you have each connector placed correctly before soldering.
Front Panel
Control Board
P1
RF Board
J6
J1
P1
Figure 3-3
ELECRAFT®
9
There are six steps in the K2 assembly process:
Inventory
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
We strongly recommend that you do an inventory of parts before
beginning to assemble the kit. It is not necessary to inventory the
resistors, which are supplied attached to tape in assembly order.
Control Board assembly
Front Panel Board assembly
RF Board assembly and test, part I (control circuits)
RF Board assembly and test, part II (receiver and synthesizer)
RF Board assembly and test, part III (transmitter)
Final assembly
This assembly sequence is important because later steps build on the
previous ones. For example, in step 3 you’ll put the modules together
for the first time, allowing you to try out the K2’s built-in frequency
counter. The counter will then be used in step 4 to align and test the
receiver and synthesizer on 40 meters. In step 5 all the pieces will
come together when you complete the transmitter and filters, then
align the K2 on all bands. The last few details—speaker, tilt stand,
etc.—will be wrapped up in step 6.
Unpacking and Inventory
When you open the kit you should find the following items:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
six chassis pieces (Figure 3-1)
three printed circuit boards (Figure 3-2)
FRONT PANEL board components bag
CONTROL board components bag
RF board components in two bags
MISCELLANEOUS components bag (includes hardware)
WIRE bag
4-ohm Speaker, 5 small knobs, and large tuning knob
plastic tube containing the latching relays
an envelope containing the LCD bezel, green LED bargraph filter,
serial number label, thermal insulators, and other items
Even if you don’t do an inventory, it is helpful to familiarize yourself
with the parts list, Appendix A. Additional information on identifying
capacitor, chokes, and resistors is provided below.
Identifying Capacitors
Small-value fixed capacitors are usually marked with one, two, or
three digits and no decimal point. If one or two digits are used, that is
always the value in picofarads (pF). If there are three digits, the third
digit is a multiplier. For example, a capacitor marked "151" would be
150 pF (15 with a multiplier of 101). Similarly, "330" would be 33 pF,
and "102" would be 1000 pF (or .001 µF). In rare cases a capacitor
manufacturer may use "0" as a decimal placeholder. For example,
"820" might mean 820 pF rather than the usual 82 pF. Such exceptions
are usually covered in the parts lists. To be safe, measure the values of
all capacitors below 1000 pF (most DMMs include capacitance
measurement capability).
Fixed capacitors with values of 1000 pF or higher generally use a
decimal point in the value, such as .001 or .02. This is the value in
microfarads (µF). Capacitors also may have a suffix after the value,
such as ".001J." In some cases the suffixes or other supplemental
markings may be useful in identifying capacitors.
Hard-to-identify capacitor values:
3.3 pF: These capacitors may have pillow-shaped, dark-green bodies
about 1/8" (3 mm) square, with a black mark on the top. The "3.3"
label may be difficult to read without a magnifying glass.
150 pF: These are correctly marked "151" on one side, but the other
side may be marked #21 ASD, where "#21" looks like "821."
ELECRAFT®
10
Color Code
Resistors, Chokes, and the Color Code
All resistor and RF choke color bands are provided in the text along
with their values. However, it is helpful to familiarize yourself with
the color code to allow you to identify these components without
having to refer to the text or parts list each time.
The color-code chart, Figure 3-4, shows how to read the four color
bands on 5% resistors. 1% resistors are similar, except that they use
five bands (three significant digits, multiplier, and tolerance). For
example, a 1,500 ohm (1.5 k) 5% resistor has color bands BROWN,
GREEN, and RED. A 1.5 k, 1% resistor has color bands BROWN,
GREEN, BLACK, BROWN. The multiplier value is 1 rather than 2 in
the 1% case because of the third significant digit.
Because 1% resistors have color bands that are sometimes hard to
distinguish clearly, you should always check their resistance using an
ohmmeter.
The markings on RF chokes reflect their value in microhenries (µH).
Like 5% resistors, chokes use two significant digits and a multiplier.
Example: an RF choke with color bands RED, VIOLET, BLACK
would have a value of 27 µH.
Tools
The following specialized tools are supplied with the K2:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
.050" (1.3 mm) Allen Wrench, short handle
5/64" (2 mm) Allen Wrench, long handle
Double-ended plastic inductor alignment tool
Tolerance
(gold = 5%,
silver = 10%)
Multiplier
Second Digit
First Digit
Color
Black
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Violet
Gray
White
Silver
Gold
Digit
Multiplier
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
--Figure 3-4
x1
x 10
x 100
x 1K
x 10K
x 100K
x 1M
x .01
x 0.1
ELECRAFT®
In addition to the tools supplied, you will need these standard tools:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Fine-tip soldering iron, 20-40 watt (temperature-controlled
preferred, with 700 or 800°F tip [370-430°C]
IC-grade, small-diameter (.031") solder (DO NOT use acid-core
solder, water-soluble flux solder, additional flux, or solvents of
any kind, which will void your warranty)
Desoldering tools (wick, solder-sucker, etc.)
Needle-nose pliers
Small-point diagonal cutters, preferably flush-cutting
Small Phillips screwdriver
Jeweler’s flat-blade screwdriver
While not required, the following items are recommended:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
DMM (digital multimeter) for doing resistance and voltage
checks. A DMM with capacitance measurement capability is
strongly recommended (see Identifying Capacitors).
Magnifying glass
Conductive wrist strap
Assembly Notes
i
This symbol is used to alert you to important information
about assembly, alignment, or operation of the K2.
11
In some steps you will actually be installing multiple components of a
particular type. In this case the instructions will be followed by a table
listing all of the components to be installed, so you won’t need to refer
to the parts list during assembly. The order that the components are
installed corresponds to their PCB locations.
Do not skip any assembly steps; you may find that you’ve installed
one component that hinders the installation of another.
Forming component leads: In a few cases you’ll find that the space
provided for a component on the PC board is larger than the distance
between the leads on the part itself. In such cases, you’ll need to
carefully bend the leads out and then down to fit the given space.
Always use needle-nose pliers to accomplish this task, and bend the
leads–don’t tug on them. This is especially important with capacitor
leads, which are fragile.
Bottom-Mounted Components
A number of components in the K2 are mounted on the bottom of the
PC boards to improve component spacing or for electrical reasons.
Component outline symbols are provided on both sides of each board,
so it will always be clear which side a particular component goes on.
You’ll be able to tell the top of the board from the bottom easily: the
top side has far more parts. Bottom-mounted parts are identified on the
schematic by this symbol:
Photographs
You should review the photographs in Appendix D to get an idea of
what the completed PC board assemblies look like.
Step-by-Step Assembly
Each step in the assembly process is accompanied by a check-box:
Top/bottom interference: In a few cases, top-mounted parts may
interfere with the trimming and soldering of a bottom-mounted part. In
this case, pre-trim the leads of the bottom-mounted part before final
placement, and solder it on the bottom rather than on the top. (Since all
holes are plated-through, you can solder on either side.)
ELECRAFT®
12
Integrated Circuits and ESD
The K2 transceiver uses integrated circuits and transistors that can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Problems caused by ESD
can often be difficult to troubleshoot because components may only be
degraded, at first, rather than fail completely.
To avoid such problems, simply touch an unpainted, grounded metal
surface before handling any components, and occasionally as you
build. We also recommend that you take the following anti-static
precautions (in order of importance):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Leave ESD-sensitive parts in their anti-static packaging until you
install them
Ground yourself using a wrist strap with a series 1 megohm
resistor (do NOT ground yourself directly, as this poses a shock
hazard)
Make sure your soldering iron has a grounded tip
Use an anti-static mat on your work bench
IC Sockets
Sockets are used for only the largest ICs. You should not use sockets
for the other ICs because they tend to be unreliable and can cause
problems due to added lead length. Since sockets are not used in most
cases, you must double-check the part number and orientation of each
IC before soldering.
When you solder components on these boards, the solder fills the
plated holes, making excellent contact. This means that you do not
need to leave a large "fillet" or build-up of solder on top of the pads
themselves. A small amount of solder will do for all connections.
Unfortunately, removing components from double-sided PC boards
can be difficult, since you must get all of the solder back out of the
hole before a lead can be removed. To do this, you'll need solder wick
and a vacuum desoldering tool (see techniques below).
The best strategy for avoiding de-soldering is to place all components
properly the first time. Double-check values and orientations, and
avoid damaging parts via ESD.
When removing components:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Soldering, Desoldering, and Plated-Through Holes
CAUTION: Solder contains lead, and its residue can be toxic.
Always wash your hands after handling solder.
ƒ
ƒ
The printed circuit boards used in the K2 have circuitry on both sides
("double-sided"). Boards of this type require plated-through holes to
complete electrical connections between the two sides.
Don't pull a lead or pin out of a hole unless the solder has been
removed, or you are applying heat. Otherwise, you can literally
pull out the plating on the plated-through hole.
Limit soldering iron contact to a few seconds at a time.
Use small-size solder-wick, about 0.1" or 2.5 mm wide. Use the
wick on both the top and bottom pads when possible. This helps
get all of the solder out of the hole.
Buy and learn how to use a large hand-operated vacuum
desoldering tool, such as the "Soldapullt," model DS017LS. Small
solder suckers are not effective.
With ICs and connectors, clip all of the pins at the body first, then
remove all of the pins slowly, one at a time. You may damage
pads and traces by trying to remove a component intact, possibly
leaving a PC board very difficult to repair.
Invest in a PC board vice with a heavy base if possible. This
makes parts removal easier because it frees up both hands.
If in doubt about a particular repair, ask for advice from Elecraft
or from a someone else with PCB repair experience. Our e-mail
reflector is also an excellent source for help.
ELECRAFT®
13
4. Control Board
The Control board is the "brain" of the K2. It monitors all signals
during receive and transmit, and handles display and control functions
via the Front Panel board. The microcontroller, analog and digital
control circuits, automatic gain control (AGC), and audio amplifier are
located on this board.
Components
i
Review the precautions described in the previous section
before handling any IC’s or transistors. These components can be
damaged by static discharge, and the resulting problems are often
difficult to troubleshoot.
Open the bag of components labeled CONTROL and sort the
parts into groups (resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc.). If any of the
components are unfamiliar, identify them using the illustrations in the
parts list, Appendix A.
Locate the Control board. It is the smallest of the three K2 PC
boards, labeled "K2 CONTROL" on the front side, in the lower righthand corner. The lower left-hand corner is notched.
Open the bag labeled MISCELLANEOUS and empty the
contents into a shallow box or pan. This will prevent loss of any of the
small hardware while allowing you to locate items as needed.
i
The Allen wrenches are located in a small bag with the
MISCELLANEOUS items. These wrenches may have been oiled
during manufacturing. Remove the wrenches and wipe off the oil, if
any, then discard the bag.
i
There are five sizes of 4-40 machine screws provided with the
kit. The relative sizes of the screws are shown below for identification
purposes (not to scale). All of the screws are black anodized except for
the 7/16" (11 mm) screws. The 3/16" (4.8 mm) pan-head screws are
the most numerous, and will be referred to as chassis screws
throughout the manual. There is only one flat-head, 3/16" screw.
Flat-head, 3/16” (4.8 mm)
Pan-head, 3/16” (4.8 mm)
(chassis screws)
Pan-head, 3/8” (9.5 mm)
Pan-head, 7/16” (11 mm)
Pan-head, 1/2” (12.7 mm)
Identify all of the 4-40 screws and sort them into groups.
ELECRAFT®
14
Assembly
The side of the Control board with most of the components is the
top side. With the top side of the Control board facing you and the
notch at the lower left, locate the position of resistor R5, near the left
edge. The label "R5" appears just below the resistor’s outline.
Install a 33-k resistor (orange-orange-orange) at R5, with the
orange bands at the top and the gold band (indicating 5% tolerance) at
the bottom. Make sure it is seated flush with the board, then bend the
leads on the bottom to hold it in place. Do not solder this resistor until
the remaining fixed resistors have been installed in the next step.
Install the remaining fixed resistors, which are listed below in
left-to-right PC board order. The resistors should all be oriented with
their first significant-digit band toward the left or top. This will make
the color codes easier to read if you need to re-check the values after
installation. Check 1% resistors with an ohmmeter.
Note: When multiple items appear on one line in a component list
such as the one below, complete all items on one line before moving
on to the next, as indicated by the small arrow. (In other words, install
R5 first, then R2, then go to the second line.)
__ R5, 33 k (ORG-ORG-ORG) ⇒ __ R2, 3.3 M (ORG-ORG-GRN)
__ R3, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R4, 5.6 k (GRN-BLU-RED)
__ R6, 100 (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R7, 1.78 k, 1% (BRN-VIO-GRY-BRN)
__ R8, 100, 1% (BRN-BLK-BLK-BLK)
__ R9, 806 k, 1% (GRY-BLK-BLU-ORG)
__ R10, 196 k, 1% (BRN-WHT-BLU-ORG)
__ R16, 10 (BRN-BLK-BLK) ⇒ __ R17, 3.3 M (ORG-ORG-GRN)
__ R21, 270 k (RED-VIO-YEL) __ R20, 2.7 ohms (RED-VIO-GLD)
Solder all of the resistors, then trim the leads as close as possible
to the solder joints. Some builders prefer to trim the leads before
soldering. Either method can be used.
Note: Save clipped leads from 1/4-watt resistors that are at least 1/2”
(13 mm) long. You’ll need several of them for ground test points and
other uses later on.
Locate RP6, a 5.1 k, 10-pin resistor network. ("RP" means
"resistor pack," another name for resistor networks.) RP6 is usually
labeled "770103512." Check the parts list for alternative resistor
network labels if necessary. Pin 1 of RP6 is indicated by a dot.
Locate the component outline for RP6 at the left end of the PC
board. Install the resistor network so that the end with the dot is lined
up with the "1" label.
Make sure the resistor network is seated firmly on the board, then
bend the leads at the far ends in opposite directions to hold it in place.
(Do not trim the leads.) Do not solder RP6 yet.
i
Components with many leads are difficult to remove once
soldered. Double-check the part numbers and orientation.
Install the remaining resistor networks in the order listed below.
Do not solder them until the next step.
__ RP1, 3.9 k, 10 pins (770103392) __ RP7, 33 k, 8 pins (8A3.333G)
__ RP2, 82 k, 8 pins (77083823)
__ RP3, 47 k, 10 pins (10A3.473G)
__ RP5, 470, 10 pins (10A3.471G) __ RP4, 82 k, 8 pins (77083823)
Solder the resistor networks. (No need to trim the leads.)
Install potentiometer R1 (50 k), located at the left side of the
board. R1 will sit above the board due to the shoulders on its pins.
Hold it in place (flat, not tilted) while soldering.
ELECRAFT®
15
Install the 82 mH shielded inductor (L1) as shown by its
component outline. Make sure the L1 is pressed down onto the PC
board as far as it can go, then bend the leads slightly to hold it in place
while soldering.
Install the 1N4148 diodes listed below. D1 is in the upper lefthand corner of the PC board. If a diode has only one band, the end
with the band (the cathode) should be oriented toward the banded end
of the corresponding PC board outline. If a diode has multiple bands,
the widest band indicates the cathode end.
__ D1, 1N4148
__ D2, 1N4148
Double-check the orientation of the diodes, then solder.
Find the component outline for diode D3, near the top edge of the
board (right end). Install and solder resistor R22 at this location (82 k,
gray-red-orange).
Install the small fixed capacitors listed below, beginning with C2
in the upper left-hand corner of the board. (This list includes all of the
fixed capacitors on the Control board except the tall, cylindrical
electrolytic types, which will be installed later.) The list shows both
the value and the capacitor labels, using notation explained in the
previous section. After installing each capacitor, bend the leads
outward to hold it in place, but do not solder.
Note: Remember to complete all items in each line before moving on
to the next. (Install C2, C3, and C4, then C7, etc.)
__ C2, .001 (102) ⇒
__ C7, 330 (331)
__ C9, .01 (103)
__ C5, .01 (103)
__ C42, 0.1 (104)
__ C19, .047 (473)
__ C3, .01 (103)
⇒
__ C6, .047 (473)
__ C10, .01 (103)
__ C14, .047 (473)
__ C16, .047 (473)
__ C21, 33 (33)
__ C4, 0.47 (474)
__ C8, 39 (39)
__ C12, .0027 (272)
__ C17, .01 (103)
__ C11, .01 (103)
__ C23, .01 (103)
__ C43, .001 (102)
__ C26, 0.1 (104)
__ C34, .001 (102)
__ C35, .01 (103)
__ C41, .01 (103)
__ C20, .001 (102)
__ C27, .022 (223)
__ C24, .0027 (272)
__ C30, .047 (473)
__ C36, .0027 (272)
__ C37, .01 (103)
__ C18, .01 (103)
__ C25, 0.1 (104)
__ C31, .01 (103)
__ C40, .01 (103)
__ C39, .01 (103)
__ C38, 680 (681)
Solder all of the small fixed capacitors.
ELECRAFT®
16
Install and solder the electrolytic capacitors listed below, which
are polarized. Be sure that the (+) lead is installed in the hole marked
with a "+" symbol. The (+) lead is usually longer than the (–) lead, and
the (–) lead is identified by a black stripe (Figure 4-1).
-
+
Install the remaining TO-92 package transistors in the order listed
below.
Figure 4-1
__ C1, 2.2 µF
__ C28, 220 µF
__ C32, 22 µF
⇒
__ C13, 22 µF
__ C29, 220 µF
⇒
__ C15, 100 µF
__ C33, 2.2 µF
Install and solder ceramic trimmer capacitor C22. Orient the flat
side of this trimmer as shown on its PC board outline.
Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, set C22 so that its
screwdriver slot is parallel to the outline of nearby crystal X2.
Locate Q12 (type PN2222A), which is a small, black TO-92
package transistor. Q12 and other TO-92 transistors may have either of
the two shapes shown in Figure 4-2. The large flat side of the device
must be aligned with the flat side of the component outline. The
part number may be found on either side.
Figure 4-2
Install Q12 near the upper left-hand corner of the PC board. Align
the large flat side of Q12 with its PC board outline as in Figure 4-2.
The body of the transistor should be about 1/8" (3 mm) above the
board; don’t force it down too far or you may break the leads. Bend
the leads of the transistor outward slightly on the bottom to hold it in
place. Solder Q12.
__ Q11, PN2222A ⇒
__ Q3, 2N7000
__ Q6, J310
__ Q9, MPS5179
__ Q1, 2N3906 ⇒
__ Q4, 2N7000
__ Q7, J310
__ Q10, MPS5179
__ Q2, 2N3906
__ Q5, 2N7000
__ Q8, PN2222A
Solder and trim the leads of these transistors.
ELECRAFT®
17
Install crystals X1 and X2 so that they are flat against the board.
X1 is 5.068 MHz and is located near the notch in the lower left-hand
corner. X2 is 4.000 MHz, and is located near the center of the board.
Solder the crystals.
Prepare two 3/4" (19 mm) jumpers wires from discarded
component leads. These short jumpers will be used to ground the
crystal cans in the next step.
i
Grounding the crystal cans in the following step is required to
ensure proper crystal oscillator performance.
i
The voltage regulators, U4 and U5, will be installed in the
following steps. These regulators have different voltages and must not
be interchanged. Check the labels before soldering.
Install U4 (LM2930T-8) and U5 (78M05, 7805T, L7805, etc.),
forming the leads as indicated (Figure 4-4). Fold the pins over the
shaft of a small screwdriver to create smooth bends. After inserting the
leads into the proper holes, secure each IC with a 4-40 x 3/8" (9.5 mm)
machine screw, #4 lock washer, and 4-40 nut. (These regulators may
have either plastic or metal mounting tabs.)
Use smooth
bend, not sharp
Referring to Figure 4-3, insert the jumper wires into the grounding
holes provided near X1 and X2. Fold each wire over the top of the
crystal and solder it to the top of the can. (Only a small amount of
solder is required.) Then solder and trim the wire on the bottom of the
board.
X1
X2
Figure 4-4
Solder the voltage regulator ICs.
Trim the IC leads as close to the PC board as possible.
Figure 4-3
Install a 40-pin IC socket at U6. (The microcontroller will be
inserted into the socket in a later step.) Orient the notched end of the
socket to the left as shown on the PC board outline. Bend two of the
socket’s diagonal corner leads slightly to hold the socket in place, then
solder only these two pins. If the socket does not appear to be seated
flat on the PC board, reheat the solder joints one at a time while
pressing on the socket.
Solder the remaining pins of the 40-pin socket.
ELECRAFT®
18
Install a shorting jumper onto the two right-hand pins of P7.
i
The connectors used in the following steps have plastic bodies
that can may melt if too much heat is applied during soldering, causing
the pins to be mis-positioned. Limit soldering time for each pin to 3
seconds maximum (1 to 2 seconds should be adequate).
Install the 2-pin male connectors, P5 and P6. As shown in Figure
4-5, the polarizing tab on each connector should be closest to the top
edge of the board. P5, the voltmeter input connector, can be found near
the upper left-hand corner of the board. P6 is used for frequency
counter input, which is in the upper right-hand corner.
Locking
Tab
Top side of
PC Board
Figure 4-5
Install the 10-pin, dual-row connector, P4 (to the left of P5). The
short ends of the 10 pins are inserted into the board. P5 must be seated
flat on the board before soldering.
Install P7, a 3-pin male connector (to the right of P5). The short
ends of the 3 pins are inserted into the board.
At the upper left and right corners of the board are short jumpers,
labeled with ground symbols ( ). Use discarded component leads to
make 3/4" (19 mm) long U-shaped wires for each jumper (Figure 4-6).
Solder the jumpers on the bottom of the board, with the top of the Ushape approx. 1/4" (6 mm) above the board.
Figure 4-6
Locate the outlines for resistors R18 and R19 on the bottom side
of the Control board.
i
The pads used for R18 and R19 are shared with connectors J1
and J2, which are labeled on the top side of the board. These
connectors are provided with the KAF2 and KDSP2 audio filter
options. You should not install J1 and J2, or an audio filter option,
until after K2 assembly and checkout have been completed.
Install short wire jumpers at R18 and R19. Make the jumpers
from discarded component leads as you did above, but keep them flat
against the board. Solder the jumpers on the top side.
Install the following resistors on the bottom side of the board
(solder on the top side):
__ R12, 820 (GRY-RED-BRN)
__ R11, 47 k (YEL-VIO-ORG)
ELECRAFT®
19
Top side of
PC Board
i
The connectors along the bottom edge of the board (P1, P2
and P3) will be installed next. It is very difficult to remove them once
they are soldered. Follow all instructions carefully.
P3
Hold the Control board vertically as shown in the side view
below (Figure 4-7). The top side of the board--the side with most of
the components--should be to the right.
Turn to page 8 and review Figure 3-3, which shows how the
Control board plugs into the RF board. P1, P2, and P3 will all be
installed on the top side of the Control board as shown.
Position 6-pin right-angle connector P1 as shown in the side view
below (Figure 4-7). Do not solder P1 until the next step. The plastic
part of the connector must be seated flat against the PC board, and the
pins must be parallel to the board. Do not bend or trim the pins on the
bottom of the board.
Figure 4-8
Install P3, the 20-pin, dual-row right-angle connector (Figure
4-8). Use the same method you used for P1. Do not solder P3 until you
are sure that it is seated properly.
Install P2, the 36-pin, dual-row, right-angle connector. Use the
same method you used for P1 and P3.
i
Top side of
PC Board
When you install ICs in the following steps, always straighten
the leads of each IC first as shown in Figure 4-9. The two rows of pins
must be straight and parallel to each other to establish the proper pin
spacing for insertion into the PC board or socket.
P1
To straighten the pins, rest one entire row of pins against a hard, flat
surface. Press down gently on the other row of pins and rock the IC
forward to bend the pins into position as shown below.
Figure 4-7
Solder just the two end pins of P1, then examine the placement of
the connector. If P1 is not flat against the board, re-heat the solder on
the end pins one at a time while pressing firmly on the connector.
Once it is in the right position, solder all pins. Do not trim the leads.
Flared
Straight
Figure 4-9
ELECRAFT®
20
Before handling any IC, touch an unpainted, grounded
metal surface or put on a conductive wrist-strap.
Bend two of U2’s corner pins out slightly on the bottom of the
board to hold the IC firmly in place, flat against the top of the board.
Find pin 1 and verify that its pad is either round or oval. Once U2 is
properly seated, solder all eight pins, using a minimum of solder.
Locate U2, an 8-pin IC, part number LM833. (LM833 is the basic
part number. There may be an additional prefix or suffix or other
markings.) This and all remaining ICs on the Control board are DualInline Packages, or DIPs. Referring to Figure 4-10, identify the
notched or dimpled end of the IC. IC pins are counted starting from
pin 1 (as shown below) and going counter-clockwise.
Install the ICs listed below. Bend the pins to hold each IC in place
as you did with U2, but do not solder until the next step. The notched
or dimpled end of each IC must be aligned with the notched end of its
PC board outline.
i
Notch
Pin 1
Note: For U1, the IC type supplied may be either NE602 or SA602.
__ U1, NE602
__ U8, MAX534
Figure 4-10
__ U7, 25LC320
__ U10, LMC660
Check the orientation of pin 1 on each IC by looking at the
associated PC board pads, as before. Then solder all of the ICs.
Dimple
Pin 1
__ U3, LM6482
__ U9, LM380
Locate the microcontroller, U6.
Straighten the pins of U6 (see Figure 4-9). With a large IC such as
this, you can hold the IC body at both ends as you re-form each row of
pins.
Straighten the leads of U2 (see Figure 4-9).
Install U2 in the orientation shown by its PC board outline, near
the upper left-hand corner of the PC board, but do not solder it yet.
Make sure the notched or dimpled end is lined up with the notched end
of the PC board outline. Even though the outline is covered when the
IC is installed, you can still verify that the IC is installed correctly by
looking at pin 1. The PC board pad corresponding to pin 1 will be
either oval or round.
i
You may overheat the IC pins or PC pads if you take an
excessive length of time to solder. After a few tries, you should be able
to solder an IC pin in about 1 or 2 seconds.
i
When the microcontroller is pressed in its socket, you must be
careful to avoid jamming its pins. Make sure that all pins are lined up
with the associated holes in the socket before pressing down on the IC.
Watch the pins on both rows as you press down, re-aligning them with
the socket holes individually if necessary.
Insert the microcontroller, U6, into its socket. Make sure that
pin 1 on the IC itself is lined up with the pin 1 label near the lower
left-hand corner of the PCB outline. Note: The revision label on the
IC (usually white) may not be oriented the same direction as the text
printed on the IC. Do not use the label as a guide--use the notch or
dimple to identify pin 1.
ELECRAFT®
21
Key Shaping Components (Required)
Your K2 kit includes recent changes that provide an optimized keying envelope shape (sigmoidal, or S-shaped leading and trailing edges).
The result is completely click-free CW transmission. Two of the parts for this change must be installed on the back of the Control board as
described below.
Locate the green insulated hookup wire. Strip two 1/4" (6.4 mm) lengths of insulation from one end of the wire. These will be used to insulate
the leads of C46 in the following steps.
Slip the two lengths of insulation over the leads of a .01 µf capacitor ("103"). This is a new component (C46), not present on the board.
i
Figure 4-11, below, shows the bottom side of the Control board. Components shown with dotted outlines are located on the top side.
On the bottom side of the Control board, solder C46 between R21 and the base lead of Q8 as shown below. Keep lead length short.
Figure 4-11
A 22 µF electrolytic capacitor has also been added (C45). Solder C45 as indicated above, between U8 pin 2 (+ lead) and U8 pin 14 (- lead).
Carefully compare your installation of C46 and C45 to Figure 4-11. Make sure the leads of these capacitors are soldered to the indicated pads.
Verify the orientation of the (+) and (-) leads on C45.
ELECRAFT®
22
Option Components
Resistance Checks
All component locations on the Control board should now be filled
except for the following:
In the table below, "<" means "less than," and ">" means "greater
than." When measuring resistances that show a minimum value in the
table (such as > 100 k), your resistance reading may be much higher or
even infinite. This is typical when using a DMM (digital multimeter).
If you use an analog meter you may find that some or all resistance
measurements are too low. Note: Some digital multimeters will flash
their display to indicate an infinite resistance.
•
•
C44 (top side of the board near the microcontroller, U6). This
capacitor will not be used.
J1 and J2 (bottom side). These two connectors are provided for an
audio filter option (KAF2 or KDSP2). An audio filter should not
be installed until the K2 has been completed and tested.
Visual Inspection
Nearly all problems with kits are due to incorrectly installed
components or poor solder joints. You can avoid these problems by
doing a simple visual inspection. A few minutes spent here may save
you hours of troubleshooting time.
Make sure there are no components installed backwards. Check
all diodes, resistor networks, electrolytic capacitors, and ICs. (The
parts placement drawings in Appendix F will be helpful when
checking diode orientation.)
Examine the bottom of the PC board carefully for the following
(use a magnifying glass if available):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
cold solder joints
solder bridges
unsoldered pins
Perform the resistance checks listed below to ensure that there are
no shorts in the most critical control circuits. (The Control board will
be fully tested in a later section.)
Test Point
P2 pin 1
U5, OUT ("5V" pin)
U4, OUT ("8V" pin)
Q1 collector
Q2 collector
U3 pin 8
U6 pin 13
U6 pin 14
U6 pin 29
U6 pin 30
U8 pin 2
U8 pin 15
U8 pin 16
Signal Name
12V
5A
8A
8T
8R
12V IN
OSC1
OSC2
DASH
DOT/PTT
VPWR
VBIAS-XFIL
VBFO
Res. (to GND)
> 10 k
>2k
3-7k
>1M
>1M
> 10 k
> 100 k
> 100 k
70 - 90 k
70 - 90 k
> 100 k
> 100 k
> 100 k
ELECRAFT®
23
5. Front Panel Board
The Front Panel board includes all of the control and display devices
that you’ll use when operating the K2, including the liquid-crystal
display (LCD), LED bargraph, push-button switches, and
potentiometers. See Appendix D for photos of the completed front
panel assembly.
SWITCH SPACING TOOL
Components
Open the bag labeled FRONT PANEL and sort the parts into
groups (resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc.). Observe anti-static
precautions when handling ICs and transistors.
Locate the front panel PC board, which is just a bit larger than the
Control board. It is labeled "K2 FP" on the top side, in the lower righthand corner.
Assembly
Figure 5-1
Position pushbutton switches S1 and S2 as shown in Figure 5-2,
using the switch spacing tool to set the switch height. Make sure all
four legs of each switch are centered in their holes, then gently push
each switch until it is resting flush against the switch-spacing tool.
(Caution: switch pins are fragile.) Do not solder yet.
S1
i
Your K2’s appearance and operation will be adversely
affected if the controls or display are not mounted correctly, and in the
indicated sequence. There are also special instructions for installing
components on the bottom of the board.
Locate the Spacer Set PC board (Figure 5-1). Using long-nose
pliers, carefully break out the pushbutton switch spacing tool and the
four backlight LED spacers. Break the material only at the four
indicated points. Note: The switch spacing tool doubles as the PC
board for the RF probe, which will be assembled later.
Figure 5-2
S2
ELECRAFT®
24
i
Top of
board
1/16”
When you install the resistor networks in the next step,
you must align the dotted end of the network with the pin 1 label
on the PC board outline.
Install the resistor networks listed below (top side of the board).
Double-check pin 1 orientation and values before soldering.
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-3 shows a side view of a switch that is properly mounted
(spacing tool not shown). The leads of the switches will just be visible
on the bottom of the board. Proper switch height is important for
maintaining an even appearance.
Once you’re satisfied that S1 and S2 are seated correctly, solder
the leads (on the bottom side of the board). Leave the spacing tool in
place until you’ve finished soldering both switches.
Install the remaining switches, S3-S16, using the same technique.
When you get to S8 through S16, you may install three switches at a
time using the spacing tool.
Install the following 1/4-watt fixed resistors, which are listed in
left-to-right PC board order. Solder the resistors after all have been
installed. (R13 and a few other parts are part of the SSB adapter
option, and are not included in the basic K2 kit. A check-list of these
components is provided at the end of this section.)
__ R12, 120 (BRN-RED-BRN) ⇒ __ R10, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ R9, 220 (RED-RED-BRN)
__ R11, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R6, 4.7 k (YEL-VIO-RED)
__ R7, 4.7 k (YEL-VIO-RED)
__ R14, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
Install the following resistors on the bottom of the board. Solder
them on the bottom side. Keep your iron tip away from the bodies of
the resistors.
__ R16, 15 k (BRN-GRN-ORG)
__ R15, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ RP2, 120, 10 pins (770101121) (dotted end should be near "RP2" label)
__ RP1, 100 k, 10 pins (10A1.104G) (dotted end near "RP1" label)
Install and solder the diodes listed below, observing proper
orientation as described in the previous section.
__ D4, 1N5817
__ D5, 1N5817
__ D6, 1N5817
Install and solder the following capacitors. C9 is located on the
bottom of the board and must be soldered on the top side.
__ C1, .047 (473) __ C2, .01 (103)
__ C3, .047 (473)
__ C9, .01 (103), on bottom
Install PN2222A transistors at Q1 and Q2, near the middle of the
board, and solder. These transistors must be mounted so the lead
length above the PC board is less than 1/8" (3 mm) to prevent them
from hitting the front panel.
There are two ground jumpers on the Front Panel board, one at
the far left and the other at the lower right, labeled with a
symbol.
Use discarded component leads to make 3/4" (19 mm) long U-shaped
wires for each jumper. Solder them on the bottom side.
Install a 40-pin IC socket at U1, on the bottom of the board. (The
IC will be inserted into this socket later.) Orient the notched end of
the socket to the left as shown on the PC board outline.
ELECRAFT®
25
i
The ICs to be installed in the next step are very sensitive to
static discharge. Touch a grounded surface before handling each
IC. Also note that U4's label will read upside-down (pin 1 at the
right) when properly installed.
Polarizing
nub
Install the following ICs. Before soldering, verify that the ICs are
oriented correctly (pin 1 associated with a round or oval pad).
Figure 5-4
__ U4, A6B595KA or TPIC6B595
__ U3, A6B595KA or TPIC6B595
__ U2, 74HC165
i
The bargraph LED will be installed in the following two steps.
This component must be seated flat on the PC board or it will interfere
with final front panel assembly. Also, any misalignment will be visible
from the front of the K2.
Install two 3/16" (4.8 mm) diameter x 1/4" (6.4 mm) long round
standoffs on the top of the board, adjacent to the microphone jack
(Figure 5-5). Use two #4 lock washers between each standoff and the
PC board as shown. Secure the standoffs from the bottom side with
chassis screws. Recall that "chassis screw" is short-hand for 3/16" (4.8
mm) long pan-head machine screws.
Locate the bargraph LED, DS2. The bargraph has a beveled
corner or edge that indicates pin 1. Install DS2 as shown by its PC
board outline, just to the left of the LCD. Bend two opposite corner
pins slightly to hold it to the board, then solder only these two pins.
If the bargraph is not perfectly flat against the PC board, re-heat
the solder on the corner pins alternately while pressing it down. There
may be small nubs on the back of the bargraph LED. If so do not
remove them. Simply be sure all four nubs are against the PC board.
Once it is in the correct position, solder the remaining pins.
Remove any hardware supplied with the microphone jack, J2. The
nut and washer will not be used.
Install the microphone jack (J2) in the lower left-hand corner of
the board, with its polarizing nub at the top (Figure 5-4). Press the jack
down until it is completely flat against the PC board. Re-check the
orientation of the polarizing nub before soldering.
Figure 5-5
ELECRAFT®
26
Install another 3/16" (4.8 mm) diameter x 1/4" (6.4 mm) long
round standoff on the top of the PC board, on the left side of the large
square hole in the middle of the board. The standoff mounting hole is
below C2. Use the same hardware as indicated in Figure 5-5, including
two #4 lock washers and one chassis screw.
Install the audio-taper potentiometer, R3, in the lower left-hand
corner. (The PCB is labeled "AUDIO" at R3.) Push only on the
frame, not the shaft. Make sure that the potentiometer body is parallel
to the PC board and is pressed against the board as far as it will go
before soldering.
Install two 1/4" (6.4 mm) diameter x 1/2" (12.7 mm) long hex
standoffs on the bottom of the board (Figure 5-6). The holes for these
standoffs are indicated by large pads on the top and bottom of the
board. Use one lock washer and a chassis screw for each standoff.
Insert the lock washer between the standoff and PC board.
Install the four 5-k linear-taper potentiometers at R1, R2, R4, and
R5. (The PC board is labeled "LINEAR" at each pot.) Verify correct
positioning as you did in the previous step.
i
Before installing J1 in the following step, review Figure
3-3 (page 8) to be sure you have J1 on the correct side of the
board.
Bottom of
PCB
The front panel attaches to the RF board via J1, a 20-pin singlerow female connector. Install J1 on the bottom side of the board
(Figure 5-7). Solder just two pins, one at either end.
Bottom side of
PC Board
Figure 5-6
J1
Identify the two different types of panel-mount potentiometers.
Four of them are 5-kohm linear-taper types, labeled "B5K". The fifth
is an audio-taper type, labeled "A5K". They may be physically
identical or have slightly different shafts, body colors, etc.
Figure 5-7
i
When you install the panel-mount potentiometers in the
next two steps, do not push on the shafts, which may damage the
part. Push only on the metal frame.
Re-heat the two end pins and press the connector down until J1 is
seated flat against the board, then solder the remaining pins.
ELECRAFT®
27
Install rectangular gray key caps on S1 and S3 so the key caps are
parallel to the long axis of the PC board (Figure 5-8). The caps are
installed simply by pressing them onto the switch plungers.
Place two 3/4" (19 mm) long spacers over the leads of each
backlight LED as shown in Figure 5-9.
Gray keycaps
LED
Square Keycap
diffuser
Figure 5-8
Install a square black key cap on S7 as shown above.
spacers (2)
Install rectangular black key caps on the remaining switches.
Figure 5-9
i
Before handling U1, touch an unpainted, grounded metal
surface or put on a conductive wrist-strap.
Straighten the pins of U1, the LCD driver (PCF8566), as you did
with the microcontroller on the Control board.
Position the backlight assembly between the mounting holes
labeled D2 and D3 as shown in Figure 5-10. The diffuser must be
parallel to and 1/8" (3 mm) above the PC board. To hold the LED
spacers and backlight assembly in place, use a rubber band or bend the
LED leads out slightly on either end.
Insert U1 into its socket on the bottom of the board. (This must be
done before continuing with LCD installation, since the LCD’s
presence will make pressing U1 into its socket much more difficult.)
Be sure that U1 is completely seated with no bent pins.
spacers (2)
Locate the LCD backlight assembly, which is about 3" (7.5 cm)
long. It includes the diffuser and two small LEDs, one at each end. Do
not remove the backing from either side of the diffuser.
Make sure the LEDs in the LCD backlight assembly are pressed
into the diffuser and are not mis-aligned or loose.
diffuser
D2
D3
Figure 5-10
ELECRAFT®
28
Examine the backlight assembly closely to ensure that it is
parallel to the Front Panel board and seated as far down on the board
as it will go (exactly 1/8" [3 mm] above the board).
LCD
Solder D2 and D3. If the backlight assembly is not flat against the
PC board, re-heat the LED pins one at a time and press it into place.
i
CAUTION: The LCD and its pins are fragile—handle
carefully. Do not drop the LCD on a hard surface, as it is made of
glass and may break. Do not remove the protective plastic film from
the front surface of the LCD until later in this section when the front
panel assembly is completed.
Carefully remove the LCD from its packing materials.
i
CAUTION: Do not peel off the thick plastic material on
either side of the LCD, or the LCD will have to be replaced (not
covered under warranty).
Hold the LCD up to a bright light and look at both sides for the
presence of a very thin, clear protective film (like transparent tape). All
LCDs have such film on the front surface of the LCD, which will be
removed in a later step. But the back of some LCDs (not all) may also
have such film, with faintly visible yellow or gray diagonal lines. If
protective film is found on the back side, use a fingernail at one corner
of the LCD to dislodge it, then peel it away.
The LCD has six pins along its lower edge (three on each side),
and 24 pins along the upper edge. Place the LCD in its proper position
on the board but do not solder yet.
Figure 5-11
The LCD must be seated flat against the diffuser as shown in the
edge view (Figure 5-11). If the LCD does not appear to be seated
correctly, it may be because the backlight LEDs or spacers are misaligned. When the assembly is installed correctly, the LCD’s pins will
all protrude the same distance from the bottom of the board. (Some
units may be supplied with shorter pins that do not protrude at all.)
Solder the four corner pins of the LCD, then re-check the
alignment of the LCD assembly. If everything looks correct, solder the
remaining pins. LCD pins can be soldered on the top of the board if
they do not protrude from the bottom.
Attach two thin, 1/4" (6.4 mm) self-adhesive rubber pads to the
bottom side of the Front Panel board in the positions indicated in
Figure 5-12. The pads should be placed as close as possible to the
corners, but should not hang over on either edge. These pads establish
the correct spacing for the Front Panel board.
Pad
Pad
Top Edge
(Bottom of PC Board)
Figure 5-12
ELECRAFT®
29
Uninstalled Components
Resistance Checks
Check off each of the components in the list below, verifying that
they are not yet installed.
__ C4, .01 (103)
__ C7, .01 (103)
__ C5, .01 (103)
__ C8, .01 (103)
__ C6, .01 (103)
__ R13, 68 k, 1%
__ RP3, 10 k resistor network
__ Q3, 2N3906
__ P1 (Mic. Configuration connector, on the bottom of the board)
The unfilled locations (above) are for parts that are provided with
the SSB adapter (model KSB2). If you have the SSB adapter kit, you
should install them now. Follow the third and fourth assembly steps
under Front Panel Board Components in the KSB2 manual (page
16).
Visual Inspection
Make sure there are no components installed backwards. Check
all diodes, resistor networks, electrolytic capacitors, and ICs. The parts
placement drawings in Appendix F will be helpful in verifying the
orientation of diodes.
Examine the bottom of the PC board for solder bridges, cold
solder joints, or unsoldered components.
Set all potentiometers to their mid-points (approx.).
Perform the resistance checks (to ground) listed below. U1 is on
the back of the board.
Test Point
U1 pin 1
U1 pin 2
U1 pin 3
U1 pin 4
U1 pin 5
U1 pin 6 - 11
U1 pin 12
U1 pin 13 - 40
J1 pin 1
J1 pin 2
J1 pin 3
J1 pin 4
J1 pin 5
J1 pin 6
J1 pin 7
J1 pin 8
J1 pin 9
J1 pin 10
J1 pin 11
J1 pin 12
J1 pin 13
J1 pin 14
J1 pin 15
J1 pin 16
J1 pin 17
J1 pin 18
J1 pin 19
J1 pin 20
Signal Name
IDAT
ICLK
/SYNC
CLK
5A
Ground
2V
LCD segments
AF gain 1
AF gain 2
AF gain 3
DOT/PTT
MIC AF
ENC B
AUXBUS
Ground
SR DOUT
SR DIN
SR WRT
SR CK
ENC A
SR RD
VPOTS
ICLK
IDAT
5A
RF gain
Ground
Res. (to GND)
25 - 35 k
25 - 35 k
40 - 60 k
> 50 k
15 - 40 k
0
9 - 11 k
> 50 k
>1M
>1M
>1M
>1M
>1M
> 50 k
>1M
0
> 50 k
> 50 k
> 50 k
> 50 k
> 50 k
> 50 k
10 - 60 k
25 - 35 k
25 - 35 k
15 - 40 k
1.5 - 3.5 k
0
ELECRAFT®
30
Front Panel Final Assembly
Locate the front panel chassis piece. Place it on a soft cloth to
protect the finish and labeling.
i
In the following step, the paint masking material will be
removed from the inside of the front panel. The masking material
is usually green, but may appear gray because of paint overspray.
DO NOT remove the masking material from the other chassis
pieces at this time.
Some holes in the front panel were masked on the inside surface
during painting. If masking tape (usually green in color) is still
present, you'll need to remove it. The holes that are masked are in the
four corners, along the top and bottom edges.
Locate the green plastic bargraph filter and two pieces of doublebacked tape. These items will be found in a small bag with the serial
number label.
i
Caution: The adhesive on the double-backed tape is very
strong. Once you position the tape on the green filter, you will not
be able to remove it. Be very careful to align the tape with the long
edges of the filter as explained below.
Remove the white paper backing from one side of each piece of
tape. Attach the tape to the long edges of the green filter (Figure 5-13).
Be careful not to get any adhesive on the center portion of the filter,
since it might be visible after installation.
Masking tape should be removed as follows:
ƒ
ƒ
Using a blunt instrument such as a ball-point pen, push on the tape
through a hole until the tape begins to lift away from the surface.
Peel the tape completely off, using a sharp tool if necessary. Be
careful not to nick or scratch the outer surface of the panel.
align edge of tape
with filter
After removing any masking tape, place the front panel chassis
piece face-down, with the large, round microphone jack hole on the
right.
Figure 5-13
ELECRAFT®
31
Remove the brown paper backing from the other side of each
piece of tape, then turn the filter/tape assembly adhesive-side down.
Carefully center the green plastic filter over the inside of the bargraph
LED hole (Figure 5-14).
Turn the front panel face up.
Position the clear plastic LCD bezel over the LCD and bargraph
holes as shown in Figure 5-15. The bezel goes on the outside of the
panel.
Secure the bezel with four 2-56 screws (stainless steel) as shown
in Figure 5-15. Tighten the 2-56 screws only the amount needed to
hold the bezel to the front panel. Over-tightening may crack the
bezel or strip the threaded holes in the panel.
Green Film
E
L E C R A F T
K2
T R A N S C E I V E R
Tape
2-56 Screw (4)
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
LCD Bezel
ELECRAFT®
32
Remove the insulation from four 1.5" (38 mm) lengths of green
hookup wire.
Install the bare wires on the bottom of the front panel PC board,
using the four pads below the large rectangular hole (Figure 5-16).
Solder and trim the wires on the top side of the board. The wires
will be connected to the optical encoder, Z1, in a later step.
Insert the front panel PC board assembly into the front panel. The
pushbutton switch caps on both sides of the LCD should protrude
slightly as shown in the side view, Figure 5-17a.
Note: the board/panel assembly will not be rigidly held in place until
it is mated with the RF and Control boards in a later section.
(b)
(a)
Figure 5-16
Remove the protective plastic film from the face of the LCD. Be
careful not to scratch the glass. Caution: Do not peel off the LCD
glass, just the thin protective film. The LCD will not be usable if
you lift the glass itself.
Figure 5-17
A 1/4" (6.4 mm) standoff on the PC board should now be visible
through the hole just to the left of the encoder mounting hole. Secure
the panel to this standoff using the 4-40 x 3/16" (4.8 mm) flat-head
screw as shown in Figure 5-17b.
Remove the hardware from the shaft of the encoder, Z1, and
discard the lock washer, which will not be used. Insert the encoder
through the hole in the Front Panel board (Figure 5-18a).
Cut 1/8" (3 mm) off the end of each of the encoder's four
connector pins.
ELECRAFT®
33
Attach the encoder to the inside of the front panel using the nut
and flat washer only. Figure 5-18 shows the side view (a) and front
view (b) with encoder properly installed. The encoder has a small
metal tab near the shaft that will only allow it to be installed one way.
Do not over-tighten the nut. (Note: the green encoder bushing is metal,
not plastic.)
Attach small knobs to the potentiometer shafts, starting with the
KEYER and POWER controls. Each knob's two set screws can be
tightened using the small Allen wrench (.050", 1.3 mm). The knobs
should be mounted as close as possible to the panel without touching
it. Align the pointers per panel labeling.
Locate the 1" (25 mm) dia. by 1/16" (1.6 mm) thick felt washer,
and place it over the encoder nut (Figure 5-19). The washer should be
seated on the front panel, with the nut inside it.
(b)
(a)
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Attach the four encoder wires you installed earlier to the
matching pins on the back of the encoder. Each wire should be
wrapped securely around the base of its matching pin, with no slack in
the wire. Trim and solder the wires, making sure they aren't shorting to
each other or to the encoder body, which is conductive.
Set all potentiometers to midway in their rotation.
i
In the next step, a small knob may fit too tightly onto its
potentiometer shaft. If so, rotate the shaft until it bumps up against one
of its stops, place the knob at the top of the shaft, and rotate it slowly
in the same direction while gently pressing it down.
Place the large knob on the encoder shaft. Push the knob on until
it just touches the felt washer. If the knob does not spin freely, move it
out slightly. If the knob is not contacting the felt washer at all, it may
"drift" slightly once it stops spinning.
Using the larger Allen wrench (5/64", 2 mm), tighten the two set
screws alternately, in small increments.
i
At this point, the pushbutton switches may not all protrude an
equal distance. The switch height will become equalized once the front
panel assembly is mated to the RF board in a later step.
ELECRAFT®
34
6. RF Board
Most of the K2’s receiver and transmitter circuits are located on the
RF board, including filters, oscillators, and RF amplifiers. The front
panel and Control boards plug into the RF board, and the chassis
pieces are designed to form a tight enclosure around it (see photos in
Appendix D). In addition, many option boards plug directly into the
RF board to minimize wiring.
Assembly and testing of the RF board is broken into three parts:
Part I: The DC and control circuits are installed so that the front panel
and Control boards can be plugged in and tested. The I/O controller
(U1 on the RF board) is also installed and tested at this time. Once this
phase of assembly is completed, you’ll have the K2’s built-in test
equipment available for testing and aligning the remaining circuits.
Part II: Synthesizer and receiver components are installed and tested.
By the end of Part II you’ll have the K2 receiving on 40 meters.
Part III. Transmitter components and all remaining filter components
are installed. The K2 is then aligned on all bands.
Components
i
Review anti-static precautions before handling transistors or
ICs.
Open the bags labeled RF and sort the components into related
groups. In later steps you’ll sort some of the components according to
value to reduce the likelihood of assembly errors.
Locate the RF board and place it in front of you with the
component side up (the side with most of the parts), and the front edge
facing you (the edge with the irregular cutouts). Throughout this
section we’ll refer to the different areas of the board in terms of their
proximity to you. For example, "front-left" means the corner closest to
you on the left.
ELECRAFT®
35
Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the RF board using
Figure 6-1 to identify the major sections. If you flip the board over
you’ll see that there are a few components on the bottom of the board,
primarily in the transmitter section.
Install 2-D fasteners at 5 locations on the bottom of the board as
shown in Figure 6-3. Secure each fastener from the top side of the
board using two chassis screws (black, 3/16" [4.7 mm]) and two #4
lock washers. The washers go on the top side of the board.
T-R Switch
Band-Pass
Filters
XMTR
Low-pass
Filters
U1 (I/O Controller)
Synthesizer
Holes offset
from center
Figure 6-2
RCVR
(Bottom of board)
2-D Fasteners
(5)
Figure 6-1
Assembly, Part I
1/4"
Standoffs
Locate a 2-D fastener and hold it vertically as shown in Figure
6-2. Looking at a side with two holes, note that the holes are offset
from the center. When you install the fasteners in the following step,
be sure to position them so that the holes in the fastener are shifted in
the same direction as the holes in the PC board outlines on the bottom
of the board.
Figure 6-3
ELECRAFT®
36
Make sure that the 2-D fasteners on the edges line up with the
edge of the PC board and do not hang over. If they hang over or do not
match their component outlines, they are installed backwards.
Install two 3/16" (4.8 mm) diameter by 1/4" (6.4 mm) long round
standoffs on the bottom of the board at the locations identified in
Figure 6-3. Secure these standoffs from the top side with chassis
screws and #4 lock washers. Do not put lock washers between the
bottom of the board and the standoffs.
Turn the board back over to the top side. Install the 28-pin IC
socket at U1, near the middle of the board (Figure 6-1). The notched
end of the socket should be at the left. Make sure the socket is flat
against the PC board before soldering. (U1 itself will be installed in a
later step.)
i
Solder all of the remaining relay pins.
Install R1 and R2 (220 ohms, RED-RED-BRN), near the back
left corner of the board.
i
To avoid stray signal coupling, all capacitors on the RF board
must be mounted as close to the PC board as possible (without
damaging the leads or their epoxy coating).
Install C1 and C2 (.001 µF, "102"), which are on the left edge.
Install electrolytic capacitors C105 and C106 (2.2 µF), located
near the front-left corner.
Install R35 and R36 (82, GRY-RED-BLK) just to the right of
C105.
In the following steps you will install the latching relays (K1K17). Relay pins must not be bent or trimmed, even after placement on
the PC board, as this may cause unreliable mechanical operation.
Since the pins cannot be bent to hold the relays on the board, an
alternative assembly technique using a flat surface must be used. For
this technique to work, the relays must be installed before any of the
taller components.
Install R115 (.05 ohms, 3 watts) at the front right corner of the
board. Form the leads as indicated by the component outline.
Place relays K1-K17 on the top side of the RF board. One end of
each relay has a heavy line printed across the top to indicate the pin 1
end. This end must be matched with the same end of the relay’s PC
board outline. Do not solder the relays yet.
Install the internal speaker connector, P5, which is a 2-pin
connector like that shown in Figure 4-5. P5 is mounted near the on-off
switch (S1). Position the connector as shown by its component outline,
with the vertical locking ramp toward S1.
When all of the relays have been placed on the board, lay a flat
object such as a book or piece of cardboard on top of the relays to keep
them in place, then flip the board over.
Install high-current diodes D10 and D12 (large black body),
located near the right edge of the board:
Solder only two pins (at opposite corners) on each relay. Do not
bend or trim relay leads.
Turn the board back over and verify that all of the relays are in
the correct orientation and are seated flat on the board.
Install the following components to the left of R115.
__ C111, 2.2 µF electrolytic
__ R113, 82 (GRY-RED-BLK)
("+" lead goes into the square pad)
__ D10, 95SQ015
__ D12, SB530
(a 1N5821 may be substituted for D12)
Install the following components near D10:
__ C77, .001 (102)
__ R69, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
__ C196, .047 (473)
__ R66, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
ELECRAFT®
37
Install the self-resetting fuse, F1, near D10. F1 is yellow and
looks like a square-bodied capacitor. One side is labeled "G300".
Install the key jack, J1, at the back-left corner of the board.
Before soldering, make sure that the jack is aligned with its PC board
outline.
Install the headphone jack, J2, on the small board extension near
the front left corner. The pins on J2 are not very long, so they will be
nearly flush with the bottom of the board. Solder the pin closest to the
front edge first (ground), then verify that the jack is seated flat on its
plastic nubs before soldering the remaining pins.
Install the power switch, S1, at the right front corner. (S1's key
cap will be installed later.)
Install D8 and D18 (1N4148), on the bottom of the board, toward
the right edge. Make sure the banded end of each diode is aligned with
the band on its component outline.
i
In the steps that follow you’ll install the connectors that mate
with the control and Front Panel boards. These connectors must be
installed properly to ensure reliable mechanical connection. They are
very difficult to remove once installed, so follow all instructions
carefully. Review Figure 3-3 (page 8) for correct placement.
Install the 6-pin, single-row female connector, J6, which is just
left of the power switch. It must be seated vertically on the board and
must not be tilted (Figure 6-4). Solder just one pin near the center of
J6.
Install the DC input jack, J3, at the back right corner. The 3 leads
on the jack must be lined up with the slot-shaped holes in the
component outline. If the holes are a tight fit, press firmly until the
connector snaps into position.
J6
Install the antenna jack, J4 (BNC), just to the left of J3.
Install the following components near U1 (at the middle of the
board). You may need to confirm the part number of U2 (78L06),
since it is easy to confuse it with U8 (78L05). Use a magnifying glass
if necessary.
__ U2 (78L06)
__ C140, .001 (102)
__ C139, 0.1 (104)
__ R64, 100 (BRN-BLK-BRN)
Install the ceramic resonator, Z5, near U1. (Z5 looks like a
capacitor with 3 pins.) It can be installed in either orientation.
Install R65 (10 k, BRN-BLK-ORG) on the bottom of the board,
near U1.
Figure 6-4
If J6 does not appear to be completely flush with the board, reheat the soldered pin and press down. Once it is installed correctly,
solder the remaining pins.
Install the 20-pin, dual-row female connector, J8, near the front
left corner of the board. Use the same technique you used for J6. This
connector must be seated flush with the board before soldering.
Install 36-pin dual-row female connector J7 in the same manner
as J6 and J8.
ELECRAFT®
38
Position 20-pin male right-angle connector P1 on the bottom of
the board (Figure 6-5), but do not solder P1 yet. Review Figure 3-3
(page 8) for correct placement. The short ends of the bent pins are
inserted into the holes, and the long ends must be parallel with the
board.
Front edge
Top of board
i
Before handling U1, touch an unpainted, grounded metal
surface or put on a conductive wrist-strap.
Install the I/O controller, U1 (PIC16F872 or 16F872A), in its
socket (near the middle of the board). Be sure to align the notched or
dimpled end of U1 with the notched end of the socked (to the left).
Make sure U1 is seated as far down in the socket as it will go and that
none of its pins are bent. Note: The revision label on U1 may not be
oriented in the same direction as the text printed on the IC. Use only
the notch or dimple to identify the pin 1 end.
Visual Inspection
P1
Figure 6-5
Examine the RF board carefully for unsoldered pins, solder
bridges, or cold solder joints.
Set switch S1 on the RF board to the "OFF" position. (Plunger
OUT is OFF, plunger IN is ON.)
Solder just the two end pins of P1.
Look closely at P1 to make sure that its plastic support is pressed
down as far as it will go, and that the pins are parallel to the board. If
not, re-heat the soldered ends while pressing it into place. Once it is
seated properly, solder the remaining pins.
To the left and right of the I/O controller, U1, you’ll find two
short jumpers labeled " " or "GND" (on the top side of the board).
Form 3/4" (19 mm) long U-shaped ground jumpers and install them at
these locations as you did on the control and Front Panel boards. Use
discarded component leads.
On the bottom of the board you’ll find two additional ground
jumpers, one near the middle and the other near the back edge. Install
U-shaped ground jumpers in these two locations.
Resistance Checks
Perform the following resistance checks.
Test Point
R115, right end (near S1)
U1 pin 1
U1 pin 4
U1 pin 9
U1 pin 10
U1 pin 28
R1 (end near R2)
R2 (end near R1)
Signal Name
12V IN
6V
K13 control
OSC1
OSC2
AUXBUS
DOT/PTT
DASH
Res. (to GND)
> 500 ohms
> 500 ohms
> 20 k
> 20 k
> 20 k
> 20 k
>1M
>1M
ELECRAFT®
39
i
When working with the side panels in the following steps,
place a soft cloth on your work surface to protect the paint.
Locate the two side panels. Remove any masking tape from the
panels using the same technique described in the Front Panel section,
taking care not to scratch the outer surfaces.
Holes offset
away from
panel
Arrange the two panels as shown in Figure 6-6, and verify that
they are mirror images of each other. The 2-D fasteners to be attached
in the next step go on the inside surface, which has bare aluminum
areas that were masked during painting. (Note: the actual size and
shape of masked areas may vary.)
Figure 6-7
Left Side Panel
(inside surface)
Right Side Panel
(inside surface)
Figure 6-6
Install two 2-D fasteners on each side panel at the locations
indicated by small rectangles in Figure 6-6. Use one chassis screw to
hold each fastener to the side panel (see Figure 6-7). The two unused
holes on each fastener must be offset away from the side panel.
ELECRAFT®
40
i
Since the K2 chassis is made up of a number of individual
panels and fasteners, you may need to loosen the fasteners and readjust
them once or twice during assembly.
Attach the side panels to the RF board using two chassis screws
per side panel. The side panels are attached to the 2-D fasteners that
are already in place on the RF board. Figure 6-8 shows the
approximate location of the two screws used to secure the right side
panel.
Locate the tilt stand, which can be found in the
MISCELLANEOUS component bag. It has three parts: two oval feet
and a tilt bail (Figure 6-9). Note: the screws that will be used to hold
the tilt bail in place are not the black anodized type. They are standard
steel/zinc plated screws, 7/16" (11 mm) long, so you won’t confuse
them with the 3/8" (9.5 mm) or 1/2" (12 mm) black screws.
Remove any masking tape from the bottom cover chassis piece.
Each oval foot has a notch into which the bail will be inserted.
Install one of the oval feet on the bottom cover using two 7/16" (11
mm) 4-40 screws, #4 lock washers, and 4-40 nuts. The notch in the
foot should be facing inwards (toward the other foot). The nuts and
lock washers go on the inside of the bottom cover.
Install the tilt bail, then the second oval foot. The bail should be
compressed firmly between the two feet. You may need to adjust the
positions of the feet slightly before tightening the hardware.
Make sure the two feet are at exactly the same distance from the
front edge of the bottom cover. If they are not equally spaced, the tilt
stand may "rock" when in use.
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
ELECRAFT®
41
Turn the RF board/side panel assembly upside down. Check for
any untrimmed component leads on the bottom of the board.
Position the bottom cover as shown in Figure 6-10, then secure it
using six chassis screws. (The heat sink and rear feet will not be
installed until Part III when the transmitter is assembled.)
With the entire assembly still upside down or resting on one side
panel, plug the front panel assembly into the RF board (Figure 6-10).
Align the two assemblies so that connector J1 on the bottom of the
front panel PC board mates with P1 on the bottom of the RF board.
The arrow in Figure 6-10 shows the approximate location of P1 on the
RF board.
Once the front panel assembly is in place, the headphone jack (on
the RF board) should be just flush with the front panel. The small
rubber pads in the upper corners of the Front Panel board should be
just touching the 2-D fasteners on the RF board. If this is not the case,
the front panel must be pushed farther in.
Secure the front panel to the side panels and RF board using 4
chassis screws. (Refer to the photos in Appendix D.) You may need to
make slight adjustments to the 2-D fasteners at the top edge.
Figure 6-10
ELECRAFT®
42
Plug the Control board assembly into the RF board, with the
component side of the Control board facing backwards. (Refer to the
photos in Appendix D.) All three connectors on the Control board
must be lined up with the three connectors on the RF board at all pins.
Make sure the Control board is pushed as far down as it will go;
it should be flat against the RF board along its entire edge, with all
three connectors properly mated.
Once you have tried the Control board extraction technique
described above, plug the Control board back in for the tests that
follow.
Secure the front panel and Control boards together using two
chassis screws (Figure 6-12). The upper left and right corners of the
Control board may be touching the 2-D fasteners, or there may be a
small gap.
i
If the Control board does not plug in easily, you may have one
or more connectors installed incorrectly.
The long-handled Allen wrench can be used to extract the
Control board (Figure 6-11). To the left of J7 on the RF board you’ll
find the label "LIFT" near a hole at the base of the Control board.
Insert the Allen wrench into this hole, then rest the knee of the wrench
on the nearby screw head. Pry the board up with the wrench while
guiding the board out at the top.
Figure 6-12
Long-handled
allen wrench
Figure 6-11
Push the black keycap onto S1’s plunger until it snaps into place.
Test S1’s action (push on, push-off). Leave the switch in the OFF
position (out).
ELECRAFT®
43
Alignment and Test, Part 1
In this section you’ll test most of the circuits on the Control board and
front panel. Along the way you’ll become familiar with basic
operation of the K2, including use of the front panel switches, display,
and menu.
Before proceeding with initial test, turn to the first page of the
Operation section of the manual to familiarize yourself with the K2’s
front panel layout. Do not turn on power to the K2 at this time.
The Tap/Hold Rule
Each of the push-button switches on the front panel has two functions,
one activated by a TAP (short press) and the other activated by a
HOLD (long press, about 1/2 second). The upper label on each switch
shows the TAP function (white lettering), and the lower label shows
the HOLD function (yellow lettering). To highlight this in the text, we
use two different typographical styles to identify switches: T AP and
HOLD .
Initial Test
i
If any test or alignment step fails, refer to the Troubleshooting
section (Appendix E).
Set the controls on the front panel as follows:
AF GAIN:
RF GAIN:
KEYER:
POWER:
OFFSET:
midway (12 o’clock)
maximum (clockwise)
midway
minimum (counter-clockwise)
midway
Locate P7 on the Control board. A shorting jumper should be
installed onto the two pins of P7 nearest the "P7" label.
For the remaining test and alignment steps, you’ll need a wellregulated 12-14 V power supply or a battery. A power supply rated at
300 mA or more of output current will suffice for the tests in Parts I
and II, but higher currents (3-3.5 A) will be needed for transmitter
tests in Part III.
If your power supply or battery does not already have a plug that
mates with the power jack (J3), use the supplied mating plug and
prepare a suitable power cable. The center lead of the plug is positive
(+).
Make sure the K2 is turned OFF (power switch S1 out). Plug
your power supply or battery into J3 on the rear panel.
Fold the tilt stand out to improve the viewing angle if desired.
i
If you see or smell smoke when you turn the K2 on for the first
time, turn off power and disconnect the power supply immediately.
Normally, you should hear the relays being reset by the I/O controller.
Next, nonvolatile configuration memory (EEPROM) will be
initialized. This process takes approximately 10 seconds. During this
period, you should see INFO 201 on the LCD. Displays of this
kind are referred to as "INFO messages," and are used to alert you to
possible problems. In this case, the info message is just a reminder that
EEPROM has been initialized.
Turn on the K2 using S1. After about 10 seconds, you should see
the default K2 frequency display for 40 meters: 7100.00c . The
letter C indicates CW mode. The annunciator for VFO A will also be
turned on. (If you see any other INFO messages or the display does
not come on, refer to Troubleshooting.)
ELECRAFT®
44
Turn the K2 off and wait for a few seconds, then turn it back on.
The display should now show ELECRAFT for about two seconds,
followed by the frequency display. Now that the EEPROM is
initialized, this is the display you should always see on power-up. The
"R" and "T" in "ELECRAFT" appear in lower-case letters due to the
limitations of the seven-segment LCD characters.
Tap the D I S P L AY switch once to select voltage/current display.
The display should now show something similar to this:
E12.0 i0.08
This would indicate that the power supply voltage (E) is about 12.0 V,
and the supply current (I) is about 80-100 mA.7
Optical Encoder Test
Tap the D I S P L AY switch to return to the frequency display.
Turn the VFO knob in both directions and verify that the
displayed frequency changes accordingly.
Tap the P R E / AT T N switch three times. You should hear relays
switch each time.
RF Probe Assembly
The Switch Spacing Tool used during Front Panel can now be used as
the PC board for the RF probe. All parts for the probe, including a
ground alligator clip, 2 feet of RG174 coax, and banana plugs for a
DMM, are supplied with the kit. You can assemble the probe at any
time, using the instructions on page 9 of Appendix E.
Voltmeter Probe Assembly
If you do not have a DMM (digital multimeter), you can use the
simple DC voltage probe shown below in conjunction with the built-in
voltmeter. The crimp pin and 2-pin housing can be found in the
MISCELLANEOUS components bag.
Assemble the voltage probe as shown in Figure 6-13 using greeninsulated hookup wire. No ground connection is needed since you will
be measuring voltages inside the K2.
Tap the R AT E switch to the right of the knob to change the
tuning rate, and repeat the VFO test at each rate.
Hookup wire,
12” (0.3m)
Relay Test
Housing
Tap B AN D + . After a short delay the K2 will switch to the next
band. At the same time, you’ll hear one or more relays.
Tap the B AN D + switch 7 more times to verify that you hear
relays being switched with each band change. Note: The 1.8 MHz
(160 m) and 5 MHz (60 m) bands will not appear in the band list
unless the associated options are installed. This can be done only after
assembly and alignment have been completed.
7
The supply voltage reading will reflect a small drop across D10, the reversepolarity protection diode, typically 0.1 V on receive. Current readings may
vary at this stage of assembly, but should be under 150 mA.
Tinned lead,
0.5” (13mm)
Crimp pin
Figure 6-13
Plug the voltage probe assembly into P5 on the Control board.
The probe should be oriented so that the hookup wire is connected to
the (+) side of P5.
ELECRAFT®
Move the voltage select jumper (Control board, P7) toward P5.
Select voltage/current display mode using the D I S P L AY switch. The
voltage reading on the LCD should go to 00.0 .
To test the voltage probe, touch the tinned end of the hookup
wire to pin 1 of the I/O controller, U1 (RF board). The voltage
displayed on the LCD should be approximately 6 V.
Return the voltage select jumper to the "12 V" position.
Note: Always disconnect the voltage probe when it is not in use.
It may cause shorts or noise pickup if left inside the K2 during normal
operation
Menu Tutorial
45
Tap M E N U again to bring up the menu. Turn the VFO knob now, and
you’ll see the other menu entries and their parameters scroll by. (You
can also tap the B AN D + or B AN D - switches to scroll through menu
entries.) Scroll the menu until you see
INP HAND
This menu entry is used to select the keying device. HAND means
that the key jack is configured for a hand key or external keyer.
Press and hold the E D I T switch for 1/2 second to activate the EDIT
function. (Remember the TAP/HOLD rule: when you HOLD a switch
in, you activate the function indicated by the lower label on the
switch.) The display should now show:
INP HAND
We’ll present a brief tutorial on using the menu here. A complete list
of menu functions can be found in the Operation section.
Tap the M E N U switch on the K2. The first entry will be displayed:
Notice that the underline has moved to the parameter (HAND ). This
tells you that you’re in EDIT mode, and that turning the VFO knob
will now change the parameter for the current menu entry. You can
also change the parameter using B AN D + and B AN D - .
ST L 040
This is the sidetone level menu entry. 040 is the associated
parameter, in this case the sidetone volume setting. The row of
annunciators under ST L serves as an underline, indicating that
turning the VFO knob will change the menu entries.
Tap the M E N U switch again and you’ll return to the frequency or
voltage/current display, depending on what display mode was selected
when you entered the menu.
Turn the VFO knob now to see the various keying input selections.
PDLn and PDLr configure the key jack for a keyer paddle, wired
for either normal (tip = dot) or reverse (tip = dash) operation.
Tap the M E N U switch again to exit EDIT mode. The underline should
return to the menu entry.
ELECRAFT®
46
Using the Calibration Functions
Scroll the menu until you see CAL OFF . This is the entry point into
the calibration sub-menu, which you’ll be using during alignment.
Enter EDIT mode by holding E D I T as before, moving the underline to
the OFF parameter. Then turn the VFO knob to see the various CAL
functions, including FCTR (frequency counter), CUR (transmit
current limiting), tPA (KPA100 temperature calibration), S LO /
S HI (S-meter calibration), FIL (crystal filter configuration), and
PLL (VFO calibration).
Once you select a CAL function, holding E D I T again activates the
function. The selected CAL function remains active until you tap
M E N U again, which returns you to the menu. Another tap of M E N U
returns you to the normal K2 display.
In the following section you’ll activate the CAL FCTR (frequency
counter) function. For now, just tap M E N U once or twice to return to
the normal display.
Separate the braid from the center conductor at both ends.
Remove 1/4" (6 mm) of insulation from each center conductor. At one
end, cut the braid off completely right at the coax jacket (a ground
connection will not be needed for frequency measurements). The braid
should be twisted into a fine bundle at the other end.
Solder crimp pins onto the center conductor and shield at the
housing end of the cable. Solder quickly, so that the heat from
soldering does not melt the center insulator of the coax and cause a
shield-to-center short.
Insert the pins into the crimp housing as shown in Figure 6-14.
They should snap into place. Each crimp pin has a small tab on the
back that latches into a hole in the housing.
Trim the leads of the 10 pF axial-lead capacitor down to 1/4" (6
mm). Solder one end to the center conductor of the coax cable.
Probe
tip
10pF
RG-174 Coax,
7” (18cm)
Frequency Counter Probe Assembly
In the bag labeled MISCELLANEOUS you’ll find the
components for the frequency counter probe (Figure 6-14). These
components include a 10 pF axial-lead capacitor, two crimp pins, a 2pin housing, and a 1-pin male connector (probe tip).
Cut a 7" (18 cm) length of RG-174 cable and carefully remove
1/2" (13 mm) of the coax jacket from each end. Be careful not to nick
the braid.
Heat-shrink tubing (2 layers)
Crimp housing
Figure 6-14
Solder the probe tip to the other end of the 10 pF capacitor.
Slip a 1" (2.5 cm) length of the larger size heatshrink tubing onto
the probe tip components. Shrink the tubing using a heat gun. (You
can also use a soldering iron, but avoid melting the tubing.)
Add a second, identical length of heatshrink tubing on top of the
first, then shrink it. This strengthens the assembly.
ELECRAFT®
Plug the frequency counter probe assembly into P6, which is at
the far left end of the Control board (as viewed from the front of the
transceiver). The connector can only be plugged in one way.
Turn on the K2 and tap M E N U to bring up the menu, then scroll
to the CAL menu entry. Hold E D I T , then scroll the CAL parameter
until the display shows CAL FCTR . Hold E D I T again to activate
the frequency counter function of the CAL sub-menu. The LCD
should show 00000.00 . (The frequency counter circuitry is
sensitive, so it may pick up a stray signal and show it on the display.)
To test the counter, you can read the frequency of the 4 MHz
oscillator on the Control board. Touch the counter probe tip to the left
side of trimmer capacitor C22, which is just below U1, the
microcontroller. The LCD should now read within +/- .02 kHz of
04000.00 .8
Remove the frequency counter probe.
Audio Amplifier and Tone Generator Test
Plug in a pair of low-impedance (4 to 32 ohm) headphones,
stereo or mono.
Tap M E N U and scroll to the sidetone level menu entry (ST L ).
Hold E D I T to activate the sidetone. You should now hear a clean 600Hz audio tone. Turning the VFO knob should vary the volume.
Notice that turning the AF GAIN control does not affect the
sidetone volume. The sidetone is injected into the AF amplifier after
the volume control, so AF GAIN affects only the receiver volume.
47
Tap M E N U to turn off the sidetone, then scroll up to the sidetone
pitch menu entry (ST P) using the VFO knob or by tapping the
B AN D + switch. The display will show
ST P 0.60
This indicates that the sidetone pitch is set for 0.60 kHz (600 Hz).
Hold E D I T to turn on the sidetone, then vary the VFO knob. The pitch
of the sidetone should change to match the display.
Keyer
In the following steps you’ll test the keyer (audio tone generation
only). This tests the keyer jack, speed control, and potentiometer read
circuits, including the A-to-D converter on the microcontroller.
Tap M O D E until C is displayed at the right end of the LCD,
indicating CW mode.
Plug a keyer paddle into the key jack. The plug must be stereo (2
circuit). A mono plug will key the transmitter continuously. (A mating
stereo plug for the keyer jack is supplied with the kit.)
Using the menu’s INP entry, set up the keyer input for either
PDLn or PDLr as described previously.
Adjust the KEYER control. As soon as you turn it, the display
should show the keying speed (approx. 9-50 WPM).
While listening with headphones, test the keyer paddle to verify
that both dot and dash are working.
Note: No sidetone will be generated when LSB or USB mode is
selected (L or U).
8
This is not a valid indication of how well the 4 MHz oscillator is calibrated,
since this oscillator is used as the reference for the frequency counter itself.
The 4 MHz counter will be calibrated in a later step.
ELECRAFT®
48
Exit the CAL S HI function by tapping M E N U .
Setting the AGC Threshold
Make sure the RF GAIN control is rotated fully clockwise.
Locate potentiometer R1 on the Control board (right side, as
viewed from the front of the K2).
Set your DMM for DC volts. Connect the (-) lead of the DMM to
one of the ground jumpers or to the K2 chassis ground.
Touch the (+) lead to pin 5 of U2 on the Control board. (U2 is
located just above trimmer R1. Pin 5 is the pin nearest diode D1.)
Adjust R1 for a reading of 3.80 volts on the DMM. This is the
suggested setting, but it can be adjusted later to suit the operator.
i
The S-meter must be realigned anytime the AGC
threshold setting is changed. S-meter alignment is covered in the
following steps.
S-Meter Alignment
Using the menu, select the CAL S LO function (S-meter zero).
Hold E D I T a second time to activate it.
Turn the VFO knob until you see only the left-most segment of
the LED bargraph lit. Then turn the knob a bit more clockwise until
this LED just turns off.
Exit the CAL S LO function by tapping M E N U . Enter the
menu again and select CAL S HI (S-meter full-scale sensitivity).
Turn RF GAIN fully counter-clockwise. Adjust the VFO knob
until bargraph segment 9 lights, then turn it a bit more counterclockwise until segment 10 just turns on (right-most segment).
Turn the RF GAIN control back to its full clockwise position.
i
After you complete assembly, the S-meter can be further
calibrated for an S-9 reading with a 50 µV signal level if you have an
Elecraft XG1 or XG2 test oscillator or other calibrated signal source
(see page 90).
Bargraph Current Test
In the following steps, you’ll test the current measurement circuit by
using the bargraph LEDs to establish a known current drain.
Enter the menu and verify that GRPH (LED bargraph mode) is
set to DOT , not to BAR or OFF .
Set the RF GAIN control for minimum gain. Segment 10 of the
LED bargraph should now be on if you have done the S-meter
adjustment as described above.
Using the menu, select the LCD menu entry. Change the
parameter from NITE to DAY . At this point you’ll see the LCD
backlight turn off, and segment 10 of the LED bargraph will become
much brighter.
Exit the menu and tap D I S P L AY to switch to voltage/current
mode. Write down the voltage and current readings.
Use the menu to change the GRPH mode to BAR . All 10
segments of the LED should now be on.
Exit the menu and check the current. It should now be about 0.16
to 0.18 amps higher.
Use the menu to change GRPH to DOT , and LCD to NITE .
i
The combination of LCD DAY and GRPH BAR can
result in high peak current drain on receive. DOT or OFF are
preferred for battery operation. See Advanced Operating Features.
ELECRAFT®
Assembly, Part II
In this section you’ll install the components for the synthesizer and
receiver circuits. Most of the components to be installed are on the
front half of the board (see Figure 6-1). After all of the parts are
installed, individual stages will be aligned and tested. Detailed
troubleshooting procedures are provided in the Troubleshooting
section should you need them (Appendix E). The supplied RF probe
will be very useful if you need to do signal tracing. RF probe assembly
instructions start on page 9 of Appendix E.
In some steps a large number of components will be installed, then
soldered as a group. Check for unsoldered leads after completing each
group. A final complete check will be done later.
Remove the screws holding the Control board to the Front Panel
board, then unplug the Control board. To avoid damaging any Control
board components, use the long-handled Allen wrench as described in
Part I.
Remove the bottom cover (six screws).
Remove the screws from the front panel assembly and unplug it
from the RF board. Pull it straight out from the bottom edge, near the
middle of the panel. This may be easier to do with the transceiver
sitting on its right side so that you can steady it with one hand and pull
with the other.
Remove the side panels by taking out the two screws along the
bottom edge of each panel.
Install the following 1/4-watt resistors, orienting them so that the
first band is at the left or toward the back of the board. The resistors
are listed in the order they appear on the RF board, starting with R9
(near the left edge, about halfway back).
Note: Remember to complete each line of resistors before proceeding
to the next line (i.e., install R9, then R16, then R10).
49
__ R9, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL) ⇒
__ R10, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R32, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R30, 120 (BRN-RED-BRN)
__ R20, 270 (RED-VIO-BRN)
__ R22, 3.3 M (ORG-ORG-GRN)
__ R16, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
__ R31, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R33, 15 k (BRN-GRN-ORG)
__ R28, 27 k (RED-VIO-ORG)
__ R21, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
__ R25, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R15, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ R13, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R17, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
__ R5, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R6, 100 (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R8, 100 (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R24, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R14, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R12, 560 (GRN-BLU-BRN)
__ R11, 560 (GRN-BLU-BRN)
__ R78, 22 (RED-RED-BLK)
__ R7, 68 (BLU-GRY-BLK)
__ R92, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ R93, 820 (GRY-RED-BRN)
__ R72, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R96, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R73, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R91, 820 (GRY-RED-BRN)
__ R95, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R74, 47 (YEL-VIO-BLK)
__ R97, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ R80, 680 (BLU-GRY-BRN)
__ R81, 1.8 k (BRN-GRY-RED)
__ R79, 1.8 k (BRN-GRY-RED)
__ R82, 18 (BRN-GRY-BLK)
__ R101, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R107,100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL) __ R111 5.6 k (GRN-BLU-RED)
__ R112, 22 (RED-RED-BLK)
__ R90, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R89, 100 (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R88, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R84, 18 (BRN-GRY-BLK)
__ R85, 150 (BRN-GRN-BRN)
__ R83, 4.7 ohms (YEL-VIO-GLD)
Install the resistor networks. Start with RP2, which is in the front
left-hand corner. Align the pin 1 mark on each resistor network with
the pin 1 end of its component outline.
__ RP2, 10 k, 8 pins (8A3.103G)
__ RP6, 100 k, 8 pins (8A3.104G)
__ RP4, 100 k, 6 pins (6A3.104G)
__ RP5, 100 k, 6 pins (6A3.104G)
NOTE: RP3 is not used. The Thermistor PC board will be installed at
this location as described on the next page.
ELECRAFT®
50
Locate the PLL Upgrade kit, which should include the
Thermistor PC board and all other parts listed below.
Ref
RA
RB
RC
RD
RE, RF
THM
MISC
MISC
Description
33K 1/4W Resistor (org-org-org)
12K 1/8W Resistor (brn-red-org)
2.2K 1/8W Resistor (red-red-red)
1.8K 1/8W Resistor (brn-gray-red)
10K 1/8W Resistor (brn-blk-org)
Thermistor, 10K, 3% (small orange body
with black and brown stripes near leads)
Thermistor PC Board
#24 Green Wire, Insulated, solid conductor
Qty
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1 ft.
(30 cm)
The remaining 8 holes on one edge of the board are used as leads
to insert into the pads provided for the original resistor network, RP3.
Solder one wire into each of the holes, with most of the lead
protruding from the component side.
On the component side, bend each lead at a 90-degree angle so
that it points away from the board (but parallel to it).
Locate the position for resistor network RP3 (near the front-left
corner, adjacent to U6). Slide each of the 8 leads of the thermistor
board through the corresponding holes at RP3. The components on the
thermistor board should be facing U6, and the thermistor should be
oriented toward the location of crystal X1. (See Figure 6-14a.)
Locate the thermistor printed circuit board. One side will be
labeled with THM and the letters A through F. All components will
be installed on the labeled side, and soldered on the other side.
Install 1/8th-watt resistors RB, RC, RD, RE, and RF in their
respective positions as shown on the board. (Color codes are listed
above; be sure to check them carefully.) Do not pull on the resistor
leads, as they may be fragile. Bend the leads outward.
Solder all of the leads. Trim off excess lead length.
Install resistor RA (33 k, 1/4 watt). Solder and trim its leads.
Figure 6-14a
Once all of the leads are inserted, slide the board down until it is
flush against the RF Board. It may be necessary to bend the thermistor
board toward U6 slightly so that the solder joints on the bottom of the
thermistor board can clear C87 on the RF board. The thermistor board
and its parts should not be touching U6 or its pads.
Locate the thermistor, which has an orange body with black and
brown stripes. The thermistor is fragile, so avoid bending its leads any
more than necessary. Insert the thermistor at THM. (The part is
symmetrical and can be installed in either orientation.) Hold the
thermistor body so that it is just touching the circuit board, then solder
and trim its leads.
Make sure the edge of the thermistor board is contacting the RF
Board along its full length. Then solder the eight connections on the
bottom side of the RF Board.
Remove the insulation from a 6” (15 cm) length of green hookup
wire. Cut the bare wire into 8 pieces of about 0.75” (2 cm) in length.
Examine the area closely. There should be no shorts between the
thermistor board and nearby components.
ELECRAFT®
51
Locate all of the small glass-bodied diodes. You should have a
number of 1N4148 diodes, and one 1N5711, which will be similar in
size but should have different markings. Use a piece of masking tape
to identify the 1N5711 as "D9, 1N5711."
Install the remaining 1SV149 diodes listed below, keeping them
flat against the PC board, with no excess lead length. D17, D21 and
D22 are in the front-left corner. D29 through D34 are on the right side
near the crystal filter.
Install the following diodes, located near the outline for toroidal
transformer T5, in the synthesizer area. Be sure to orient the diodes
according to their outlines.
__ D17
__ D29
__ D32
__ D11, 1N4148
__ D6, 1N4007
__ D13, 1N4148
__ D7, 1N4007
Varactor diodes have a small plastic package, like a TO-92
transistor, but with only two leads. Sort the varactor diodes into
groups: type MV209 and type 1SV149. (1SV149 diodes are labeled
"V149" and may have a center lead that has been cut flush with the
body of the device.) The K2 will not function correctly if the varactor
diode types are interchanged.
Install the MV209 diodes listed below. The flat side of each diode
must match the flat side of its PC board outline. These diodes must be
pushed all the way down on the board to prevent stray signal coupling.
Bend the leads slightly to hold them in place. D16 and D23-D26 are in
the front-left corner. D39 is to the right of J7 (Control board).
__ D16
__ D25
__ D23
__ D26
__ D24
__ D39
Note: Do not install D19 and D20. These are supplied with the
K60XV option, which should not be installed until the K2 has been
aligned and tested.
Install type 1SV149 diodes at D37 and D38, near the SSB option
connector. Keep them flat against the PC board, with no excess lead
length.
__ D21
__ D30
__ D33
__ D22
__ D31
__ D34
Install the TO-92 package transistors listed below. Start with Q17,
near the middle-left edge.
__ Q17, 2N7000
__ Q19, J310
__ Q25, PN2222A
__ Q16, PN2222A
__ Q20, 2N7000
__ Q18, J310
__ Q24, J310
Install Q21 (2N5109), which is located near U1 in the middle of
the board. Align the small tab on the transistor’s case with the tab on
its component outline. Bend the leads on the bottom to hold Q21 in
place, then solder.
Install Q22 (2N5109), which is to the right of the "ELECRAFT"
label. Make sure Q22 is flat against the board before soldering.
Carefully press a 3/4" (19 mm) dia. by 0.25" (6.4 mm) high star
heat sink onto Q22. The heat sink should be pressed down as far as it
will go, and should not touch the components around the transistor.
The heat sink is fragile. If you need to spread it slightly, use a
blunted wooden pencil or a plastic wire nut.
Install Q12 (2N7000), which is to the right of Q22.
Install Q23 (2N7000), near the right-front edge of the board.
Install C167 (.001 µF, "102"), which is near J11, the connector for
the SSB adapter. The leads on this capacitor should be formed to
match its PC board outline.
ELECRAFT®
52
Sort all of the remaining capacitors by value to reduce the
possibility of assembly errors in the next step. If you are unsure of any
capacitor’s value and do not have a capacitance meter, the pictures in
the parts list (Appendix A) may help.
Install the following capacitors, starting with C86 in the front-left
corner. Integer values are in pF and fractional values are in µF.
__ C86, 0.1 (104) ⇒
__ C100, .001 (102)
__ C71, 82 (82)
__ C74, 20 (20)
__ C84, 120 (121) ⇒
__ C95, .01 (103)
__ C72, 270 (271)
__ C85, 120 (121)
__ C96, 1 µF (105)
__ C73, 47 (47)
__ C82, .001 (102)
__ C79, .001 (102)
__ C55, .01 (103)
__ C65, 0.1 (104)
__ C80, .001 (102)
__ C59, 0.1 (104)
__ C61, .01 (103)
__ C54, .01 (103)
__ C81, .001 (102)
__ C38, .001 (102)
__ C58, .01 (103)
__ C68, 10 pF (10)
__ C63, .01 (103)
__ C89, .001 (102)
__ C62, .01 (103)
__ C64, .001 (102)
__ C92, .022 (223)
__ C87, .01 (103)
__ C154, 100 (101)
__ C67, 0.1 (104)
__ C94, 0.047 (473)
__ C175, .01 (103)
__ C144, 100 (101)
__ C156, .047 (473)
__ C52, .01 (103)
__ C146, .01 (103)
__ C153, 68 (68)
__ C158, .01 (103)
__ C141, .01 (103)
__ C151, 0.1 (104)
__ C155, .01 (103)
__ C53, .01 (103)
__ C57, .001 (102)
__ C145, .01 (103)
__ C172, .01 (103)
__ C177, .022 (223)
__ C178, 0.1 (104)
__ C169, 390 (391)
__ C159, .01 (103)
__ C174, 82 (82)
__ C176, 0.1 (104)
__ C168, .01 (103)
__ C143, .01 (103)
__ C173, 220 (221)
__ C165, .01 (103)
__ C160, .01 (103)
__ C142, .01 (103)
__ C163, .01 (103)
__ C170, .047 (473)
__ C182, 180 (181)
__ C185, 0.1 (104)
__ C162, .047 (473)
__ C166, .047 (473)
__ C184, .01 (103)
__ C181, .01 (103)
__ C164, .01 (103)
__ C179, 100 (101)
Install the following ICs, aligning the notched end of each IC with
the notch on its component outline. U6 is at the front-left.
__ U6, LMC662
__ U3, LT1252
__ U11, NE602
⇒
__ U5, LTC1451
__ U10, NE602
⇒
__ U4, MC145170
__ U9, LT1252
Note: A surface-mount RoHS compliant version of the MC1350
integrated circuit is used at U12. This device is furnished pre-installed
on a tiny printed circuit board that mounts in the space originally
provided for the 8-pin dual in-line (DIP) version of the part.
Locate the SMT1A board and the two four-pin headers provided.
Insert the pins of the headers into the solder pads in the SMT1A board
as shown below.
Position the SMT1A board and headers into the solder pads for
MC1350 U12 as shown below. Be sure pins 1 and 8 on the SMT1A
board are at the end with the notch shown in the outline on the RF
board.
i
When soldering the header pins, do not apply heat for
more than two or three seconds at a time to avoid melting the
plastic header.
Solder
(8 places
on top)
Pins 1 and 8
must be at
end above
the notch
outline on
the board
ELECRAFT®
53
Solder the pins on the bottom of the RF board. Solder a pin at
opposite corners first, then make sure the headers are resting against
the board. If necessary re-heat the pins while pressing the assembly
against the board. When the assembly is in position, solder all 8 pins.
Install U8 (78L05), which has a plastic TO-92 package like a
transistor. U8 is located near the front left corner of the board.
Option-bypass jumpers W5, W2 and W3 are located on the right
side of the board, near the crystal filter. Use component leads to make
these jumpers, or remove the insulation from appropriate lengths of
green hookup wire. These jumpers should be formed so that they lie
flat on the board, and should not touch any adjacent components.
Test points TP1, TP2, and TP3 are round, yellow, single-pin
female connectors. TP1 and TP3 can be found in the synthesizer area
of the board. TP2 is near the SSB option connector, J11. Install and
solder all three test points.
Pin 16
MC145170
(bottom view)
X
C90
Figure 6-14b
C88
68
RFC15
100
Install RF choke RFC13 (100 µH, BRN-BLK-BRN), near the
middle of the board. Orient the first color band to the left.
Install the receive mixer, Z6 (TUF-1 or TOP-1), below the
"ELECRAFT" label at the middle of the board. Make sure that Z6 is
lined up with its component outline and is flush with the board before
soldering.
Install the electrolytic capacitors in the order listed below, starting
with C60 near the far left-hand edge. Insert the (+) lead of each
capacitor into the hole with the (+) symbol.
Pin 13
C91
.001
C90
Figure 6-14c
__ C60, 100 µF
__ C93, 10 µF
__ C103, 220 µF
Looking at the bottom of the RF board, locate U4 (MC145170,
near C90). As shown by the "X" in Figure 6-14b, the short trace from
pin 16 of U4 to C89 (on the top side) has been cut at the factory.
Solder C91 (.001 µF, "102") to the two pads shown in Figure 614c. Use short leads.
Solder C88 (68 pF, "68" or "680") between pins 12 and 13 of U4
as shown above. Use short leads.
ELECRAFT®
54
Locate the miniature 100 µH RF choke, RFC15 (tan body,
brown-black-brown; much smaller than the other 100-µH RF chokes
in the kit). RFC15's leads are fragile—do not pull on them.
Solder RFC15 to the pads indicated above. Use short leads.
Examine C88, C91 and RFC15 closely. Their leads should not
contact adjacent pads or traces.
Locate the crystals used on the RF board: 12.096 MHz (1),
4.9152 MHz for BFO (2) and 4.9136 MHz for crystal filters (7).
Do not mix the BFO and filter crystals, which have different
characteristics.
The bag of 7 filter crystals should have a number written on it.
Record the number here: ___________. (This identifies the tested
frequency of the crystals, and can be used in aligning filters.)
Install the 12.096 MHz crystal, X1, at the lower left. The crystal
should be seated flat on the board before soldering (it is OK to bend
the pins to hold it to the board). X2 is not used.
Install the 4.9136 MHz filter crystals at X5 through X11.
Ground the cases of X5 and X6. The ground pads are near where
the two crystals meet.
A special grounding technique is required for X7-X11. There
are two ground pads for each of these crystals, one on either side. Use
bare wires (10 total) for grounding the crystals as you did in previous
steps, but do not solder the wires to the tops of the crystals. The wires
must be soldered to the sides of the crystals, instead, about 1/4" (6
mm) up from the surface of the PC board.
Be very careful not to overheat the crystals. Use a temperaturecontrolled iron, and limit soldering time to about 3 seconds per
soldering attempt.
i
In the following steps you’ll install several toroidal inductors.
Use the number of turns indicated. Do not attempt to alter the turns
to match inductances specified in the parts list.
To the left of X1 (along the edge of the board) you’ll find a pad
for grounding the crystal case. Use short lengths of bare wire to
ground the crystal on at the top of the can.
Sort the black and dark gray toroidal cores into three groups to
avoid mis-identifying them in later steps. You should have eight FT3743 ferrite cores (3/8", 9.5 mm); four T44-10 iron powder cores (0.44",
11 mm); and one FT50-43 ferrite core (0.5", 12.7 mm). Ferrite cores
are dark gray; T44-10 cores are black.
Install the BFO crystals at X3 and X4 (near J7). Important: trim
X3's leads, and fold them down flat against their pads, before
soldering. Then use a minimal amount of solder. This is necessary to
avoid interference between X3 and L33 in a later step.
Locate a 3/8" (9.5 mm) diameter ferrite toroidal core (type FT3743) as described above.
Ground the cases of X3 and X4. The ground pads are to the left of
the crystals.
ELECRAFT®
55
Find RFC14’s component outline on the RF board, near the front
left-hand corner. Compare this component outline to Figure 6-15,
which shows two views of a typical toroidal inductor. RFC14 will be
mounted vertically as shown at the right side of the drawing, with one
wire exiting at the core’s upper left, and the other at the lower right.
There are pads on the PC board in these two locations.
Stripping Toroid Leads
The enamel wire supplied with the kit can be heat-stripped. One way
to do this is to place a small amount of solder (a "blob") on the end of
your soldering iron, then insert the wire into the hot solder for a few
seconds. Another possibility is to burn the insulation off by heating it
with a match or small butane lighter for a few seconds, then use finegrain sandpaper to remove the enamel residue. Avoid scraping
insulation off with a razor blade, as this may nick the wire.
Strip and tin the leads of the toroid before you mount it on the
board. As shown in Figure 6-15, you should remove the enamel from
the leads up to about 1/8" (3 mm) from the core. You should see only
bare wire (no insulation) on the side to be soldered.
Install RFC14 vertically as shown by its component outline, near
the front left-hand corner of the board, then pull the leads taut on the
bottom of the board.
Remove insulation
Figure 6-15
Note: Toroid illustrations such as the one above do not always
show the actual number of turns used.
To wind RFC14, cut a 9" (23 cm) length of #26 red enamelcoated wire, then "sew" the long end of the wire through the core
exactly 10 times. Each pass through the core counts as one turn. The
finished winding should look very similar to Figure 6-15, but with 10
turns rather than 14.
Verify that the turns of RFC14 are not bunched together. They
should be evenly-spaced and occupy about 85% of the core’s
circumference. If the turns are all bunched together, RFC14’s
inductance value will not be correct. (Unless otherwise specified,
about 80 to 90% of the core should always be used.)
Solder the leads of RFC14. When soldering, make sure that the
solder binds well to the leads. If the lead appears to be an "island" in a
small pool of solder, chances are it is not making good contact.
Measure from pad to pad (not wire to wire) using an ohmmeter to be
sure the leads are making contact.
ELECRAFT®
56
i
Do not use adhesives or fixatives of any kind to secure
toroids to the PC board. Toroids will be adequately held to the board
by their leads alone. (T5 is the only exception.)
RFC16 is wound on an FT37-43 core (dark gray) using 16 turns
of red enamel wire (12", 30 cm). Wind this inductor in the same
manner as RFC14. Install RFC16 vertically, to the right of RFC14.
RFC11 is wound on an FT37-43 core using 20 turns of red
enamel wire (16", 40 cm). Wind this inductor and prepare its leads in
the same manner as RFC14.
Carefully strip and tin the leads of T5’s 1-2 winding.
T5’s other winding, 3–4, uses 4 turns of green enamel wire (7",
18 cm). Wind the 3–4 winding on top of the 1–2 winding, interleaving
the turns as shown in Figure 6-16. The turns should be secure, not
loose. Strip and tin the leads of the 3–4 winding.
Note: T5’s 3–4 winding must be wound exactly as illustrated or the
VFO will not function correctly.
3
1
Install RFC11 horizontally, on the bottom side of the board, as
shown by its component outline (near the center of the board). The
pads for RFC11 are the two that just touch the outline. Pull the leads
taut on the top to keep the toroid secured to the board, then solder.
i
T5 is a toroidal transformer, with two numbered windings.
These numbers are printed next to each pad on the PC board. T5’s
windings are 1–2 and 3–4.
Locate the large yellow core (T50-6) for use at T5. The core is
1/2" (12.7 mm) in diameter.
Wind the first winding, 1-2, using 16 turns of red enamel wire
(15", 38 cm). This winding must occupy 85% of the core, and will
look very similar to Figure 6-15. Remember that each pass through the
core counts as one turn.
Green,
4 turns
2
4
Figure 6-16
ELECRAFT®
57
Install T5 as shown by its component outline in the synthesizer
area of the board. Figure 6-17 shows how the 1–2 and 3–4 windings
are oriented with the numbered pads. (Also shown are the nylon
washer and screw, which will be installed in the next step.) Pull T5’s
leads taut on the bottom of the board, but do not solder yet.
Wind T7's 1–2 winding using 5 turns of green enamel wire (6",
15 cm). Strip and tin the leads of both windings.
2
1
Secure T5 to the board as shown in Figure 6-17 using a 3/8" (9.5
mm) diameter nylon washer, 1/2" (12.7 mm) long nylon 4-40 screw,
and a #4 nylon nut. Tighten the nylon nut just enough to hold the
assembly in place. Do not over-tighten as this will strip the threads.
Solder T5, checking for good solder joints as before.
3
1
3
4
Figure 6-18
2
4
Figure 6-17
T7 is a toroidal transformer wound on a 3/8" (9.5 mm) diameter
ferrite core (dark gray, FT37-43). T7’s orientation and windings will
appear similar to Figure 6-18. Wind T7’s 3–4 winding first, using 20
turns of red enamel wire (20", 51 cm). (The drawing shows 14 turns.)
Install T7 as shown by its component outline near the front-right
corner of the board, with the windings oriented as shown in Figure
6-18. Pull the leads taut on the bottom and solder.
ELECRAFT®
58
Transformer T6 is mounted vertically, near the middle of the
board. It uses a different winding technique where the wires for the
two windings are twisted together before winding ("bi-filar"). Cut two
12" (30 cm) lengths of enamel wire, one red and one green. Twist
them together over their entire length. The wires should cross over
each other about once every 1/2" or 12 mm.
Wind the twisted wires onto a 3/8" (9.5 mm) ferrite core (FT3743), using exactly 10 turns. Use the same method you used when
winding non-twisted wires, covering about 85% of the core. Figure
6-19 shows how the winding should look from two views (your turns
count will be 10 rather than 8 as in the drawing).
Clip and untwist the ends of the red/green pairs so that the leads
of the transformer look like those in Figure 6-19 (b). The pin numbers
shown match the component outline, with the red wires numbered 1-3
and the green wires numbered 2-4.
Strip and tin all four wires. Be careful not to strip the leads so
close to the core that the red/green wire pairs might short together.
Install T6 vertically, with the wires inserted as indicated in Figure
6-19 (b). Pull the leads taut on the bottom, then solder.
Sort the slug-tuned shielded inductors into two groups: 1 µH
(small slot, red line, quantity 4) and 4.7 µH (large slot, no mark,
quantity 8).
(a)
Install 4.7 µH inductors at L30 and L34 (large slot, no mark).
Press these inductors down as far as they’ll go before soldering.
Install the components listed below, starting with C39 in the back
left corner (near the key jack).
2
(GRN)
1
(RED)
__ C39, .001 (102)
__ C5, 100 (101)
__ C7, 100 (101)
__ C4, 820 (821)
__ C9, .001 (102)
__ C8, 820 (821)
__ W6 (option bypass jumper)
__ R38, 1 k (BRN-BLK-RED)
__ C108, .01 (103)
__ D1, 1N4007
__ D2, 1N4007
__ RFC1, 100 µH (BRN-BLK-BRN)
(b)
4
(GRN)
3
(RED)
Figure 6-19
__ C107, .01 (103)
__ C110, .01 (103)
__ D5, 1N4007
__ R37, 100 k (BRN-BLK-YEL)
__ C109, .01 (103)
__ D3, 1N4007
__ D4, 1N4007
__ R39, 1 k (BRN-BLK-RED)
__ C113, .01 (103)
__ W1 (option bypass jumper)
__ C114, .01 (103)
ELECRAFT®
59
Review Figure 4-2 before installing Q2 in the next step. Q2 is
a ZVN4424A transistor, which has a slightly modified TO-92 package.
It is flat on both sides, and the labeling may be on the smaller flat side.
The wider flat side must be aligned with the flat side of the component
outline.
Install Q2, which is near C113 (just installed). Be sure to orient
Q2 as shown in Figure 4-2.
RFC3 is wound on an FT37-43 core (dark gray) using 16 turns of
red enamel wire (12", 30 cm). Wind this inductor in the same manner
as RFC14. Install RFC3 vertically, just to the left of W1.
Install 4.7 µH slug-tuned shielded inductors (large slot, no mark)
at L1 and L2, near the back-left edge of the board.
Install the 40-meter low-pass filter components, which are listed
below. These components are located near Q22 (2N5109 transistor
with heat sink).
__ C225, 390 (391)
__ C226, 680 (681)
__ C228, 56 (56)
__ C229, 220 (221)
__ C227, 330 (331)
__ L25, T44-2 (red), 14 turns #26 red enamel wire, 14" (35 cm)
__ L26, T44-2 (red), 12 turns #26 red enamel wire, 13" (33 cm)
i
The leads of some bottom-mounted components may need to
be pre-trimmed before mounting and soldering. See page 11.
Install the following components on the bottom side of the board,
starting with C207 at the back left. Once all components have been
installed, solder them on the top side, being careful not to damage any
adjacent top-mounted components.
__ C207, .001 (102)
__ C224, .047 (473)
__ C204, .001 (102)
__ C216, .001 (102)
__ C223, .001 (102)
(bend body down before soldering)
__ C208, .001 (102)
__ C195, .001 (102)
(continued)
__ C133, 0.1 (104)
(bend body down before soldering)
__ C135, .01 (103)
__ C17, .001 (102)
__ C29, 12 (12)
__ C122, 56 (56)
__ C27, .001 (102)
__ C28, 12 (12)
__ C119, .01 (103)
__ C104, 68 (68)
__ R34, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ RFC2, 100 µH (BRN-BLK-BRN) __ RFC7, 15 µH (BRN-GRN-BLK)
Find the "C6" label, along the back edge. The three pads near C6
are labeled "J15" on the top side (for use with the K60XV option).
Install C6 (4.7 pF) into the outer two holes of this set of 3 pads (of
J15).
Locate L31, a 12 µH shielded solenoidal inductor (black case;
may not be color coded). L31 is mounted on the bottom of the board,
near the right edge.
Install the group of components listed below on the bottom of the
board. C183 is near the front left corner.
__ C183, .01 (103)
__ C161, .01 (103)
__ C186, .01 (103)
__ C150, 330 (331)
__ C90, .047 (473)
__ C157, .047 (473)
(bend body down before soldering)
(bend body down before soldering)
__ R77, 220 (RED-RED-BRN)
__ R75, 680 (BLU-GRY-BRN)
__ R99, 270 (RED-VIO-BRN)
__ R100, 820 (GRY-RED-BRN)
__ R114, 3.9k (ORG-WHT-RED)
__ R29, 10 k (BRN-BLK-ORG)
__ R76, 10 (BRN-BLK-BLK)
__ R94, 82 (GRY-RED-BLK)
__ R98, 270 (RED-VIO-BRN)
__ R110, 5.6 k (GRN-BLU-RED)
__ R18, 1 M (BRN-BLK-GRN)
__ R19, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ RFC12,
100 µH (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ RFC10, 1 mH (BRN-BLK-RED)
ELECRAFT®
60
Note: A surface-mount RoHS compliant version of the PIN diode
used at D36 is supplied pre-installed on tiny printed circuit board that
mounts in the space originally provided for D36. Install the new part
as follows.
i
i
The BFO toroid, L33, is supplied pre-wound due to the
large number of turns and very small gauge wire required. When
handling L33, be very careful not to damage the leads.
ESD-Sensitive! Wear a wrist strap grounded through a 1meghom resistor or frequently touch an unpainted metal ground
when handling the SMT1B part in the following steps.
Locate the rubber stem bumper. Clip off about one-half of the tip
of the stem using diagonal cutters.
Locate the SMT1B part. Attach two of the 1/4 watt resistor leads
you saved earlier to solder pads 2 and 3 on the board as shown below.
Pad 1 is not used.
L33 is located on the bottom of the board, near the front center.
Place the rubber stem bumper directly on top of L33's component
outline. Flush-trim the leads of all parts under or near L33 so the
stem bumper can sit flat on the PC board.
Position the SMT1B board as shown with the leads passing
through the solder pads for D36 on the bottom of the RF board. The
lead from pad 3 must go to the pad on the RF board indicated by a
band on the diode outline. That is the pad nearest R99. Note that this
results in the SMT1B markings being upside down compared to the
markings on the RF board as shown below. Adjust the leads as needed
to position the SMT1B board about 1/8” (3mm) above the RF board
and spread the leads to hold it in place.
Locate the pre-wound BFO inductor, L33 (41 µH, 5%). It may be
supplied in a small envelope or bag labeled "L33".
Press L33 down onto the stem bumper as far as it will go.
Position L33 and the stem bumper as shown in Figure 6-20.
Locate resistor R116 (1/8th watt, 5.1 megohm, green-browngreen). Bend the leads of R116 down at 90-degree angles to match the
spacing of L33's pads (Figure 6-20).
R116
L33
Stem Bumper
Pin 3 lead goes to pad at
banded end of outline
Pad 1 not used
On the top side of the RF board, solder both leads and clip them
flush.
Leads
Figure 6-20
ELECRAFT®
61
Insert R116's leads into L33's pads, then press the resistor down
directly on top of L33. The resistor's body should be partially recessed
into the "well" left in the center of the toroid (Figure 6-21).
Use the leads of R116 to hold L33 firmly to the board (Figure
6-21), bending them outward on the top side. Solder R116.
i
D40 and D41 were added to the receiver I.F. circuit to prevent
saturation when a station a few feet away transmits on your frequency.
These diodes will be installed in the steps below.
On the bottom of the RF board, locate resistor R114, which is
near the power switch. Near R114 you'll find the 8 pads for I.F amp
U12, which is on the top side of the board (Figure 6-23).
Solder D40 and D41 to the two round pads just to the right of
R114 (pads #3 and #4 of T7, which is on the top side). The banded
ends of the diodes go in opposite directions.
Figure 6-21
R114
D40
D41
Solder L33's leads to the leads of the resistor points as shown in
Figure 6-22. Keep L33's leads as short as possible, and away from any
nearby component pads.
U12
Trim off the excess portion of L33's leads. Note: Trimming fine
wire may be difficult with worn or poor-quality diagonal cutters. Be
careful not to stress L33's leads in the process. Use a magnifying glass
if necessary.
Figure 6-23
Visual Inspection
Examine the bottom side of the RF board carefully for unsoldered
pins, solder bridges, or cold solder joints. Since this is a large board,
you should break the examination up into three parts:
Figure 6-22
To ensure that R116 cannot short to the bottom cover, attach a
thin self-adhesive insulator to the bottom cover in the area directly
beneath L33. Electrical or other types of tape may be used.
__ perimeter of the board
__ front half
__ back half
Examine the top side in the same manner.
Set S1 on the RF board to OFF position. (Plunger OUT).
ELECRAFT®
62
Resistance Checks
Perform the following resistance checks:
Test Point
R115, right end (near S1)
U6 pin 8
U4 pin 16
U11 pin 8
U10 pin 8
U12 pin 1
Signal Name
12V IN
8B
5B
8A
8T
8R
Res. (to GND)
> 500 ohms
> 100 ohms
>1k
> 250 ohms
> 500 ohms
> 500 ohms
i
It's very important to re-assemble the chassis as described
below before attempting the alignment steps in the next section. If you
don’t put the chassis together, some results will not be accurate.
Install the side panels and secure with two chassis screws each.
Plug in the front panel assembly. Secure with two chassis screws.
Plug in the Control board.
Secure the front panel and Control boards together using two
chassis screws.
i
Before installing the bottom cove in the next step, verify that
all components on the bottom of the RF board have an installed height
of 1/4" (6 mm) or less. Capacitors or other parts that stand above this
height must be bent downward at an angle to prevent them from
hitting the bottom cover.
Install the bottom cover and secure it temporarily using six
chassis screws.
ELECRAFT®
Alignment and Test, Part II
In this section you’ll test and align the PLL (phase-locked-loop)
synthesizer and receiver circuits. Once this is completed you’ll be able
to test the receiver using all modes on 40 meters.
Connect your power supply or battery and turn on the K2.
4 MHz Oscillator Calibration
Plug the frequency counter probe into P6 (Control board).
Connect the probe tip to the PLL reference oscillator test point,
TP3 (left-front corner of the RF board, near U4).
Using the menu, select CAL FCTR , then hold
E D I T a second time to enable the frequency counter. The counter
should show a frequency of 12090 kHz +/- 30 kHz. If it is 0000.00,
changing rapidly, or out of range, you could have a problem with the
counter probe or the PLL Reference Oscillator.
Use one of the following methods to adjust C22 on the Control
board (listed in order of preference):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Connect a calibrated external frequency counter probe to TP3,
without removing the K2's internal counter probe. Adjust C22
until the K2's reading matches the external counter's reading.
Alternatively, you can use a calibrated short-wave or ham-band
receiver. Set the receiver for LSB or USB mode. Connect a short
length of wire to the receiver's antenna jack, and lay the end near
the 4 MHz crystal on the K2 Control board. Find the oscillator
signal on the receiver. Tune the receiver to 4.000 MHz, and adjust
C22 until you hear a zero-beat (pitch = 0 Hz).
If you don't have a counter or receiver, leave C22 set at its midpoint for now. You can improve the calibration later using a
calibrated signal generator or an on-air signal, such as WWV (at
10.000 MHz).
63
PLL Reference Oscillator Range Test
Set up the K2 internal counter as described for 4 MHz Oscillator
Calibration (at left, first three steps).
If you have an external frequency counter probe connected to
TP3 along with the K2's internal counter probe, disconnect it.
When you’re in frequency counter mode, the B AN D + and
switches can be used to check the range of the PLL reference
oscillator. First, tap B AN D + and write down the frequency reading
below (typically about 12100 kHz). Then tap B AN D - and write down
this frequency reading (typically 12080-12090 kHz).
B AN D -
Ref. High Freq.
Ref. Low Freq.
____________ ____________ __________
Range (kHz)
Subtract the lower frequency reading from the higher reading.
The range must be between 9.8 and 15 kHz (if not, see
Troubleshooting). Tap M E N U to exit CAL FCTR .
VCO (Voltage-Controlled Oscillator) Test
Use B AN D + or B AN D - to select the 80-meter band, and set the
VFO for a frequency of about 4000.10 kHz.
Connect the frequency counter probe to the VCO test point, TP1.
Activate the frequency counter using CAL FCTR as before.
You should now see a frequency counter reading in the 8 to 10
MHz range. It may or may not be stable at this time (i.e., the frequency
may be changing). If the reading is 0000 kHz or is changing rapidly,
you probably don’t have the counter cable connected to the VCO test
point. If the reading is fairly stable but not between 8 and 10 MHz,
refer to Troubleshooting.
Tap M E N U to exit CAL FCTR .
ELECRAFT®
64
Table 6-1. VCO Voltage Readings
VCO Alignment
In the following steps you’ll adjust the VCO inductor (L30) so that the
VCO control voltage is in the proper range.
Disconnect the internal frequency counter probe and remove it
completely from the K2.
Select 80 meters, and set the VFO for about 4000 kHz.
Connect a DMM (digital multimeter) to the left end of resistor
R30 (near the center of the synthesizer area of the RF board) and
ground. Use a small alligator clip to ensure a good connection. (You
can also use the built-in voltmeter to measure the VCO control
voltage. Refer to Voltmeter Probe Assembly in Part I.)
i
It is possible to damage the slugs in slug-tuned inductors if
you use a metal tool or if you tune the slug too far in or out. The
tuning tool provided will not damage the slugs.
Using the wide end of the plastic tuning tool, adjust the slug in
inductor L30 until the voltage at R30 reads 6.0 V. If the voltmeter
reading does not change at all as you tune L30 through its full range,
refer to Troubleshooting. If the voltage changes but you cannot get to
6.0 V, you have probably wound the VCO inductor (T5) incorrectly or
have installed the wrong value at L30 or C72.
Set the VFO for approximately 3500 kHz.
Measure and write down the VCO control voltage at this
frequency in Table 6-1 (using pencil).
For each remaining band, set the VFO to the low and high
frequencies listed in Table 6-1 and write down the VCO control
voltages.9 (You can tune quickly to the approximate frequencies in the
table by selecting the 1-kHz tuning rate.)
9
Usable VFO coverage extends well beyond the ranges given in the table. 15 MHz is
used as the upper boundary on 20 meters to allow reception of WWV at this
frequency.
Band
80 m
40 m
30 m
20 m
17 m
15 m
12 m
10 m
Low Freq.
3500
7000
10000
14000
18000
21000
24800
28000
Voltage
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
High Freq.
4000
7300
10150
15000
18200
21450
25000
28800
Voltage
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
If some VCO control voltage readings above are < 1.5 V, or
some of them are > 7.5 V, you may be able to shift the entire set of
readings so that they are all within the 1.5 to 7.5 V range. Switch to
the band (and frequency) that had the highest or lowest voltage, then
adjust L30 to bring that reading into range. Then re-measure all of the
voltages to make sure they're in range.
i
If you have some voltages that are < 1.5 V and others that are
> 7.5 V, you have probably installed the wrong value at one or more of
the VCO capacitors (C71-C74) or varactor diodes (D21-D26). Another
possibility is that T5 has the wrong number of turns or that you
installed the wrong type of slug-tuned inductor at L30. If you change
any of these components, repeat the VCO alignment procedure.
Disconnect the DMM from R30.
Connect the internal frequency counter probe to the BFO test
point, TP2 (right side of the RF board, near the crystal filter).
ELECRAFT®
65
BFO Test
The BFO (beat-frequency oscillator) will be tested in the following
steps.
If your BFO range is less than 3.6 kHz, you may have the wrong
varactor diodes installed at D37 or D38, or the wrong crystals installed
at X3 or X4.
Switch to the 40-m band.
Connect the frequency counter to the BFO test point (TP2),
which is on the right side of the RF board near the crystal filter.
Using the menu, select CAL FCTR . The counter should show a
frequency between 4908 and 4918 kHz.
i
If you see a reading of 0000.00 kHz, or one that is changing
rapidly, you may not have the frequency counter probe connected
properly, or the BFO may not be working (see Troubleshooting). If
you see a stable frequency reading that is nowhere near 4908-4918
kHz, you may have installed the wrong crystals in the BFO (X3/X4).
When you’re in frequency counter mode, the B AN D + and
B AN D - switches can be used to check the range of the BFO. First, tap
B AN D + and write down the frequency reading below (typically about
4916-4917 kHz). Then tap B AN D - and write down this frequency
reading (usually about 4909-4912 kHz). Finally, calculate the BFO
range (high - low) in kHz. Typical range is 4 to 6 kHz.
BFO High Freq.___________
(must be >= 4916.3 kHz)
BFO Low Freq.
___________ (must be <= 4912.7 kHz)
Range (High - Low)
___________ (must be >= 3.6 kHz)
If the BFO frequencies are shifted too high or too low, it may be due
to one of the following:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If you didn't calibrate the K2's internal frequency counter using an
external counter, it may not be reading accurately. If possible,
borrow an accurate counter and re-do the 4 MHz Oscillator
Calibration.
The BFO range shift could be due to the inductance of L33 being
too high or too low. However, since L33 is supplied pre-wound
and tested, this is unlikely.
The leads of R116 may have been heated excessively during
soldering, shorting out a portion of L33's turns.
One of L33's leads could be broken. Look closely at the leads
using a magnifying glass.
One or more of the capacitors or varactor diodes in the BFO
circuit could be of the wrong value.
ELECRAFT®
66
BFO Alignment
The K2 uses a variable-bandwidth crystal filter, allowing the operator
to set up as many as four filter bandwidths for each operating mode.
Each of these filter configurations requires an appropriate BFO setting,
which determines the pitch you hear.
Filter and BFO set up is done with the CAL FIL calibration function.
CAL FIL is described in detail in the Operation section of the
manual, under Calibration Functions. Rather than duplicate this
information here, we'll refer you to the instructions and example in the
Operation section.
Make sure the bottom cover is securely attached.
Tap P R E / AT T until the PRE annunciator is turned on. (Turning
the preamp on will provide some background noise so you can hear
the effect of changing filter bandwidths.)
Follow all instructions on page 91 to become familiar with the
CAL FIL function.
Perform the steps in the example on page 93 to set up all filters.
You'll use the filter and BFO data from Table 8-1 (for a CW-only K2),
since the SSB adapter is not installed. If you later install the SSB
adapter, you can easily change the settings to take advantage of the
optimized, fixed-bandwidth SSB filter.
VFO Linearization
Make sure the bottom cover is securely attached.
Allow the K2 to stabilize for at least 10 minutes at room
temperature (approx. 20-25°C). (Note: Avoid using a high-wattage
work lamp direct above the K2 during calibration. With the top cover
removed, this could heat the RF board to a higher temperature than
would ever be seen during normal operation.)
Connect the internal frequency counter cable to the VCO output
test point (TP1).
Use the procedure listed below to linearize the VFO. If you see
any INFO messages, refer to Troubleshooting.
1. Use B AN D + or B AN D - to select 40 meters. Select CW normal
mode and filter FL1.
2. Set the VFO to anywhere in the range 7000-7100 kHz.
3. Enter the menu and select CAL PLL , then hold E D I T a second
time to start the VFO linearization sequence.
4. The frequency counter will show the VCO frequency as it
decreases through a range of about 10-13 kHz. (The letter "d " will
flash each time a calibration data point is stored.)
5. When calibration is completed (4-8 minutes), you'll see the
message End on the LCD. You can then tap any switch to return
to normal operation. If you see an INFO message rather than
End , refer to Troubleshooting (Appendix E).
ELECRAFT®
I.F. Amplifier Alignment
L34, located near the right front corner of the RF board, is used to
peak the output of the I.F. amplifier.
Using the wide end of the plastic tuning tool, adjust the slug in
L34 until it is near the top of the can. Stop turning the slug when it
appears to be at the top or when you feel resistance.
Turn L34’s slug one full turn clockwise (down into the can).
Set the band to 40 meters using B AN D + or B AN D - . Select CW
Normal and FL2 (700 Hz nominal bandwidth).
Make sure the RF GAIN control is fully clockwise (max. gain).
Disconnect the antenna from J4, if one was connected.
Tap P R E / AT T N until the PRE annunciator turns on.
67
Using the plastic tuning tool, adjust both L1 and L2 (back left
corner) for peak signal strength. You may be able to use the bargraph
if the signal is strong enough. If you do not hear any signals or noise,
see Troubleshooting.
i
In CW mode, the frequency shown on the display takes into
account an offset equal to your sidetone pitch. This allows you to
determine a station's actual carrier frequency by matching their pitch
to your sidetone, rather than by zero-beating the signal. The S P O T
switch can be used for this purpose.
This completes 40-meter receiver alignment. You may wish to become
familiar with the K2’s receiver features before proceeding (see
Operation). In Part III you’ll install the remaining band-pass filters and
align the transmitter and receiver on all bands.
Connect a pair of headphones (stereo or mono) to the front panel
jack, and turn the AF GAIN control to about midway.
Assembly, Part III
Slowly tune the VFO to locate the weak internally-generated
signal near 7000 kHz. If you can't hear the signal at all, you may have
a receiver problem. Try the 40-meter Band Pass Filter Alignment,
below, then refer to Troubleshooting if necessary.
In this final RF board assembly section you’ll install the transmitter
components, as well as the remaining band-pass and low-pass filters.
This will allow you to align and test the K2 on all bands.
While listening to the signal at 7000 kHz, adjust L34 for best
signal strength and lowest noise. This setting occurs at about 1 to 1.5
turns below the top of the can. (You can use your DMM on AC volts,
at the speaker jack, to obtain a more sensitive indication.)
40-Meter Band Pass Filter Alignment
Connect an antenna or a signal generator to the antenna jack on
the rear panel. If you use a signal generator, set it for approx. 7150
kHz at an output level of about -100 dBm, or strong enough to activate
the S-meter. If you're using an antenna, tune in a signal in the range of
7100-7200 kHz. If you cannot find a signal, you can use atmospheric
noise from the antenna to peak the filter.
Turn off the K2 and disconnect the power supply.
Remove the two screws holding the Front Panel board to the
Control board, then unplug the Control board. Use the long-handled
Allen wrench as described in Part I.
Remove the bottom cover.
Remove the screws from the front panel assembly and unplug it
from the RF board.
Remove the side panels by taking out the two screws along the
bottom edge of each panel.
ELECRAFT®
68
Install the following 1/4-watt resistors, starting with R46 which is
just to the left of I/O controller U1.
__ R46, 270 (RED-VIO-BRN) ⇒
__ R59, 4.7 k (YEL-VIO-RED)
__ R49, 120 (BRN-RED-BRN)
__ R41, 560 (GRN-BLU-BRN)
__ R45, 47 (YEL-VIO-BLK)
__ R61, 120 (BRN-RED-BRN)
__ R40, 470 (YEL-VIO-BRN)
__ R55, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ C219, 12 (12)
__ C221, 39 (39)
__ C213, 33 (33)
__ C199, 220 (221)
__ C201, 220 (221)
__ C138, .047 (473)
__ C220, 220 (221)
__ C212, 150 (151)
__ C200, 150 (151)
__ C192, 1200 (122)
__ C222, 100 (101)
__ C214, 68 (68)
__ C203, 47 (47)
__ C202, 120 (121)
i
There are two types of ceramic trimmer capacitors used in the
band-pass filters: 30 pF and 50 pF. These may look identical. They
will either be bagged separately, or the 50-pF trimmers will have a red
marking.
__ R53, 4.7 ohms (YEL-VIO-GLD)
__ R56, 33 (ORG-ORG-BLK)
__ R54, 4.7 ohms (YEL-VIO-GLD)
__ R60, 100 ohms (BRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R62, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
__ R67, 1.5 k, 1% (BRN-GRN-BLK-BRN)
__ R68, 226 ohms, 1% (RED-RED-BLU-BLK)
Install the trimmers listed below, starting with C21 near the backleft corner. Orient the flat side of each trimmer capacitor with the flat
side of its component outline. This orientation is required to prevent
RF pickup during alignment.
i
The 150 pF and 3.3 pF capacitors to be installed below may
be hard to identify. See capacitor information on page 9.
Install the capacitors listed below. C12 is near the back left
corner. Note: C13 and C14 will not be installed; they are included
with the 160 m/RX Antenna option (K160RX).
__ C12, 560 (561) ⇒
__ C16, 1800 (182)
__ C20, 47 (47)
__ C24, 47 (47)
__ C37, .001 (102)
__ C11, 1800 (182) ⇒
__ C15, 560 (561)
__ C19, 330 (331)
__ C25, 330 (331)
__ C36, 470 (471)
__ C26, .001 (102)
__ C22, 3.3 pF (3.3)
__ C30, 470 (471)
__ C35, 56 (56)
__ C33, 2.2 pF (2.2)
__ C49, .001 (102)
__ C43, 33 (33)
__ C45, 1 pF (1)
__ C118, .01 (103)
__ C120, .01 (103)
__ C31, 56 (56)
__ C48, 330 (331)
__ C115, .01 (103)
__ C116, 33 (33)
__ C131, 0.1 (104)
__ C42, 330 (331)
__ C47, 33 (33)
__ C117, .047 (473)
__ C121, 0.01 (103)
__ C124, 0.1 (104)
__ C129, .01 (103)
__ C190, 1200 (122)
__ C210, 82 (82)
__ C130, 0.1 (104)
__ C127, 680 (681)
__ C197, 100 (101)
__ C211, 10 (10)
__ C128, 680 (681)
__ C191, 1800 (182)
__ C198, 27 (27)
__ C218, 150 (151)
__ C21, 50 pF
__ C23, 50 pF
__ C32, 30 pF
__ C44, 30 pF
__ C34, 30 pF
__ C46, 30 pF
Set all of the trimmer capacitors just installed to their mid-way
points (see Figure 6-23). Use a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Figure 6-23
Install L5, a 33 µH RF choke (ORG-ORG-BLK), near the backleft corner.
Install the following transistors, which are located near the I/O
Controller (U1).
__ Q10, 2N7000
__ Q11, PN2222A
__ Q13, PN2222A
ELECRAFT®
69
Ferrite-bead assemblies Z1 and Z2 will be installed vertically
near transformer T3 as indicated by their component outlines. To make
these assemblies, string two ferrite beads onto a 1" (25 mm) length of
bare hookup wire (or discarded component leads) as shown in Figure
6-24.
Install the following components on the bottom of the board,
working from left to right.
__ R63, 220 (RED-RED-BRN)
Note: bend the leads of R58 exactly as shown by its component outline.
__ R58, 180 ohms, 1/2 watt (BRN-GRY-BRN)
__ RFC8, __ RFC9, __ RFC4,
10 µH (BRN-BLK-BLK)
__ RFC6, 0.68 µH (BLU-GRY-SILVER)
__ RFC5, 10 µH (BRN-BLK-BLK)
__ R50, 1.5 ohms, 1/2-watt (BRN-GRN-GLD)
__ R48, 120 (BRN-RED-BRN)
__ R43, 22 (RED-RED-BLK)
Figure 6-24
Install Z1 and Z2, bending the leads on the bottom of the board to
hold them in place. Make sure that the beads are seated flat against the
PC board, then solder.
Locate D9, the 1N5711 diode which you identified and set aside
earlier. Install D9 near the right edge of the board.
Install electrolytic capacitors C126 (47 µF) and C137 (100 µF),
Near the "ELECRAFT" label at the center of the board. Insert the (+)
lead of each capacitor into the hole marked (+).
Install electrolytic capacitor C125 (22 µF) which is near U1.
Install Q5 (2N5109). Be sure Q5 is firmly seated on the board
and has its tab oriented as shown by the component outline before
soldering.
__ R47, 47 (YEL-VIO-BLK)
__ R42, 4.7 ohms (YEL-VIO-GLD)
__ R44, 2.7 k (RED-VIO-RED)
Make sure you have separated the remaining slug-tuned shielded
inductors into 1 µH and 4.7 µH types. Install these inductors in the
order indicated below, on the top of the board. These inductors are
difficult to remove once soldered, so double-check the tops of these
parts. The 4.7 µH inductors have a large slot and the 1 µH inductors
have a small slot and a red line.
__ L3, 4.7 µH (large slot, no mark)
__ L8, 4.7 µH
__ L4, 4.7 µH
__ L9, 4.7 µH
__ L10, 1 µH (small slot, red line)
__ L12, 1 µH
__ L11, 1 µH
__ L13, 1 µH
ELECRAFT®
70
i
TO-220 package transistors Q6, 7, and 8 look identical, but
Q6 is different. Locate the two 2SC1969’s (labeled "C1969"), Q7 and
Q8, and set them to one side. The 2SC2166 transistor, Q6 ("C2166"),
will be installed first.
Attach a self-adhesive thermal pad to the PC board on top of the
component outline for Q6. The hole in the thermal pad must be aligned
precisely with Q6's mounting hole on the board.
Prepare the leads of Q6 as you did with the voltage regulators on
the Control board (Figure 4-4, page 17), using gradual bends to avoid
lead breakage. Insert Q6 as shown by its component outline.
Secure Q6 to the board using a 4-40 x 3/8" (9.5 mm) screw, #4
lock washer and 4-40 nut. The screw should be inserted from the
bottom side of the RF board; the washer and nut go on the top.
Verify that the body of Q6 is not touching the leads of any
adjacent components, then solder.
Wind and install each of the low-pass filter inductors listed
below, starting at the back-right with L16 and L17 (80 meters). Wind
each of the toroids using the core type and number of turns indicated
(use red enamel wire). Review the toroid winding instructions and
illustrations for RFC14 (Page 55).
__ L16
__ L17
__ L18
__ L19
__ L20
T44-2 (red), 21 turns
T44-2 (red), 21 turns
T44-2 (red), 9 turns
T44-2 (red), 8 turns
T44-2 (red), 7 turns
19" (48 cm)
19" (48 cm)
10" (25 cm)
9" (23 cm)
8" (18 cm)
Note: The black cores below are all of the powdered-iron (ceramic)
type, not ferrite. If necessary you can identify them by measuring their
diameter, which is 0.44" (11 mm), not 3/8" (9.5 mm).
__ L21
__ L22
__ L23
__ L24
T44-10 (black), 9 turns
T44-10 (black), 8 turns
T44-10 (black), 11 turns
T44-10 (black), 10 turns
10" (25 cm)
9" (23 cm)
11" (28 cm)
10" (25 cm)
i
It is very important to wind and install toroidal transformers
T1 through T4 exactly as described in the following steps. Remember
that transformer windings are identified by numbered pairs of leads,
which correspond to the PC board and schematic.
T1 is wound on an FT37-43 ferrite core (dark gray) and has
windings similar to those shown in Figure 6-25. The 1–2 winding is 9
turns of red enamel wire (10", 25 cm). The 3–4 winding is 3 turns of
green enamel wire (5", 13 cm). (The drawing shows more than 9 turns
on the larger winding.)
Prepare T1’s leads as in Part II. Completely remove the
insulation to within about 1/8" (3 mm) of the core, then tin the leads.
3
1
2
4
Figure 6-25
Install T1 horizontally near Q5, inserting the leads into the
matching numbered holes as indicated by the above illustration and by
the component outline.
ELECRAFT®
71
T2 is wound on the same core type as T1 (FT37-43). Its windings
must be spaced as shown in Figure 6-26(a), with the 3-4 winding
occupying about half the diameter of the core. T2’s 1–2 winding is 12
turns of red enamel wire (13", 33 cm), and its 3–4 winding is 8 turns
of green (9", 23 cm).
Wind the twisted wires onto a 1/2" (12.7 mm) dia. ferrite core
(FT50-43), using exactly 5 turns and covering about 85% of the core.
Figure 6-27 shows how the winding should look. The leads of T3 are
labeled with letters A through D on the PC board to avoid confusing
them with the numbered leads of T2 and T4.
Prepare T2’s leads, but leave an extra 1/2" of insulation on leads
3 and 4 (green) as shown in Figure 6-26(a).
Separate T3’s leads as shown in Figure 6-27. Strip and tin the
leads, being careful not to let the red/green wire pairs short together.
Fold the leads of T2's green winding (3-4) down and under the
core as shown in Figure 6-26(b).
Install T3 vertically as shown by its component outline. T3 must
be seated flat against the PC board, with its leads pulled tight on the
bottom side.
Install T2 horizontally, just to the right of Q6. To ensure that the
leads do not contact any adjacent pads or components, T2 should be
mounted so that it is elevated slightly above the board (about 1/16"
[1.5 mm]).
1
3
3
A
(GRN)
C
(RED)
B
(GRN)
4
4
D
(RED)
2
(b)
(a)
Figure 6-26
Transformer T3 is mounted vertically, to the right of T2. The
wires for the two windings must be twisted together before winding
(bi-filar). First, cut two 10" (25 cm) lengths of enamel wire, one red,
and one green. Then twist the wires together over their entire length.
The wires should cross each other once every 1/2" or 1 cm.
Figure 6-27
ELECRAFT®
72
Locate the "binocular" (2-hole) ferrite core for T4. Wind 2 turns
of green-insulated hookup wire (5", 13 cm) through the core as
shown in Figure 6-28. This forms the 1–2 winding. (Do not use
enamel-coated wire.)
Before installing T4, verify that the screws holding the 2-D
fastener beneath it are tightened, and that #4 internal-tooth lock
washers were used. It is important that these screws not come loose
sometime after T4 has been installed.
Cut and strip the two leads using the lengths shown. Be careful
not to nick the wire.
Install T4 to the right of T3, inserting leads for the 1–2 and 3–4
windings into their matching numbered holes. T4 should rest directly
on top of the screws that secure the 2-D fastener beneath it. T4 should
also be parallel to the board, not tilted to one side. Pull the leads taut
on the bottom and bend them to hold the transformer in place. Do not
solder T4 yet.
1
Use two 2" (5 cm) lengths of bare hookup wire to form the 5–6
and 7–8 windings on T4 (Figure 6-30). (These are more accurately
described as links, each being just a single turn.) Route the bare wires
through the core first, then bend them down and insert them into their
numbered holes. Do not solder yet.
2
1/2” (13mm)
7/8” (22mm)
Figure 6-28
5
6
8
7
Wind a 3-turn winding (3–4) on top of the 1-2 winding, but with
the wire starting and ending on the opposite side (Figure 6-29). Use 7"
(18 cm) of white-insulated hookup wire (not enamel-coated wire).
Prepare the leads in the same manner as above.
3
Figure 6-30
4
Figure 6-29
Adjust all of the windings of T4 as needed so that the transformer
is positioned directly above its component outline. Pull the leads tight
on the bottom, then solder.
Inspect all four transformers in the transmitter area closely, on
both top and bottom, for shorts or cold solder joints.
ELECRAFT®
73
i
PA transistors Q7 and Q8 (2SC1969) must be installed on the
bottom of the PC board, with their metal tabs facing away from the
board, as explained in the following steps. Locate the component
outlines on the bottom of the board before proceeding.
Prepare the leads of Q7 as shown in Figure 6-31. Bend the leads
upward, away from the tab--the opposite of the way you bent the leads
of Q6. Form the leads using the shaft of a small screwdriver to create
gradual bends. Do not install Q7 yet.
Place Q7 on the bottom of the board so that the leads are inserted
into the PC board as indicated by Q7’s component outline. The
mounting screw and hardware should appear as shown in Figure 6-31.
Do not solder yet.
Make sure the smaller part of the shoulder washer is visible
through the hole in Q7’s metal tab.
Secure Q7 and its hardware temporarily using a 4-40 nut and #4
lock washer. Tighten the nut only finger-tight.
Once Q7 and its hardware appears to be parallel to the PC board
as shown in Figure 6-31, solder Q7 on the top of the board.
Repeat the steps above for the other PA transistor, Q8.
Uninstalled Components
Figure 6-31
Insert a 4-40 x 1/2" (12.7 mm) screw through the PC board hole
for Q7’s tab (see Figure 6-31). Then slip the hardware listed below
onto this mounting screw from the bottom side. (The shoulder washer
can be found with the MISCELLANEOUS components.)
__ #4 fibre washer (black)
__ 1/4" (6.4 mm) dia., 1/8" (3 mm) long phenolic standoff (brown)
__ #4 nylon shoulder washer (black)
i
Do not use any hardware other than that supplied. The height
of the PA transistor assembly is critical for maintaining good heat
dissipation.
Check off the components in the list below, verifying that they are
not yet installed. All of these components are on the top side of the
board. Note: Most of these components are provided with option kits,
as indicated in the list. Some of the connectors can be pre-installed, as
will be explained on the next page.
__ J14 (near antenna jack); supplied with K160RX
__ C13 and __ C14 (in 160 m band-pass filter); supplied with K160RX
__ C75 (synthesizer area); supplied with K160RX
__ J15 (3-pin connector in 40 m band-pass filter); supplied with K60XV
__ J13 (transverter conn., near 40 m band-pass filter); supplied with K60XV
__ D19 and D20 (synthesizer area); supplied with K60XV
__ P6 (near DC input jack); supplied with KAT2 or KPA100
__ P3 (near crystal filter); supplied with KBT2 or KPA100
__ J9, __ J10, and J11 (near crystal filter); supplied with KSB2
__ J12 (near crystal filter); supplied with KNB2
__ J5 (near BFO crystals); reserved for future use
__ X2 (front left corner); not used
ELECRAFT®
74
i
If you have already purchased option kits, you may install
selected option components now, as explained in the following steps.
This will simplify installation of the options after K2 alignment and
test have been completed.
If you have the KNB2 (Noise Blanker) option, locate the
Installation section of the KNB2 manual. Complete only the
installation of J12 and the standoff. Do not remove W5, R88, R89 or
R90 at this time.
i
Do not remove the option bypass jumpers (W1, W2, etc.). The K2
must be aligned and tested before the jumpers are removed and
option modules installed.
Do not attempt to pre-install parts supplied with the
K60XV option. The K2 must be completed and tested first.
K160RX Component Installation (optional)
Visual Inspection
Locate the Installation section of the K160RX kit manual.
Cross out the first three steps (turning off the K2, removing
hardware, etc.), which are not applicable since the K2 is already
disassembled. Skip the next two steps. Do not remove W1.
Complete the steps for J14 through C13 and C14.
Cross out the next two steps (examination of Q7 and Q8). The
remaining steps should be completed after K2 alignment.
KSB2 Component Installation (optional)
Examine the bottom (solder side) of the RF board carefully for
unsoldered pins, solder bridges, or cold solder joints. Since this is a
large board, you should break the examination up into three parts:
__ perimeter area
__ front half
__ back half
Examine the top (component side) of the RF board for unsoldered
pins, solder bridges, or cold solder joints. This step is necessary
because some components are installed on the bottom of the board and
soldered on top.
Make sure switch S1 on the RF board is in the OFF position.
(Plunger OUT is OFF.)
Locate KSB2 Module Installation in the KSB2 manual.
Complete only the steps required to install J11, J9, and J10, and
the standoff. Do not remove W2, W3, or C167 at this time.
Complete the remaining steps after alignment.
Other Option Component Installation (optional)
If you have the KAT2 (ATU) or KPA100 (Amplifier) option,
install 2-pin connector P6. Use the option manual's instructions.
If you have the KBT2 (Battery) or KPA100 option, install
2-pin connector P3. Use the option manual's instructions.
Resistance Checks
Perform the following resistance checks.
Test Point
Q7 collector
Q6 base
Q7 base
U11 pin 8
U10 pin 8
U12 pin 1
Signal Name
12V
Driver bias
PA bias
8A
8T
8R
Res. (to GND)
> 500 ohms
100-140 ohms
2.5 - 3.0 k
> 250 ohms
> 500 ohms
> 500 ohms
ELECRAFT®
Install the two side panels and secure with two chassis screws
each as you did in Part I and Part II.
Plug in the front panel assembly and make sure the connectors
are completely mated. Secure the front panel with four chassis screws.
Verify that all components on the bottom of the RF board have an
installed height of 1/4" (6 mm) or less. Capacitors that stand above this
height must be bent downward so that they won’t hit the bottom cover
or heat sink.
Install the bottom cover and secure it using six chassis screws.
Plug in the Control board. Make sure that all three connectors are
completely mated.
Secure the front panel and Control boards together using two
chassis screws.
Locate the heat sink panel. You'll need to remove all of the
masking tape from this panel except that covering the "RCV ANT"
and "XVTR IN/OUT" holes. Use a sharp tool to cut though the tape,
leaving a 1/2" (12 mm) border around these holes. Then peel the tape
off, leaving these holes covered.
Attach two round rubber feet to the heat sink using 4-40 x 7/16"
(11 mm) screws, #4 lock washers, and 4-40 nuts. The screws are
standard steel/zinc-plated, not black anodized. The nuts go on the
inside surface of the heat sink. (The rubber feet can be found with the
MISCELLANEOUS items.)
Remove the finishing nuts and washers from the shafts of the
antenna and key jacks. They will be re-installed later.
Turn the K2 up on its left side. This will keep the PA transistor
screws from slipping out during the following steps.
75
Remove the 4-40 nuts and #4 lock washers from the mounting
screws for Q7 and Q8, but do not pull the screws out. (If you pull these
screws out, the associated hardware will fall off and will have to be reinstalled.)
i
In the next step you'll install thermal insulation pads on the
power amplifier transistors, Q7 and Q8. These pads must be positioned
correctly to keep the collectors of the transistors from shorting to
ground. Proper positioning is also required to guarantee good heat
conduction.
Place self-adhesive thermal pads on top of Q7 and Q8 as shown
in Figure 6-32, with the hole in the pad centered over the hole in the
transistor tab. The adhesive side must be in contact with the transistor.
4-40 screw
Thermal
Pad
Figure 6-32
Back out the mounting screws for Q7 and Q8 until the ends of the
screws protrude only slightly from the transistor tabs. Keep the K2 on
its left side so the screws don’t slip out further.
Make sure that the thermal pads on Q7 and Q8 are centered, and
that you can see the shoulder washers inside the tab holes. If the
shoulder washers have come out of the tab holes, re-align the PA
transistor hardware as needed.
ELECRAFT®
76
Keeping the K2 on its left side, slip the heat sink over the rearpanel connectors and into position (Figure 6-33). Figure 6-34 shows
how the heat sink and associated hardware appear in cross-section.
Secure Q7 and Q8 on the bottom of the heat sink using 4-40 nuts
and #4 lock washers. Do not over-tighten the nuts, as this may cause
the thermal pads to scrape against the heat sink, possibly causing a
short to ground.
Heat
Sink
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-33
Make sure that the four small holes in the heat sink line up with
Q7/Q8 and the 2-D block between them.
Press the Q7/Q8 mounting screws all the way back in so that they
protrude from the heat sink.
Use two chassis screws and two #4 lock washers to secure the
heat sink firmly to the 2-D fastener.
Using an ohmmeter on a low resistance scale, check for a short
from Q7 or Q8 collector to ground. (This test should also be performed
any time the heat sink is removed and re-installed.) If a short is
measured, remove the heat sink and investigate the cause. The most
likely reason for a short is mis-alignment of a shoulder washer or
thermal pad. If a thermal pad or shoulder washer is damaged, it must
be replaced.
There are four more #4 holes in the heat sink: two on the bottom
and two on the back panel. Use four chassis screws to secure the heat
sink to the side panels and RF board at these locations. You may need
to adjust the positions of the 2-D fasteners on the side panels slightly.
Install the washers and finishing nuts that you removed earlier
from the antenna and key jacks. (The antenna jack hardware is shown
installed in Figure 6-34.)
ELECRAFT®
Alignment and Test, Part III
In this section you’ll complete alignment and test of the K2 on all
bands.
77
Select voltage/current display mode by tapping D I S P L AY to
make sure the receiver is not drawing excess current. (Typical current
drain will be 180-250 mA depending on menu settings.)
Return to frequency display mode.
Make sure the power switch, S1, is in the OFF position (out).
Switch to CW and select FL1 using X F I L .
Connect your power supply or battery. For transmitter tests, a
battery or well-regulated power supply that can handle at least 2 amps
is recommended. Avoid using a switching power supply unless it is
well shielded and includes EMI filtering. A linear-mode supply will
typically generate much less noise in the HF bands. (See any recent
ARRL Handbook for examples of both types.)
Connect a 50-ohm dummy load such as the Elecraft DL1 to the
antenna jack. The dummy load should be rated at 10 watts or higher.
(The DL1 is rated at 20 watts.)
Connect a pair of headphones and a key or keyer paddle.
Set the POWER control fully counter-clockwise (minimum
power output).
Turn on the K2. You should see ELECRAFT on the LCD,
followed by the frequency display.
Use the menu to set up the desired CW sidetone volume and pitch
if you have not already done so, using ST L and ST P . The pitch can
be set from 400 to 800 Hz, although 500-600 Hz is recommended. The
sidetone volume and tone will vary a small amount as the pitch is
changed, but it should have a pleasant sinewave sound at any setting.
Set up the desired keying device using INP . If you’re using a
hand key or external keyer, use INP HAND . To use the internal
keyer, select PDLn or PDLr (normal or reverse paddle). You can
also connect a computer or external keyer along with the keyer paddle.
Refer to the Operation section for details on this "auto-detect" feature
(Page 99).
To verify that the sidetone is functioning, hold the
switch. Tap any switch to turn the SPOT tone off.
SPOT
ELECRAFT®
78
40-Meter Transmitter Alignment
i
To align the transmitter you’ll need some means for
monitoring power output as you adjust the band-pass filters. An analog
wattmeter or oscilloscope is ideal. However, in the instructions that
follow we’ll assume that you’re using the K2’s built-in digital
wattmeter, which will also provide satisfactory results.
Set the POWER control for 2.0 watts.
Switch to the 40 meter band and set the VFO for about 7100 kHz.
Locate the 40-meter band-pass filter inductors, L1 and L2, and be
prepared to adjust them using the wide end of the tuning tool.
i
In the following steps you’ll place the K2 into "TUNE" mode
by holding T U N E . You should limit key-down periods to about 5 or 10
seconds during tune-up for safety reasons. If you see or smell smoke
turn the K2 off and refer to Troubleshooting.
Note: While in tune mode, it is normal to see power drift upward
several tenths of a watt. You may also see a sudden jump in power
during alignment. Adjust the POWER control as needed to maintain
the output between 1 and 2 watts.
Put the K2 into tune mode and activate the built-in wattmeter by
holding T U N E . Using the alignment tool, adjust L1 for maximum
output. Tap any switch to exit TUNE mode.
If necessary, repeat the adjustment of L1 and L2 two or three
times to be sure that you have the inductors peaked correctly. If you
cannot get power output to 2.0 watts or higher, see Troubleshooting.
Make sure the bar graph is set for DOT mode using the GRPH
menu entry.
Set power output to 5.0 W using the POWER control.
Tap D I S P L AY to enter voltage/current display mode. When this
display is selected, you can use T U N E to check your voltage and
current in transmit mode.
Enter tune mode and note the change in voltage and current.
Current drain at 5 watts is typically 1.3 to 1.6 amps.10 If the current
reading is much higher than this, or if the voltage drops more than 1 V,
you may have a problem in the transmitter, load, or power supply (see
Troubleshooting).
Return to frequency display using the D I S P L AY switch.
Set the POWER control for 10.0 watts.
Enter tune mode just long enough to verify that the wattmeter
reads approximately 10 watts. If you then switch to voltage/current
display and hold T U N E again, you should see a current drain of
typically 1.8 to 2 amps. If you see a "HI CUR" warning message (high
current), use CAL CUR to set your transmit current limit higher. If
current is much higher than 2 A, see Troubleshooting.
This completes transmitter alignment and test on 40 meters.
Enter tune mode again and adjust L2 for maximum output. Tap
any switch to exit.
10
The K2 transmitter is most efficient at 10 watts and higher; current drain at
5 watts CW may be higher than expected. This is unavoidable because the K2
is capable of up to 15 W output. Also, for a given power level, SSB
transmission requires more transmitter "overhead" to prevent distortion.
ELECRAFT®
Receiver Pre-Alignment
Since the same filters are used on both receive and transmit, it is
possible to align all the remaining bands on transmit only. However,
you can pre-align the filters on receive by using a signal or noise
generator (such as the Elecraft N-Gen), separate ham transceiver, or
on-air signals and atmospheric noise. This pre-alignment on receive
will make transmitter alignment easier, since the filter adjustments will
already be at or close to their final values.
Switch to 80 meters and set the VFO for about 3750 kHz (midband). Turn on the RF preamp by tapping P R E / AT T N until you see
the PRE annunciator turn on.
Use a signal generator or an antenna to inject a signal or noise at
this frequency.
Adjust L3 and L4 for maximum signal strength.
i
Since some inductors are shared between two bands, you must
always align the remaining bands in the order indicated. Always use
this procedure if you re-align the filters later.
79
Switch to 20 meters (14100 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Set
C21 and C23 to their mid-points. Adjust L8 and L9 for maximum
signal strength. (This step pre-sets C21, C23, L8, and L9 before final
adjustment in the next two steps.)
Switch to 30 meters (10100 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Adjust
L8 and L9 for maximum signal strength.
Switch back to 20 meters (14100 kHz). Adjust C21 and C23 for
maximum signal strength.
Switch to 15 meters (21100 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Adjust
L10 and L11 for maximum signal strength.
Switch to 17 meters (18100 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Adjust
C32 and C34 for maximum signal strength.
Switch to 10 meters (28200 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Adjust
L12 and L13 for maximum signal strength.
Switch to 12 meters (24900 kHz) and turn on the preamp. Adjust
C44 and C46 for maximum signal strength.
This completes receiver alignment.
i
During receiver alignment, you may have noticed that signal
strength is somewhat lower in volume when you select the narrowest
filter (100 Hz setting, FL4). This is because the K2's crystal filter is
optimized for wider bandwidths (250-800 Hz). Despite the slightly
greater attenuation, the narrower settings are very useful in reducing
QRM (interference) from strong, nearby signals. (Any of the filter
settings can be changed, and FL2-FL4 can even be turned OFF. See
page 91 for information on customizing filter settings.)
ELECRAFT®
80
Transmitter Alignment
If you did the receiver alignment, above, you may find that little or no
transmit adjustment is required on most bands.
Set the POWER control for 2.0 watts.
Switch to 80 meters and set the VFO for about 3750 kHz (midband).
Enter tune mode and adjust L3 and L4 for maximum power as
indicated on the internal wattmeter. (Use a more sensitive analog
instrument if available.) Limit tune-up time to 5 or 10 seconds.
i
Since some inductors are shared between two bands, you must
always align the remaining bands in the order indicated. Always use
this procedure if you re-align the filters later.
Switch to 20 meters (14100 kHz). Set C21 and C23 to their midpoints. Adjust L8 and L9 for maximum power output. (This step presets C21, C23, L8, and L9 before final adjustment in the next two
steps.)
Switch to 30 meters (10100 kHz) and adjust L8 and L9 for
maximum power output.
Switch to 20 meters (14100 kHz) and adjust C21 and C23 for
maximum power output.
Switch to 15 meters (21100 kHz) and adjust L10 and L11 for
maximum power output.
Switch to 17 meters (18100 kHz) and adjust C32 and C34 for
maximum power output.
Switch to 10 meters (28200 kHz) and adjust L12 and L13 for
maximum power output.
Switch to 12 meters (24900 kHz) and adjust C44 and C46 for
maximum power output.
This completes transmitter alignment.
ELECRAFT®
81
7. Final Assembly
Place the top cover upside down as shown in Figure 7-1, with its
rear panel facing away from you. The illustration shows how the
speaker, 2-conductor cable, external speaker jack and other hardware
will be attached to the top cover.
D
D
A
3/8" (9.5 mm)
B
Trim the supplied grille cloth to the size of the speaker frame.
Place #4 fibre washers (black) at each of the top cover's four
speaker mounting holes (Figure 7-1). Trim the corners of the grille
cloth so it just fits between the fibre washers, not touching them.
Place the speaker on top of the fibre washers and grille cloth.
Secure it with four 3/8" (9.5 mm) screws, #4 lock washers, and 4-40
nuts (Figure 7-2). Do not over-tighten the nuts.
A
Cable Ties (3)
B
9" (23 cm)
Top Cover
Figure 7-2
15"
(38 cm)
C
C
Figure 7-1
Locate the two holes marked A in Figure 7-1. Use two 4-40 x
3/8" (9.5 mm) screws to fill these holes, securing them with #4 lock
washers and 4-40 nuts. (The holes are for the battery option.)
Install 2-D fasteners at the two locations marked B in Figure 7-1.
The 2-D fasteners should line up exactly with the edges. Use two
chassis screws per 2-D fastener.
ELECRAFT®
82
Using a sharp tool, cut through and peel off about 1/2" x 1/2" (12
x 12 mm) of the masking material covering the EXT SPKR hole.
Note: Leave the other holes covered with masking material until the
associated options are installed.
Ground
AF
Install the external speaker jack in the EXT SPKR hole. Orient
the jack as shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-4, with the "AF" tab
nearest the inside of the top cover. (Caution: Mis-identification of the
three tabs could result in a ground short.)
SP
24" (61 cm) of 2-conductor speaker cable is supplied. Cut it into
two pieces, 15" (38 cm) and 9" (23 cm) long.
Solder crimp pins to the two wires at one end of the 15" (38 cm)
length of speaker cable (Figure 7-3).
Copper wire
Pin 1 side
Crimp pin
Housing
Do Not
Solder Yet
Copper Wire
(Solder)
Figure 7-4
Connect one end of the 9" (23 cm) speaker cable to the speaker
terminals. The copper wire should be connected to the lug marked (+)
on the speaker. Solder both wires.
Connect the other end of this cable to the external speaker jack as
shown in Figure 7-5. The copper wire must be connected to the lug
marked "SP" below. Solder all three lugs.
Solder Both
Wires
Ground
AF
Figure 7-3
i
When you insert crimp pins into the housing in the next step,
they should snap into place. Each pin has a small tab on the back that
latches into a hole in the housing when inserted.
Insert the copper wire into the pin 1 position of a two-pin housing
Connect
as shown. Insert the other wire into the pin 2 position.
the other end of this cable to the external speaker jack as shown in
Figure 7-4. The copper wire must be connected to the "AF" lug of the
speaker jack. Solder only the copper wire.
Copper Wire
(Solder)
SP
Figure 7-5
Use three cable ties at the points shown in Figure 7-1 to hold the
speaker cables in place. (Save the fourth cable tie for use with the
supplied RF probe.) The ties should be pulled tight. Trim any excess
cable tie length.
ELECRAFT®
83
Finishing Touches
Examine the Control board one last time to be sure that it is
correctly plugged into the RF board. All three connectors must be
mated completely.
Attach the self-adhesive serial number label to the rear panel of
the heat sink in the space provided.
Write the serial number on the inside cover of your manual.
Leave the frequency counter test cable connected to the BFO test
point (TP2). This will allow you to modify your filter and BFO
settings if necessary during normal operation.
1
2
If there are any missing chassis screws in the bottom cover, heat
sink, side panels, or front panel, install them now.
Plug the internal speaker cable into P5 on the RF board, just
behind the on-off switch, S1. The connector is keyed and can only be
plugged in one way.
i
Remove the masking material from the two top-cover mounting
holes marked C in Figure 7-1.
Place the top cover onto the chassis and secure it using six
chassis screws as shown in Figure 7-6.
i
When removing the top cover in the future, take out only the
six screws shown in Figure 7-6.
6
5
Even if you have purchased some K2 options, you should not
assemble and install them yet. The option manuals assume that you are
familiar with basic K2 operation.
Cut through and peel off about 1/2" x 1/2" (12 x 12 mm) of
masking material from around the top-cover mounting holes marked D
in Figure 7-1. These holes are in the far corners of the top cover's rear
panel, corresponding to screws 1 and 2 in Figure 7-6.
4
3
Figure 7-6
This completes assembly of your K2. Please read the Operation
section, which follows, and try each of the K2's features.
i
If you did not have access to a frequency counter or calibrated
receiver when aligning the 4-MHz oscillator, you may wish to use the
one of the alternative VFO calibration techniques described in the
Operation section (page 105). You can use an on-air signal, such as
WWV at 10 MHz, to obtain better than +/- 50 Hz VFO dial calibration
on all bands.
84
8. Operation
ELECRAFT®
ELECRAFT®
85
ELECRAFT®
86
This section of the manual explains how to set up and operate the
K2. Refer to the illustrations on the previous pages for control
locations. A comprehensive "mini-manual" is also available for
the K2; see our web site for details.
Connections
Power Supply
You can power the basic K2 (without the KPA100 amplifier) from
any 9-15 V DC power supply. A mating connector for the DC input
jack is provided with the kit. Current drain is typically 1.5-2 A on
transmit, but can be over 3 A at the highest power settings or with
high SWR. (See Current Limiting, below.)
Internal Battery: An optional 12 V, 2.9-Ah rechargeable battery
can be installed inside the K2 (model KBT2). A 14.0 V power
supply can then be used to recharge the battery and power the
transceiver. If an external battery is connected, the internal battery
must be disabled using the INT BATTERY switch.
Low Battery Warning: If the supply voltage drops below about 11
V, you’ll see a brief LO BATT message flashed on the LCD once
every 8 minutes (approx.). If this happens, reduce power and
recharge your battery. For tips on battery operation, see page 104.
Self-Resetting Fuse: If the K2's internal 12 V line is shorted to
ground, fuse F1 will temporarily open, limiting current drain to about
100 mA. The display will remain blank. If this happens, turn power
off until the problem is located and corrected.
Current Limiting: You can specify the maximum transmit current
(see CAL CUR , page 90). You'll see HI CUR on the LCD if the
programmed limit is reached.
50/60-Hz Interference: Do not place the K2 beside, or on top of,
any equipment that uses a large AC power transformer. This could
result in modulation of the K2's low-level signal sources.
Antenna
A well-matched antenna (50 Ω) or an antenna tuner should be used with
the K2. Some high SWR conditions may result in excessive current
drain unless power is reduced. If you have the KAT2 antenna tuner
option installed, the K2's power control and power output display will
be much more accurate under all SWR conditions.
Keying Devices
Any type of hand key, bug, or external keyer can be plugged into the
KEY jack, or you can use the K2's built-in memory keyer. In all cases,
you must use a stereo plug with the keying device (a suitable plug is
provided with the kit). Also see CW Operation (page 99).
Microphone
A standard 8-pin microphone jack is provided on the front panel. A
jumper block on the front panel PCB is used to configure the mic jack
for specific microphones. Refer to the SSB adapter manual.
Headphones
Any type of mono or stereo headphones at nearly any impedance will
work with the K2. However, for best results we recommend high-quality
stereo headphones with full ear covers and 1/8" (3 mm) plug.
External Speaker
The K2 has a built-in, high-sensitivity 4-ohm speaker. You can also
plug in an external 4 or 8-ohm speaker at the "EXT. SPKR" jack.
Option Connectors
A number of mounting holes are provided on the back panel of the K2
for specific option connectors. See Options (page 117). Two new holes
were recently added to the lower rear panel to provide more convenient
low-level transverter I/O. Refer to the K60XV manual.
ELECRAFT®
87
Controls and Display
LCD and Bargraph Meter
The LCD shows the operating frequency and other information
depending on selected display mode. The LED bargraph functions as
an S-meter on receive, and RF out or ALC meter on transmit.
Power-Up Messages: The LCD will display ELECRAFT for two
seconds on power-up. If a problem is detected, the display will show
INFO 100 or a similar message. The number shown corresponds
to a paragraph in the Troubleshooting section.
Mode Indicator: A letter at the right end of the display tells you the
operating mode: C (CW), L (LSB), or U (USB). A fourth mode,
RTTY/data, can also be enabled, and uses the letter r (page 108). If a
small bar appears above the C or r, it means that the CW sideband
is inverted (CW reverse or DATA reverse). The mode indicator will
also flash slowly in two cases: CW TEST mode (see page 100) and
SPEECH (VOX) mode (see page 102).
Annunciators: The LCD provides eight Chevron-shaped
annunciators, or status indicators:
NB
ANT2
PRE
ATTN
A
B
RIT
XIT
noise blanker on (flashes if Low Threshold setting is
selected using L E V E L )
ant. 2 selected (requires ATU)
pre-amp on (approx. +14 dB)
attenuator in (-10 dB)
VFO A selected (flashes in SPLIT mode)
VFO B selected (flashes in SPLIT mode)
RIT turned on (flashes if wide range selected)
XIT turned on (flashes if wide range selected)
Decimal Points: The decimal point to the right of the 1 kHz digit
will flash slowly if the VFO is locked by holding L O C K . See
Advanced Operating Features for other cases where decimal points
flash (scanning, page 103; AGC OFF, page 104).
SPLIT/RIT/XIT LED (Optional)
You can install an LED on the front panel that will turn on whenever
SPLIT, RIT, or XIT is in effect. See the associated application note,
Adding a SPLIT/RIT/XIT LED to the K2.
Potentiometers
AF GAIN
receiver audio level
RF GAIN
receiver RF level11
Turning this control CCW (counter-clockwise) decreases receiver RF
sensitivity. At the same time it increases the bargraph S-meter
indication to remind you that you’re not at full receive sensitivity. The
farther CCW the control is set, the stronger a signal must be before it
results in a meter deflection.
KEYER
keyer speed control
When you turn this control, keyer speed in words per minute (WPM)
will be displayed, e.g. SPD 18 . The speed can be set from about 9 to
50 WPM.
POWER
power output control
When you turn this control, power output will be displayed in watts, e.g.
P 5.0 . The range is 0.1 to 15 W for the basic K2, and 1 to
100 W if you have the KPA100 amplifier installed. See Basic K2
Operation for details on controlling power output (page 97).
OFFSET
RIT/XIT offset
This control provides a default range of +/- 0.6 kHz in 10 Hz steps when
R I T and/or X I T are enabled. You can also select a wider RIT/XIT range
(see RIT menu entry, page 108).
11
As in many transceivers, this control actually varies the I.F. gain.
ELECRAFT®
88
Switch Functions
P R E / AT T
SPOT
turn on preamp or attenuator
CW audio spot signal on/off
Each pushbutton switch as two primary functions, indicated by the
upper and lower labels. T AP a switch to access its upper function;
H O L D a switch for over 1/2 second to access its lower function.
RIT
PF1
turn on RIT (see RIT menu entry, page 108)
activate programmable function 1
A/ B
REV
select A or B VFO
temporary A/B VFO swap (used in SPLIT)
AG C
CW RV
select FAST/SLOW AGC
toggle between CW norm/reverse or USB/LSB
XIT
PF2
turn on XIT (see RIT menu entry, page 108)
activate programmable function 2
Numeric Keypad: In addition to their tap/hold functions, ten of the
switches are labeled with digits 0 through 9. A digit can be entered
using either a TAP or HOLD (e.g. 5 , or 5 ). In some cases the
difference between the two is significant, as indicated below.
Tap and Hold Functions
B AN D +
RCL
select next higher band
recall memory #0 -9 (to start scan, use #0 -9 )
A= B
SPLIT
set both VFO’s to current VFO frequency
toggle between SPLIT and NORMAL transceive
B AN D STORE
select next lower band
store memory #0 -9 (to start scan, use #0 -9 )
XFIL
AF I L
select next crystal filter (FL1-4)
audio filter mode (OFF, AF1-2, CF1-4, SF1-4)*
MENU
EDIT
enter the menu
edit current menu parameter
MSG
REC
play or chain CW msg #0 -8 (to repeat, use #0 -8 )
record CW message #0 -8 (M S G cancels record)
D I S P L AY
R F / AL C
show voltage/current, time*, DSP parameters*
select SSB transmit bargraph mode (RF or ALC)
Two-Switch Combinations (hold both switches)
AN T 1 / 2
TUNE
toggle between ATU antenna jacks 1 and 2*
key transmitter; activates ATU if installed
NB
LEVEL
select noise blanker mode (OFF/NB1/NB2)*
toggle noise blanker threshold (low or high)*
R AT E
LOCK
select VFO tuning rate (see RATES menu entry)
lock/unlock VFO (DP flashes)
B AN D +
+ B AN D -
P R E / AT T
select operating mode (CW/LSB/USB)
CW: oper/test; SSB*: PTT/SPEECH (0.2-1.0)
*These functions require option modules; see page 117.
AGC on/off (mode letter dec. pt. flashes)
XFIL
+ AG C
display crystal filter # and bandwidth
(plus audio filter setting, if applicable*)
AF I L
+ SPLIT
DSP notch filtering on/off*
AF I L
+ REC
DSP noise reduction on/off*
D I S P L AY
MODE
VOX
+ AG C
direct frequency entry (e.g., #7 0 4 0 )
RIT
+ TUNE
+ XFIL
override ATU T U N E power limit*
turn FINE RIT on/off (see page 106)
ELECRAFT®
89
Using the Menu
Primary Menu Functions
There are two menus: primary and secondary. You'll use the primary
menu far more often; see list at right. The secondary menu is
described starting at page 107.
All primary menu functions are listed below (secondary menu functions
are listed on page 107). Supplemental parameters accessed with
D I S P L AY are marked (*); see explanation at left.
To access the menu: Tap M E N U . The display will show the menu
entry last used, with an underline. For example, you might see: LCD
DAY , indicating that the LCD is in "day" mode (i.e., backlight off).
You can scroll to a desired menu entry by turning the VFO knob or
by tapping the B AN D + and B AN D - switches.
ST L
ST P
T-R
RPT
INP
To modify a menu entry's parameter: Hold E D I T to move the
underline to the parameter, rather than the menu entry name. In the
case of LCD , the parameter can be DAY or NITE . Change the
parameter using the VFO knob or B AN D + / B AN D - . When you’re
finished, tap M E N U to return to scrolling. Another tap of M E N U will
return you to normal operation.
D I S P L AY Switch Usage in E D I T Mode: The D I S P L AY switch is
used to access supplemental parameters when editing certain menu
entries (marked "*" at right). You will normally not need to change
these settings. Entries which use D I S P L AY include:
IAB
SSBA
SSBC
LCD
GRPH
Entry
D I S P L AY
ST L
Selects the sidetone source, U6-25 or U8-4. Use
U8-4 (default).
Specifies "8R" behavior, 8r hold or 8r nor .
"Hold" mode (default) holds the 8R line low during
the user-programmed QSK delay.
Selects auto-detect mode, ADET On (default) or
ADET Off .
T-R
INP
Switch Usage in E D I T mode
Shortcut: If the menu entry you want to change is the last one
used, you don't need to tap M E N U ; just hold E D I T . Change the
parameter as usual, then exit by holding E D I T once more.
OPT
ATU
RANT
CAL
PF1 / PF2
EDIT
12
sidetone level (volume): 0-255 (Tone Source*)
sidetone pitch: 0.40 to 0.80 kHz in 10 Hz steps
QSK delay: 0.00 to 2.55 sec. (8R Mode*)
CW message repeat interval: 0 to 255 seconds
CW input selection (Auto-detect on/off*):
PDLn (internal keyer/norm. w/auto-detect12)
PDLr (internal keyer/reversed w/auto-detect)
HAND (hand key or external keying device)
iambic mode: A or B
SSB audio level (mic gain): 1 , 2 , 3 , or BAL
SSB speech compression level: 1-1 through 4-1;
in RTTY/data mode, a separate compression
level is provided, and the menu entry is SSBCr
DAY (backlight off, bargraph bright) or
NITE (backlight on, bargraph normal)
LED bargraph selection: OFF , DOT , BAR
(OPT BATT overrides GRPH BAR , forcing
DOT mode)
receiver optimization: PERFormance or
BATTery (see page 104)
ATU operating mode
RX antenna: OFF or ON , per-band (page 104)
calibration submenu (page 90)
programmable functions (page 104); can be
assigned to any menu function, SCAN , or
FPon (Fast-Play)
If auto-detect is turned on, a computer, hand key, or external keyer can be
connected along with the paddle. See page 99.
ELECRAFT®
90
Calibration Functions
The CAL menu provides the following functions:
FCTR
CUR
TPA
S LO
S HI
PLL
FIL
Frequency counter
Programmable transmit current limit
PA temperature set (see KPA100 manual)
S-meter zero set
S-meter full-scale sensitivity set
VFO linearization
Filter settings (see next page)
After selecting a CAL function, hold E D I T to activate it.
Frequency Counter (CAL FCTR)
CAL FCTR displays the frequency of the signal at P6 on the
Control board during alignment (see page 63).
Transmit Current Limit (CAL CUR)
CAL CUR allows you to set a safe maximum transmit current. The
recommended setting is 3.50 A. A lower setting may be appropriate
if you're using 5 watts or less, or if your power supply has a lower
current rating.
S-meter Calibration (CAL S LO, CAL S HI)
To set the S-meter zero level:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the antenna.
Make sure the RF GAIN control is fully clockwise (max gain).
Select CAL S LO in the menu.
Turn the VFO knob until the left-most bargraph segment is just
barely turned off .
5. Exit CAL mode by tapping M E N U .
To set S-meter sensitivity:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the antenna.
Turn the RF GAIN control fully counter-clockwise (minimum gain).
Select CAL S HI in the menu.
Turn the VFO knob until the right-most bargraph segment is just
barely turned on.
5. Exit CAL mode by tapping M E N U .
Note: The S-meter must be recalibrated anytime the AGC threshold is
changed. The AGC threshold adjustment is described on page 48.
To set calibrate the S-meter S-9 level:
If you have an Elecraft XG1 or XG2 test oscillator or other calibrated
signal source, you may use it to calibrate your S-meter to indicate S-9
when the signal level at the antenna jack is 50 µV as follows:
1. Disconnect the antenna from the K2 and attach your test oscillator
or signal generator.
2. Turn the RF GAIN fully clockwise (maximum gain).
3. Set the test oscillator or signal generator for an output of 50
microvolts (-73 dBm).
4. Tune in the test oscillator or signal generator and adjust the tuning
for maximum indicated signal.
5. Select CAL S HI in the menu.
6. Turn the K2 main tuning knob until the S-meter indicates S-9 on the
bargraph.
7. Tap M E N U to exit CAL mode.
ELECRAFT®
VFO Linearization (CAL PLL)
The CAL PLL function automatically calibrates VFO finetuning13. You can repeat CAL PLL at any time, although this
should not normally be necessary. One reason you might re-run
CAL PLL is after calibrating the frequency counter (see Advanced
Operating Features, page 105). In general, you'll need to re-run CAL
PLL and CAL FIL anytime you change the setting of C22
(Control board), which is used to align the 4 MHz crystal oscillator.
To Linearize the VFO:
Remove the top cover. The bottom cover must be installed.
Allow a 10-minute warm-up period at room temperature.
Connect the internal frequency counter cable to TP1 (VCO).
Exit the menu if you were using it.
Switch to 40 meters and set the VFO anywhere in the 7000-7100
kHz range.
6. Use the menu to activate CAL PLL .
7. When calibration is completed (4-8 minutes), you'll hear a short
alert tone and see End on the LCD. You can then tap any
switch to return to normal operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Filter Settings (CAL FIL)
91
Basic CAL FIL Setup
1. Connect the frequency counter test cable to TP2 (BFO).
2. Set AF GAIN high enough to hear some background noise.
3. Switch to a band between 160 m and 17 m. (The sideband is
inverted on 15 m and above, which may be confusing during filter
setup.)
7. Select CW mode using M O D E . If a bar appears above the C, the K2
is in CW Reverse mode; hold C W R V to select CW Normal mode.
4. Tap X F I L until FL1 is selected.
5. Tap M E N U and scroll to CAL. Hold E D I T to move the underline
to OFF , then scroll until you see CAL FIL . Finally, hold E D I T
again to activate the filter display.
Filter Bandwidth Display
The initial CAL FIL display shows the present filter bandwidth and
the operating mode, e.g. FL1 1.50c . The number 1.50 indicates a
bandwidth of roughly 1.50 kHz.14 This parameter has a range of 0.00 2.49 . Above 2.49 , the parameter changes to OP1 - OP5 , which can
be used to select optional filters. For example, the filter on the SSB
adapter (KSB2) is OP1 .
Note the present bandwidth setting, then try using the VFO knob to
change it. You'll hear the "shape" (or pitch) of the noise change. (Return
to the original bandwidth after experimenting.)
This section explains how to use CAL FIL to select the bandwidth
and BFO settings. An example appears on the next page. The
Elecraft web site provides information on other filter setup methods,
including a method that uses a personal computer sound card. For a
discussion of how the crystal filter and BFO settings are related, see
page 111.
13
What you're actually calibrating is the relationship between the PLL
(phase-locked loop) divider and the crystal reference oscillator. (See Circuit
Details.)
14
The number shown should be used only as a relative indication of filter
bandwidth. Actual bandwidth will probably be narrower.
ELECRAFT®
92
BFO Displays
Other CAL FIL Operations
Tap B AN D - to display the BFO setting for filter FL1, which will be
similar to BF1t110c . The 3-digit number is the BFO control
parameter. This number can be changed using the VFO knob, but
you'll use a different BFO-setting method described below. The letter
t after BF1 is a reminder that the BF1 BFO frequency is always
used on transmit, which is important for SSB operation.
When you're in CAL FIL you can always tap X F I L to change to the
next filter, tap M O D E to change modes, and hold C W R V to switch
from CW normal to CW reverse. Whenever you switch modes or filters,
the K2 will first record your new settings, if they have been changed.
Whenever the BFO control parameter is displayed, you can tap
D I S P L AY to show the actual BFO frequency in kHz. The VFO knob
can then be used to set the BFO directly. This method is used in the
filter-setup example.
Note: After changing the BFO setting, you can tap AG C to remeasure and save the BFO information without switching filters.
This is useful if you want to try various BFO settings for a particular
filter to find the one with the best audio peak.
B AN D + switches to the filter bandwidth display, and B AN D - switches
to the BFO display. Tapping M E N U exits CAL FIL and returns to the
normal display. (On exit from CAL FIL , changes are saved.)
Turning Selected Filters Off
FL2, 3, or 4 can be individually disabled. To turn off a filter, display the
filter bandwidth using CAL FIL , then set the bandwidth number to
OFF . (To get to OFF , go to 0.00 first, then turn the VFO knob a bit
farther counter-clockwise.)
ELECRAFT®
93
CAL FIL Example (setting up all filters):
Table 8-1 shows the recommended filer settings for a CW-only K2.
If you already have the SSB adapter installed, use the SSB settings
from the KSB2 manual.
1. Read the CAL FIL instructions on the previous page if you
haven't already. You'll need to be familiar with CAL FIL
displays and controls before proceeding.
2. Do the Basic CAL FIL Setup from the previous page exactly as
described. You should then see a display similar to FL1
1.50c .
3. Using the VFO knob, set FL1 to the value shown for CW
Normal (1.50). Tap X F I L to save the new value and move to
FL2 . (The CW Reverse bandwidth will also be updated.)
4. Set up FL2 , FL3 , and FL4 in the same manner.
5. Use X F I L to return to FL1 . Tap B AN D - to show BF1 .
6. Tap D I S P L AY to show the actual BFO frequency. Use the VFO
knob to select the value shown in the table. Typically you'll be able
to get to within +/- 20 Hz of the target frequency.
7. Tap X F I L to save the new value and move to BF2 . Repeat steps 6
and 7 to set up BF2 , BF3 , and BF4 .
8. Switch to CW Reverse by holding C W R V . Then repeat steps 6 and
7 for each CW Reverse BFO setting (BF1 -BF4 ).
9. Tap B AN D + to return to the filter bandwidth display. Use the
M O D E switch to select LSB, and return to FL1 using X F I L .
10. Set up each LSB filter bandwidth according to the table. (This also
updates the USB filter bandwidths.)
11. Tap B AN D - and set up each LSB BFO as you did for CW.
12. Tap M O D E to select USB, and set up each USB BFO.
13. If you use settings that differ from the defaults, record them in Table
8-2. Use pencil, since you may change them later.
Table 8-1. Recommended Filter and BFO Settings, CW-only K2
Mode
CW Norm.
FL1
1.50
CW Rev.
LSB
BF1
4913.6
FL2
0.70
4915.0
2.20
USB
4913.7
BF2
4913.2
FL3
0.40
4914.4
2.00
4916.0
4913.7
BF3
4913.2
FL4
0.20
4914.4
1.80
4915.7
4913.5
BF4
4913.1
4914.4
1.60
4915.6
4913.5
4915.3
Table 8-2. Filter and BFO Settings Used (record in pencil)
Mode
CW Norm.
CW Rev.
LSB
USB
FL1
BF1
FL2
BF2
FL3
BF3
FL4
BF4
94
Basic K2 Operation
ELECRAFT®
Audio Filter Control: If you have a KAF2 or KDSP2 option (audio
filter and real-time clock) installed, AF I L will control audio filter
selection. Tap D I S P L AY to activate other features.
Mode Selection
Tap M O D E to cycle through the operating modes, noting the change in
the mode indicator letter (C = CW, L = lower sideband, U = upper
sideband). If RTTY/data mode is enabled, r = RTTY/data will also
appear in the mode list (see page 108).
Sideband Inversion: The K2 inverts the sideband on 15 meters and
above due to the frequency mixing scheme (the upper and lower
sidebands of the signal become reversed). In CW Normal mode, the
pitch of CW signals goes up with frequency on the lower bands; on 15
m and up, the pitch goes down with frequency.
Receiver Configuration
Gain Controls: The RF GAIN control should normally be set fully
clockwise. Adjust the AF GAIN control for comfortable volume.
Sidetone volume is set using ST L (page 100).
Crystal Filter Selection: Each operating mode provides up to four
filter settings, FL1-FL4. Bandwidth and BFO settings can be
customized using CAL FIL (page 91)15. Tapping X F I L cycles
through the filters. FL2, 3, or 4 can also be turned OFF.
Filters and Operating Modes: The CW Normal and CW Reverse
crystal filter selections are tied together. For example, if you switch to
FL2 when in CW Normal mode, CW Reverse also switches to FL2.
The same applies to the LSB and USB modes.
Checking Filter Status: You can check the current filter number and
its bandwidth without changing filters by holding
X F I L + AG C . For example, you might see FL2 0.80c . If a KAF2 or
KDSP2 audio filter is installed and enabled, you'll see audio filter info
after the crystal filter display (e.g. AF1 , CF1 , SF1 ).
15
Bandwidth settings below 0.20 may cause excessive signal attenuation.
Preamp: The preamp provides about 14 dB gain. If you experience
strong in-band interference, you may want to turn the preamp off.
Attenuator: If necessary, 10 dB of attenuation can be switched in by
turning on the attenuator. This is more effective than using the RF
GAIN control in the case of strong-signal overload.
Scanning: See Advanced Operating Features, page 103.
Antenna Selection: If you're using a KAT2 or KAT100 automatic
antenna tuner, the AN T 1 / 2 switch will toggle between the two ATU
antenna jacks. This also instantly recalls the ATU's stored L-C
parameters for each antenna. Refer to the relevant ATU manual.
Noise Blanker Controls: The KNB2 option is required to use these
controls. The noise blanker is always turned OFF on power-up, and
you should leave it off unless needed. When it is turned on, the
receiver will be more susceptible to interference from strong signals.
To turn on the noise blanker, tap the N B switch. You’ll see NB1 ,
NB2 , and OFF in that order. The NB1 and NB2 modes provide
short or wide pulse blanking intervals, respectively. One may be more
effective than the other, depending on the type of noise. In either
mode, the NB annunciator will turn on.
The noise blanker provides two thresholds of noise detection: high and
low. If you hold L E V E L the noise blanker will toggle between these
two modes, with the display showing HI THR or LO THR . High
threshold is the default and should be used in most cases. If you select
low threshold, the noise blanker may be more effective on certain
types of noise, but it will also leave the receiver more vulnerable to
strong in-band signals. When LO THR is selected, the NB
annunciator flashes as a reminder.
ELECRAFT®
95
LCD and Bargraph Configuration
Frequency and Band Selection
Day/Night Selection: For daytime outdoor operation, use the menu to
select LCD DAY (LCD backlight off, and high-brightness LED
bargraph). Indoors or at night, use LCD NITE (backlight on, reduced
bargraph brightness).
The basic K2 covers 80-10 meters, and you can also tune well above
and below the ham bands.16 160 meters can be added with the
K160RX option, and 60 meters with the K60XV. 60-meter users will
probably want to set up channel hopping (see page 103).
Bargraph Modes: You have a choice of OFF , DOT , or BAR for
the LED bargraph. If you select DOT , just one bargraph segment
representing the current meter level will be illuminated. If you select
BAR , all LED segments to the left of the current level will also be
illuminated, resulting in a more visible display. OFF mode turns off
the bargraph completely during receive but uses DOT mode on
transmit (see Advanced Operating Features).
Transverter Bands: The K2 provides up to six programmable
transverter band displays for use with external transverters. Refer to
the TRNx menu entry (page 109).
Display Modes: Tapping D I S P L AY alternates between frequency
display mode and voltage/current display mode. If you have the
KAF2 or KDSP2 option installed (audio filter and real-time-clock), a
time/date display will also be accessible (plus DSP settings in the case
of the KDSP2).
•
•
•
In frequency display mode, the LCD will show the operating
frequency, mode indicator, and any annunciators that are enabled, e.g.
24945.04c . This is the display you’ll use most often.
In voltage/current display mode, the LCD will show supply voltage
(E) in 0.1 V increments and supply current (I) in 0.02 A increments,
e.g. E13.8i1.40 . This is useful for monitoring battery condition. It
can also be used with a simple voltage probe to check DC voltages
inside the K2. Jumper P7, on the Control board, selects either 12 V
monitoring or the voltage probe (P5). If the display shows 0.0 volts,
P7 may be in the probe position.
In time/date/DSP display mode, the LCD will show either time (e.g.
08.05.00 ) or date (e.g. 11-28-02 ) or DSP settings. You can toggle
between time and date by holding B AN D + and B AN D - together.
Refer to the KAF2 or KDSP2 manual for details on setting the time
and date as well as other features.
Transmit Limits: Some countries require transmit to be disabled
outside of specified amateur bands. If you key the transmitter with the
VFO set outside fixed limits, you’ll see End on the LCD.
You can change bands in one of three ways:
tap B AN D + or B AN D hold R C L (memory recall); see below
use Direct Frequency Entry (described later)
Whenever you change bands or recall a frequency memory, a number
of parameters are saved in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). This
update also occurs periodically if you’ve moved the VFO (see Backup
Timer). The parameters that are saved on a per-band basis include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16
A and B VFO frequencies and VFO tuning rate
Current VFO (A or B)
Operating mode (CW, USB, LSB) and CW Normal/reverse
AGC slow/fast
Preamp and attenuator on/off
Noise blanker on/off (requires noise blanker option)
ANT1/2 selection (ATU option)
Receive antenna on/off (160 m/RX ant. option)
The receiver is not intended to be general coverage; narrow band-pass
filters are used at the front end to reject out-of-band signals. If you attempt to
tune too far outside an available band, receiver sensitivity and transmit power
will greatly decrease, and at some point the synthesizer will lose lock.
ELECRAFT®
96
Default Frequency Memories: When you first turn on the K2, each
band memory is preset as follows:
•
•
•
There are three possible results from using direct frequency entry:
•
VFO A is set to the first multiple of 100 kHz above the band edge
(e.g. 7100, 24900).
VFO B is set to the U.S. CW QRP frequency for that band
Other defaults include: CW mode; VFO A; fast AGC; preamp ON
above 40 meters and OFF on 40 m and below; noise blanker OFF
and high threshold; antenna 2 OFF (antenna 1 selected); receive
antenna OFF (normal receive operation)
Memories #1-8 are preset to the same values as the 160-10 meter band
memories, respectively.
Store and Recall: Ten memories are provided, numbered 0 through 9.
Each memory stores the same information that is stored per-band.
To store the current setup in a frequency memory, hold S T O R E until
you see ENT 0-9 , then tap one of the numeric keypad switches. To
recall a stored setup, hold R C L until you see ENT 0-9 , then tap the
number of the memory you wish to recall. In both cases you can
cancel the operation by tapping any non-numeric switch.
Note: If you hold rather than tap a numeric keypad digit when doing
either a store or recall, you will initiate scanning. See page 103.
Direct Frequency Entry: To do direct frequency entry, hold both
B AN D + and B AN D - simultaneously. When you see "-----" on the
LCD, release the two switches, then enter the target frequency using
the numeric keypad. To enter a frequency in the 160 meter band, you
must enter 5 digits, starting with a leading 0, e.g. 0 1 8 3 5 . For other
bands below 10 MHz, you need only enter 4 digits (e.g., 7 0 4 0 ). On
transverter bands, direct frequency entry can only be used to go to a
new frequency within the present band. (see TRNx menu entry, page
109).
•
•
If you enter a frequency within the current band, only the current
VFO will be updated.
If you enter a frequency that is in a different band, a band change
results, and the entire configuration for the target band will be
loaded, except that the current VFO will now be at the frequency
you just entered.
If you enter a frequency that is too far outside any available band,
you’ll be switched to the closest available band, and the frequency
will be set to the one last used on that band. For example, if you
try to switch to 8400 kHz--which is typically outside the range of
the synthesizer--the K2 will switch to 40 meters and setup the
VFOs as they last were on this band.
Tuning Rates: The VFO tuning rate is selected by tapping R AT E .
Default tuning rates include 10 Hz, 50 Hz, and 1 kHz per step,
resulting in 1 kHz, 5 kHz, and 100 kHz per VFO knob turn. Other
tuning rates can be selected; see the RATES menu entry (page 107).
The frequency display changes to remind you of the current tuning
rate. At 10 Hz/step, two decimal places are shown (100 Hz and 10
Hz). When you select 50 Hz/step, the 10 Hz digit is blank. When you
select 1 kHz/step, both decimal places are blank.
VFO Lock: The current VFO frequency can be locked by holding the
L O C K switch until LOC is displayed. The decimal point will then
flash slowly as a reminder. Split Operation: Lock applies only to the
current (receive) VFO. So, while you are holding the R E V switch
(temporary VFO reverse), you can change the frequency of the other
VFO (transmit), overriding lock. This is very useful when operating
SPLIT, since it allows you to check and modify your transmit
frequency without unlocking the receive VFO.
Holding the switch again cancels lock and displays NOR (normal).
ELECRAFT®
97
Power Control
VFO Selection
Turn the POWER control to set the power output directly in watts
(e.g., P 5.0 ). The normal range of the control is 0.1 to 15 watts. If
you have the KPA100 option installed and enabled, the range is 0.1 to
110 watts, with the amplifier module disabled at 10 watts or lower. In
CW mode, you must send a few CW characters or press TUNE to
allow the ALC (automatic level control) to lock-in the new power
level.
To select the A or B VFO, tap A/ B . To set the unused VFO equal in
frequency to the current VFO, tap A= B . The currently-selected VFO
will determine both the transmit and receive frequencies unless you’re
running SPLIT (see below). A and B VFO frequencies are saved in
EEPROM on a per-band basis, and are updated periodically (see
Backup Timer at the end of this section).
Requested vs. Actual Power: The POWER control sets the requested
power, which may exceed the actual power that the transmitter can
achieve. To see actual power output, use T U N E (see below). In tune
mode, the display always shows the actual power output (except when
the display is showing voltage and current, or when the ATU is doing
an autotune). The power displayed will be accurate to within about
10% if the load at the antenna is matched (50 ohms).
Using T U N E : Hold T U N E to key the transmitter. You’ll hear one beep
when you start tune, and another when you terminate tune by tapping
any switch or hitting the keyer paddle.
ATU: If you're using a KAT2 or KAT100 automatic antenna tuner,
pressing T U N E will drop power to either 2 or 20 watts maximum
(depending on whether the KPA100 is in use), and may trigger a retune of the antenna matching network. You can also override power
reduction by holding T U N E + D I S P L AY (see page 98).
Split and Reverse Operation
Split operation means transmitting and receiving on different
frequencies. This is useful for DX work, since many DX stations will
ask you to call them above or below their carrier frequency to avoid
interference. To enter split mode, hold S P L I T until the message
SPLIT appears on the LCD. Holding S P L I T in again will display
NOR (normal). The active VFO annunciator (A or B) will flash
slowly when you’re in SPLIT mode to remind you that this feature is
enabled and that your receive and transmit frequencies are different.
Also, each time you transmit when in SPLIT mode, the transmit
frequency is displayed for a minimum of 1/2 second.
Transverter Bands: Maximum power output on each transverter band
can be set in watts or milliwatts (the latter requires the K60XV
option). See page 109.
When you're using split, you can switch between your transmit and
receive frequencies by tapping A/ B . However, there are times when
you only want to quickly listen on your transmit frequency, not switch
VFOs. In this case you can hold in the R E V switch (reverse), which
temporarily swaps the VFOs. When you release REV, the LCD will
return immediately to the receive frequency. When using split,
experienced operators can simultaneously hold in the REV switch and
adjust the VFO knob--all with one hand--to quickly find a clear spot to
transmit. (R E V overrides VFO lock as described previously.)
Current Limiting: To protect the transmitter and power
supply/battery from excess current drain, you can program a transmit
current limit using CAL CUR (see Calibration Functions).
You can install an LED on the front panel that will turn on whenever
SPLIT, RIT, or XIT is in effect. See the associated application note,
Adding a SPLIT/RIT/XIT LED to the K2.
ELECRAFT®
98
RIT and XIT
Automatic Antenna Tuner (ATU)
You can turn on RIT (receive incremental tuning) by tapping R I T . The
RIT annunciator then turns on. It flashes slowly if you have selected a
wide-range RIT/XIT offset (see RIT menu entry, page 108). The
OFFSET knob controls the receive offset.
Both the low-power internal automatic antenna tuner (model KAT2)
and high-power external antenna tuner (KAT100) can match nearly
any coax-fed or random-length antenna on multiple bands. ATU
functions will be covered briefly here; refer to the specific ATU
manual for details.
The +1 and -1 kHz marks on the offset control apply only if the
RIT/XIT range is set to +/- 1.2 kHz using the RIT menu entry.
Regardless of the range used, the exact offset can be determined by
comparing the VFO frequencies with RIT on and off.17
When X I T is turned on, it works similarly to R I T , except that the
transmit frequency is varied with the OFFSET control. This can be
useful for small-split operation (for example, when a DX station you're
listening to says to call "UP 1" kHz), or to adjust your transmitted
frequency at the request of another station. The transmitted frequency
is not displayed during receive mode, so if you need to determine the
exact setting of the offset control when using X I T , you can briefly turn
on R I T .
It's OK to have both X I T and R I T on at the same time. In this case the
OFFSET control can be thought of as an extension to the main tuning
knob, but covering only a small frequency range.
As with S P L I T , if you have R I T or X I T enabled, the transmit
frequency will be displayed when you transmit, and the receive
frequency will be restored a minimum of 1/2 second later.
FINE RIT: In some cases you may want to control the VFO in
smaller steps to fine-tune signals on receive. This can be done using
the FINE RIT feature, described on page 106.
17
We did not include detent on the offset knob because experience has shown
that knob detent mechanisms degrade over time, making it difficult to adjust
the offset near the zero point. However, you can always return the offset knob
to the zero point by simply matching the RIT-on and RIT-off frequency
displays, or by turning RIT off.
The operating mode of the KAT2 or KAT100 is selected using the
ATU menu entry, and is normally set to AUTO . The menu entry also
allows you to see the L and C selection, step through ATU relays, etc.
Note: If you have both a KAT2 and a KAT100 connected to your K2,
the ATU menu entry will control only the KAT100. The KAT2 will
be placed in through mode (L and C = 0), and will be set to antenna 1.
The ATU is activated whenever you press T U N E . The K2 display will
show SWR or forward/reflected power, depending on the tuner's
mode. If a KPA100 is installed, its T U N E display will be used. Power
is reduced to 2 watts during TUNE mode (20 watts if the KPA100 is
enabled). This power reduction can be overridden by holding T U N E +
D I S P L AY . In this case, no auto-tune will be attempted.
Two antenna jacks are provided on both ATUs, with the matching
network data for both antennas stored on a per-band basis. You can tap
AN T 1 / 2 to switch antennas. Since the relays take only a small
fraction of a second to switch, it becomes practical to quickly try both
antennas anytime the distant station is weak. This is particularly useful
for Field-Day and similar contests, where you might use two end-fed
random wires running in different directions.
Backup Timer
While you're moving the VFO, a 30-second data backup timer is being
continuously re-started. Once you have completely stopped tuning the
VFO for at least 30 seconds, the K2 will then save your current
operating frequency in EEPROM. As long as you stay on a particular
frequency, no further updates will be done.
ELECRAFT®
CW Operation
The K2 provides a number of features for the CW operator:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
fast I.F.-derived AGC with fast/slow/off control
full break-in operation with no relays
accurate control of sidetone volume and sidetone pitch/offset
memory keyer with Iambic modes A and B,
nine programmable message buffers; chaining and auto-repeat
software-selectable paddle selection (normal or reverse)
multiple crystal filter bandwidths and opposite-sideband CW
dedicated S P O T switch for accurate signal pitch matching.
optional analog or digital audio filter
Several advanced CW features are covered in later sections:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
99
Internal Keyer: To use a keyer paddle, use the menu to choose INP
PDLn or INP PDLr (normal or reverse paddle). With PDLn
selected, the "tip" contact on the stereo key jack is DOT and "ring"
(the middle contact) is DASH. PDLr is the reverse.
External Keying Auto-Detect: If you wish to connect a handkey,
external keyer or computer along with a keyer paddle, you can use the
K2’s "auto-detect" feature. Simply connect your external keying
device to the DOT and DASH lines through two diodes as shown in
Figure 8-1, along with the keyer paddle. Be sure you have selected
INP PDLn or INP PDLR in the menu.
TO K2 K EY JACK
G ROU N D
DOT
DASH
KEYLINE
Fast-Play ("one touch") message buffers (page 107)
Adjustable keying weight (page 107)
"smart" CW signal scanning (page 103)
FINE RIT for fine-tuning CW signals (page 106)
HANDKEY,
COMPUTER,
OR EXTERNAL
KEYER
1N5817, 1N4148, etc.
GROUND
Keying Device Selection
A single connector in the back is provided for your keyer paddle, hand
key, keyer, or computer. It is also possible to connect both a paddle
and an external keyer or computer at the same time (see External
Keying Auto-Detect, below).
You must use a stereo (2-circuit) plug, even if you use only a hand key
or external keyer. This should not affect the use of the keying device
with other equipment, since the middle contact on the plug (often
called the "ring" contact) is only used with keyer paddles.
Hand key or External Keying Device: To use a hand key or external
keying device, select INP HAND using the menu. Use the "tip"
contact (DOT) of the key jack with a hand key or external keying
device. You can key the K2 externally at up to 70 WPM.
PADDLE
Figure 8-1
When you connect the keying devices in this way, you can continue to
use the paddle as usual. But if the external keying device is keyed,
both the DOT and DASH lines will be pulled low simultaneously via
the diodes. The K2 firmware interprets this as direct external keying
rather than as DOT or DASH triggers.
Auto Detect can be turned off if desired. Find the INP menu entry,
E D I T the parameter, then tap D I S P L AY to select ADET OFF .
ELECRAFT®
100
Basic CW Setup
The SPOT Switch
Mode Selection: To place the rig in CW mode, tap the M O D E switch
until the mode indicator changes to C.
The S P O T switch can be used to zero-in on received signals or to test
your sidetone pitch quickly, without having to key the transmitter or
enter the menu. It’s important to use S P O T before using CW reverse.
Once a signal has been SPOTted, you’ll only hear a slight change in
pitch when you use the C W R V switch.
Filter Selection: Select a crystal filter using the X F I L switch. FL1 is
usually configured as the widest filter. Similarly, use AF I L to select an
audio filter (requires KAF2 or KDSP2). Note: If you have the KSB2
installed, you can use CAL FIL to configure FL1 as OP1 (SSB
option filter) in CW and CW reverse modes, and leave FL2-4 at the
narrower factory defaults (0.7, 0.4, and 0.2). Details on how to do this
setup can be found in the SSB adapter manual.
CW Frequency Display: In CW mode, the frequency shown on the
LCD takes into account an offset equal to your sidetone pitch. This
allows you to determine a station's actual carrier frequency by
matching their pitch to your sidetone, rather than by zero-beating the
signal. The S P O T switch can be used for this purpose.
Operate vs. Test mode: If you want to try out the keying without
actually transmitting, hold the V O X switch until the display shows
TEST . The mode letter C on the LCD will flash to remind you that
you have disabled transmit. Holding the V O X switch in again returns
to OPERate .
Sidetone Setup: Key the rig in TEST mode and listen to the
sidetone volume and pitch. To change the volume, use the menu’s ST
L entry (sidetone level). The pitch can be changed using the ST P
entry (sidetone pitch). ST L is used often, so you might want to
assign it to P F 1 or P F 2 (see Advanced Operating Features).
Break-in (QSK) delay: The QSK delay is set using the T-R menu
option. A setting of 0.00 is fastest, although you may prefer the
break-in sound with 0.01 selected, especially when using
headphones. 0.05 is about right for casual operation. You can select a
longer delay (up to 2.5 seconds) for slower CW work or to prevent unmuting when sending a repeating beacon message.
When you use S P O T , receiver audio will not be muted. This allows
you to listen to another station and turn the VFO knob until the pitch
of the received signal matches that of the sidetone. Once the two
match, you’ll be very close to the station’s frequency if you call.
(Exception: If you’re using R I T , X I T , or S P L I T , your transmit and
receive frequencies will differ by more than just the normal
transmit/receive offset. Turn off these features when using S P O T .)
Matching audio pitch may be difficult for some operators. Basically,
you’ll need to tune the VFO up and down until the station you’re
hearing seems to "disappear" under the sidetone--that is, until you
can’t hear any difference between the two. When this happens, you’ll
know the two pitches are matched.
Using the Internal Keyer
Two menu entries are provided to set up the keyer:
ƒ
ƒ
IAB allows you to select Iambic mode A or B. (Mode A is
similar to Curtis mode A; mode B is similar to Super CMOS
Keyer III mode B. If you aren't sure which to use, start with mode
A, which has less critical timing requirements.)
INP selects paddle normal (PDLn ), paddle reverse (PDLr ), or
hand key/ext. keyer (HAND )
These settings are stored in EEPROM, so you won’t lose them when
you turn power off.
Use the KEYER control to select the desired CW speed. The display
shows the speed in WPM as soon as you start turning the knob. You
can adjust the keyer speed even while transmitting.
ELECRAFT®
Message Memories
The K2 provides nine CW message memories of 250 bytes each.
Playback features include message repeat and 1-level chaining. CW
messages can only be recorded using a keyer paddle connected
directly to the K2's key jack. Set INP to PDLn or PDLr .
To record a message: Hold R E C , and when prompted tap a numbered
switch (#0 -8 ) to select one of the nine message buffers. The display
will then show REC 250, indicating that 250 bytes of storage are
available in this message buffer. This number will count down toward
0 as long as you are sending. Whenever you stop sending, up to two
standard-length word spaces will be inserted. To stop recording, tap
M S G . If you do this before starting to send, the original message
contents will not be lost.
To play back a message: Tap M S G , then select a message buffer (#0 8 ). Message play can be canceled at any time by hitting M S G again or
by tapping the keyer paddle. To listen to a message without
transmitting, use TEST mode (V O X switch).
Auto-Repeat: Any message memory can be auto-repeated when
played. To auto-repeat, tap M S G as usual, then hold the desired
numbered switch (#0 -8 ). The message will then play back
continuously until you tap M S G again or hit your key or paddle. The
buffer # will flash at the end of each transmission (e.g., B6 ).
Note: You cannot change the frequency with the VFO knob during a
repeating message, but you can use RIT (if enabled) to listen above
and below your receive frequency between calls.
Setting the Auto-Repeat Interval: The length of the pause between
messages during auto-repeat can be programmed using the RPT menu
entry (0-255 sec.). Long delays are useful for beacons.
101
Message Chaining and chain/repeat: While a message is playing,
you can tap #0 -8 to chain a message onto the end of the current one.
The buffer number will be displayed twice: once when you hit the
numbered switch, and again when the chained message starts. To
chain a repeating message onto the current message, HOLD rather
than TAP the numbered switch (i.e., use #0 -8 ). Chaining is useful
during contests. For example, you might set up message 5 as "QSL
73" and message 6 as "CQ TEST DE N6KR." You could then hit
M S G 5 6 at the end of a QSO to sign with the previous contact, then
begin a repeating CQ.
CW Reverse
CW Reverse allows you to listen to CW using the opposite sideband.
Sometimes this can eliminate or reduce interference from a strong
station without reducing the strength of the desired signal. To switch
to the opposite sideband, hold the C W R V (CW reverse) switch. A bar
will appear above the mode letter C on the LCD. (Use S P O T first to
stay on frequency when you switch to CW reverse.)
Sidetone Pitch and Receive Offset
When you change the sidetone pitch using the ST P menu entry,
you’re also changing the CW receive offset. The two always match
within approximately 10 Hz. This ensures that when you listen to other
stations at same pitch as the sidetone, your transmitted signal will be
right on that station’s frequency.
To see how the receive offset tracks the sidetone pitch: Use S P O T to
tune in a station at your current sidetone pitch as described earlier.
Then use ST P to change the pitch. As soon as you exit the menu,
you’ll notice that the station you were listening to has also been shifted
to the new sidetone pitch.
Changing the sidetone pitch does not automatically re-adjust the BFO
frequencies in relation to the crystal filter passband. So if you change
your sidetone pitch, you should use CAL FIL to manually optimize
the BFO settings.
ELECRAFT®
102
SSB Operation
Microphone Configuration
You can receive SSB and data-mode signals with a basic K2, but
transmitting in these modes requires a KSB2 SSB adapter. For
complete details on SSB transmit, refer to the KSB2 manual.
You’ll need to configure the MIC CONFIG header on the Front Panel
board in order to transmit SSB on the K2. Most microphones with
standard 8-pin connectors can be used. All Elecraft microphones
include 8 small jumper blocks to simply installation.
SSB Controls
Operating Mode: Use M O D E to select L (LSB) or U (USB). To
alternate directly between USB and LSB, use C W R V . LSB is usually
used on 40 meters and below, and USB is used on the higher bands.
Crystal Filter Selection: If the SSB adapter is installed, you'll be able
to take advantage of its 7-pole fixed-bandwidth filter, designated OP1
in CAL FIL . This filter can be used in all modes.
DSP Filtering, Notch, and Noise Reduction: Refer to the KDSP2
option manual for details on these features.
SSB Menu Entries: SSBA is used to set the mic audio level (mic
gain), from 1 to 3 . An additional setting, BAL , is used during SSB
adapter alignment. SSBC is used to set the speech compression level,
from 1-1 to 4-1 . Higher settings add "punch" and are especially
useful at low power levels.
PTT/VOX Selection: By default the K2 uses PTT (push-to-talk) via
your mic's PTT switch. To use VOX (voice-operated transmit), hold
the V O X switch until you see SPCH 0.2 , 0.4 , or 1.0 on the LCD.
The number 0.2 - 1.0 is the VOX delay time in seconds. Holding V O X
again restores the setting to PTT .
Power/ALC Metering: If you have the SSB adapter installed, you’ll
be able to switch between RF and ALC bargraph meter modes by
holding R F / AL C . ALC metering is used only in SSB modes, and may
help in setting the mic gain and speech compression level. The ALC
reading starts from the right end of the bargraph rather than the left,
using BAR mode, so you won’t confuse it with the RF display. Use RF
meter mode except when checking ALC level.
On many mics, the Up and Down buttons can be configured to switch
between VFO A and B. You'll hear one beep on switching to VFO A,
and two beeps when switching to VFO B.
RTTY/Data Operation
RTTY/data operation can be accomplished in SSB modes by using
AFSK (audio frequency shift keying) or other modulation modes.
Audio must be fed into the mic jack from a computer or modem, and
the K2’s audio output routed to the computer or modem from either
the headphone or speaker jack. Either LSB or USB can be used; this
will probably be determined by your software. You can use either the
SSB adapter's fixed filter (OP1 ) or the variable-bandwidth crystal
filter for receive purposes. On transmit, OP1 is always used.
Since some RTTY/data mode duty cycles approach 100%, you should
reduce power to about 5W or avoid transmitting at 10W for longer
than 1-2 minutes at a time. (Power levels above 10 W are not
recommended.) You can key the transmitter via either the key jack or
the mic jack, since the DOT line is also the PTT line.
RTTY/Data Mode (mode letter r): This is a special fourth mode of
operation that provides independent crystal filter selections for use
with RTTY, PSK31, etc. For details on configuring and using
RTTY/data mode, see page 108.
FINE RIT: Fine RIT allows you to vary the receive frequency in
increments smaller than 10 Hz. This is especially useful with PSK31
and other narrow-band data modes. See page 106.
ELECRAFT®
103
Advanced Operating Features
To use continuous scanning (from VFO A to VFO B):
A number of specialized operating techniques are described in this
section:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Scanning and channel hopping (see below)
Reducing current drain for portable operation
Using a separate receive antenna
Programming the PF1/PF2 functions
AGC on/off control
VFO frequency calibration techniques
Checking firmware revision numbers
Resetting to factory defaults
Using computer control of the K2
FINE RIT mode
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Also see Secondary Menu Functions (page 107).
Scanning and Channel Hopping
The K2's scanning features let the K2 tune any band segment
continuously, or channel-hop among two or more memories, with or
without the receiver squelched. Scanning when squelched allows the
K2 to ignore stable carriers (key-down signals with no modulation),
stopping only when "interesting" signals are found. Scanning with the
receiver "live" (unsquelched) is especially useful when listening for
weak signals on very quiet bands.
60-Meter Channels: Channel-hopping (manually or using scan) is
intended primarily for use on 60 meters. The present U.S. 60-meter
channel designations are 5330.5, 5346.5, 5366.5, 5371.5, and 5403.5
kHz (USB only). Typically these would be programmed into
memories 1-5. See channel hopping details at right.
Scan Resume: Scan-mode users may wish to use the menu to program
P F 2 (or P F 1 ) as SCAN RESUME. Holding that switch will then restart scan without having to use the R C L / S T O R E method.
ƒ
ƒ
Setup VFOs A and B for the two ends of the band of interest. VFO
A must be set for a frequency lower than VFO B.
Select the operating mode, preamp/attenuator setting, and tuning
rate (R AT E ). Select a narrow filter if the band is noisy.
Store this setting in any memory (using the S T O R E switch), but
instead of tapping the switch for the desired memory, hold the
numbered switch (0 -9 ) until you see SCAN on the display. You
can also initiate scanning when you recall a stored memory. Just
hold R C L , then hold the numbered switch, as with S T O R E . The
memories can store up to 10 scan ranges for instant recall.
To scan with the receiver live (unsquelched), continue to hold the
numbered button until you see AF ON . If the tuning rate is set
for 10 Hz steps, live scanning proceeds at 50 kHz/minute.
During squelched scanning, when a station is found, the receiver
will un-squelch and will stay on that frequency for about 25
seconds or until the signal fades.
You can stop scanning by tapping any switch, key, or PTT.
Use SCAN RESUME (P F 1 or P F 2 , see at left) to restart scan. To
resume "live" scanning, hold until you see AF ON .
To use channel hopping (manually or with scanning):
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Set up and S T O R E two or more memories for the target band
(using VFO A only). Then choose one memory as the "initializer"
to be used when starting channel scan, and R C L it.
Edit the RATES secondary menu parameter (page 107); tap
D I S P L AY to select CH SC (channel scan) or CH SC-TN
(channel scan plus manual hopping); exit the menu; S T O R E this
memory. If manual hopping is enabled, you can now use the VFO
to hop among memories assigned to this band.
Scanning can be initiated via R C L or S T O R E . The scan rate is 0.2
seconds per channel (0.5 seconds per channel for "live" scanning).
Note: VFO B can be set up differently on a per-channel basis for
split operation, if desired, or you can fine-tune channels when
necessary by turning on both R I T and X I T .
ELECRAFT®
104
Reducing Current Drain for Portable Operation
Programmable Function Switches (PF1/PF2)
You can use any of the methods listed below to reduce receive-mode
current drain and thus extend battery life. These techniques will have
only a small effect on transmit current drain, however. Reduce power
output to the lowest effective level if you're transmitting frequently on
a weak battery.
The P F 1 and P F 2 switches (below R I T and X I T , respectively) can be
programmed as direct edit shortcuts to any two menu entries of your
choice, including secondary menu entries (see page 107). Two special
functions can also be assigned to P F 1 or P F 2 : Fast Play (FPon,
page 107) and SCAN RESUME (SCAN, page 103).
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
To program P F 1 or P F 2 : Enter the menu and scroll to PF1 or PF2 ,
then change the parameter to the desired entry. Exit the menu.
ƒ
ƒ
Use headphones or reduce speaker volume.
Turn off the RF preamp.
Set GRPH to DOT mode. There's also an OFF mode, which
completely disables the S-meter and forces DOT mode for
transmit power display.
Set OPT (Optimization) to BATT (battery); this reduces the I.F.
post-mixer amplifier current by about 40 mA and automatically
forces the bargraph to use DOT mode if set for BAR . Receive
performance is minimally affected by this setting unless you have
very strong in-band stations nearby.
Set LCD to DAY to turn off the LCD backlight. This is most
effective if you also set GRPH to OFF , since each bargraph
LED segment that is turned on in DAY mode uses about 18 mA.
(Each segment uses only 6 mA in NITE mode.)
Note: Voltage/current display mode can be used to verify the effect of
each setting.
Using a Separate Receive Antenna
The 160 m/RXANT option (K160RX) provides a separate receive
antenna which can be enabled on a pre-band basis.
To enable the receive antenna: Switch to the desired band. Use the
menu to change the RANT option to ON . The preamp and attenuator
settings with RANT ON can be set independently from of their
normal settings. If you switch between the normal and receive
antennas often, you can program P F 1 or P F 2 as RANT , and it will
switch immediately (one switch press).
To use P F 1 or P F 2 : HOLD one of these switches to activate the
selected menu shortcut, then change the menu parameter (which will
be underlined) using the VFO knob or B AN D + / B AN D - . To return to
normal operation, tap any switch or the keyer paddle. Exceptions: the
FPon , SCAN and RANT functions take effect immediately.
Using P F 1 or P F 2 as secondary menu shortcuts: Enter the menu
and scroll to PF1 or PF2 . To switch to the secondary menu entries,
tap D I S P L AY . (Tapping D I S P L AY again will return to the primary
menu entries.) Select the desired parameter, then exit the menu.
AGC On/Off Control
Some operators prefer to turn AGC off and use manual RF GAIN
control under certain weak-signal conditions.
To turn off AGC: Hold both the P R E / AT T and AG C switches
simultaneously. Release the switches when you see OFF flashed on
the LCD. To remind you that AGC is off, the decimal point to the left
of the mode indicator will flash slowly. Received signals will no
longer affect the S-meter level. Turning the RF GAIN control counterclockwise will increase the S-meter reading.
ELECRAFT®
105
The VFO is only as accurate as the 4.000 MHz oscillator on the
Control board, which is calibrated using C22. C22 can be fine-tuned
using one of the following methods:
least one count, then return it to the original setting. Tap M E N U to
exit without switching filters. This will force the K2 to re-measure
the BFO frequency.
10. Repeat step 2. If the VFO dial is still off, repeat steps 3 - 9.
11. Modify all BFO settings using CAL FIL (as in step 9).
Using an External Counter or Ham-Band Receiver:
Firmware Revision Numbers
These methods are described in detail in Alignment, Part II (4 MHz
Oscillator Calibration). After setting C22 using either technique, you
must re-run CAL PLL (with the counter probe on TP1). You'll also
need to use CAL FIL (with the probe on TP2) to re-adjust each BFO
setting, which will allow the K2 to store new, more accurate BFO
frequency measurements.
You can check the K2's main microcontroller and I/O controller
firmware revisions by holding in any switch on power-up. Two
numbers will then be displayed briefly. For example, you might see
2.04P 1.09 . The first number is the main microcontroller's
firmware revision and letter suffix. The second number is the I/O
controller's firmware revision.
Using a Calibrated Signal Source:
The KAT2 or KAT100 firmware revision is one of the parameters in
the ATU submenu, e.g. F1.00 . The KPA100 firmware revision can
be found in the PA submenu. The KSB2 firmware revision can be
obtained by first setting the SSBA menu entry to BAL , then holding
the V O X switch. (Return the SSBA menu entry to its normal setting
after checking the firmware revision.)
Frequency Calibration Techniques
You can calibrate C22 using a signal generator, ham transmitter, or
strong AM carrier such as WWV at 10 MHz. The K2’s receiver is
used to zero-beat this signal to determine how far off the VFO is, then
C22 is adjusted to compensate. Here's the procedure:
1. Select LSB or USB mode on the K2.
2. Zero-beat the calibrated signal source on the K2, then note the
VFO dial error. For example, 10 MHz WWV might zero-beat at
10000.20 kHz. The error is then 10000.20 - 10000.00 = +0.20. Do
not move the VFO from this position.
3. Connect the K2's internal counter to the VCO test point (TP1).
4. Select and activate CAL FCTR using the menu.
5. Note the displayed VCO frequency. (In this example, 14913.88
kHz. Your VCO frequency will be somewhat different.)
6. Subtract the VFO dial error from the VCO to obtain a target VCO
frequency. (In our example, 14913.88 - 0.20 = 14913.68.)
7. Adjust C22 until the VCO is at the target frequency.
8. Re-run CAL PLL (see Calibration Functions). Tap M E N U to
exit CAL PLL when "End" appears.
9. Move the counter probe to TP2 (BFO). Using CAL FIL , change
the BFO control parameter for the filter presently being used by at
The firmware revisions for other options may also be accessible; refer
to the individual option manuals.
ELECRAFT®
106
Resetting the Configuration to Factory Defaults
Fine RIT Mode
You should reset configuration data to defaults only if the K2’s
EEPROM is accidentally corrupted. (This is extremely unlikely to
happen.) The most likely symptom that this has occurred would be an
unexpected frequency setting showing up on a particular band, or
strange characters appearing on the LCD. Before resetting the
configuration to defaults, try simply re-entering the correct frequency
and storing it in the affected memory.
The K2's FINE RIT feature provides receiver tuning in steps smaller
than 10 Hz. The primary use of FINE RIT is for data modes such as
PSK31, which can benefit from a reduction in T/R frequency shift
between FL1 and one other filter18. FINE RIT mode is only effective
for this if FL1 is configured as OP1 (SSB crystal filter). FINE RIT
can also be used to accurately zero-beat AM stations, or to fine-tune
CW signals when a narrow filter is used.
If you find it necessary to reset to defaults, record the following data
first:
Limitations: Entering FINE RIT mode turns off SPLIT, RIT, and
XIT, which cannot be used in combination with FINE RIT. If you
move the VFO while using FINE RIT, you may need to readjust the
OFFSET control due to small differences in linearity over the VFO's
tuning range.
•
•
•
•
filter and BFO settings for all modes/filters (using CAL FIL)
other CAL parameters, e.g. S-meter HI/LO, current limiting
primary menu parameters
secondary menu parameters, if applicable
To reset to defaults: Turn the K2 off, then hold down the 4 , 5 , and 6
switches, and turn power back on. The EEPROM will be rewritten
with factory defaults. You can then re-enter the data saved above using
the menu functions. Re-doing CAL PLL is also recommended.
Computer Control of the K2
If you have the RS232 interface adapter installed (model KIO2), or the
100-watt stage (KPA100), you’ll be able to use a computer to control
the K2. Both the KIO2 and KPA100 provide true RS232 levels (at
4800 baud), with no need for a level converter.
The K2's computer-control capabilities are compatible with nearly all
contesting, logging, and remote-control software, including Elecraft's
k2remote and k2voice programs. Control over the internet is also
possible. You can write your own programs as well (see the KIO2
Programmer's Reference, on our web site).
Refer to the KIO2 or KPA100 manuals for additional details.
To use FINE RIT: Select a narrow data-mode filter (FL2 - FL4 )
using X F I L . Next, hold R I T and X F I L together; the display will show
FINE ON , and the RIT and XIT annunciators will alternate on/off
slowly. Only FL1 and the selected narrow filter will now be
available; the other two will be temporarily disabled. You can then use
the OFFSET knob to fine-adjust the signal pitch of the narrow filter
without affecting the pitch of FL1. Turning the OFFSET knob will
display the filter selection and the FINE RIT offset, from -15 to +15
units (e.g., FL3 -12 ). One unit is about 1 to 3 Hz (finer on lower
bands). When you transmit (always through OP1 ), you will be closer
to the received station's carrier frequency, and on receive, switching
filters will result in few if any lost characters.
To cancel FINE RIT: Hold R I T + X F I L , or change modes or bands.
FINE OFF will be displayed.
18
In data modes, the TX and RX frequency will always be exactly the same if
you use only FL1 (if set to OP1 ), and avoid using splits. However, you may
wish to switch to a narrow filter when QRM is present. The shift in frequency
between OP1 (which is used on transmit) and the narrow filter can cause the
signal to "walk" up or down the band if "net" is turned on in the demodulation
software. Most software provides a means of turning off "net" (i.e. locking
the TX frequency). FINE RIT provides a supplemental tool.
ELECRAFT®
107
Secondary Menu Functions
Squelch (SLCH)
To access the secondary menu, tap M E N U , then tap D I S P L AY . You'll
see SEC . All secondary menu functions are listed and described here.
Additional parameters accessed with D I S P L AY during E D I T mode are
marked (*); see below.
Squelch defaults to OFF . You can set the threshold to 1 -10 ,
corresponding to the S-meter's bargraph segments. Transmitting holds
squelch open for about 10 seconds.
SLCH
RATES
DOT
FPLY
PORT
SPLT
Po28
RTTY
RTC
RIT
ACC
D19
PA
TRN1-3/4-6
Squelch level
R AT E switch selections
Dot/space ratio (keying weight)
Fast Play switch selections
RS232 interface on/off (Port Test*)
S P L I T , R I T , X I T configuration
10 / 12 meter SSB power output limit
RTTY (data) mode control
Real-time clock control
RIT/XIT offset range (up to +/- 4.8 kHz)
Accessory output control
Leave at default (n ) unless K60XV option installed
K2/100 final stage mode selection (Fan Mode*)
Transverter band setup (Parameter*)
D I S P L AY Switch Usage in E D I T Mode: The D I S P L AY switch is
used to access supplemental parameters when editing certain menu
entries (marked "*" above). You will normally not need to change
these settings. Entries which use D I S P L AY include:
Menu Entry
D I S P L AY
Usage
PORT
PA
TRN1-6
D19
Sends an RS232 test message if PORT is ON
Selects PA fan mode (see KPA100 manual)
Selects transverter parameters (see page 109)
Selects PA low-pass filter to use on 60 meters.
PA60=80 (80 m filter) or PA60= 40 (40/30 m
filter). See instructions in K60XV manual.
Tuning Rate Selection (RATES)
The RATES menu entry lets you specify how the R AT E switch
works. The four options are:
3N
3R
3C
2
3 rates, normal order (10/50/1000 Hz steps)
3 rates, reverse order (1000/50/10 Hz steps)
3 rates, CW optimized (10/20/1000 Hz steps)
2 rates (10/50 Hz steps only)
Keying Weight (DOT)
DOT sets the internal keyer's dot/space ratio (keying weight). The
range is 0.90 -1.40 , roughly 90% to 140% of "normal" weighting.
The default is 1.10 .
Fast-Play CW Messages (FPLY)
CW messages are normally played by tapping M S G , then 0 -8 . During
contests, some operators prefer to have one-touch access, which we
refer to as Fast-Play.
To use Fast-Play: First, program P F 1 or P F 2 as FPon for use in
turning Fast-Play mode on/off. Next, use the FPLY menu entry to
select a switch group. For example, if you have FPLY 2-5 selected,
you can use 2 , 3 , 4 , and 5 for Fast-Play. (The T AP functions of these
switches won't be available in CW mode; H O L D functions are
unaffected.) When Fast-Play is on, the letter F will replace the mode
letter c once every few seconds as a reminder.
A tap of any Fast-Play switch will play its message buffer one time.
To auto-repeat, you must still use M S G as described on page 101.
ELECRAFT®
108
RS232 Interface Setup (PORT)
Real-Time Clock (RTC)
Use the PORT menu entry to turn on 4800-baud RS232
communication. When PORT is ON , tapping D I S P L AY sends an
"FA" command (VFO A frequency) for test purposes. Refer to the
KIO2 or KPA100 manual for details.
If RTC is set to ON and a KAF2 or KDSP2 option is installed, the
D I S P L AY switch can access a time or date display. (The KDSP2 also
provides DSP features which are accessible via the D I S P L AY switch.)
Refer to the KAF2 or KDSP2 manual.
SPLIT/RIT/XIT Configuration (SPLT)
RIT/XIT Range Selection (RIT)
Normally, the K2's S P L I T , R I T , and X I T selections stay the same as
you switch from one band to the next. To have these selections stored
on a per-band basis and retained when power is off, set SPLT to
PER (per-band).
RIT is used to select one of four RIT/XIT OFFSET ranges. If the
selected range is +/- 1.2 kHz or higher, the RIT/XIT annunciators
flash whenever R I T or X I T are turned on.
Accessory Outputs (ACC)
10 and 12 m Power Limit in SSB/RTTY Modes (Po28)
The highest distortion-free single-sideband power output level may be
less than 15 watts, especially on 10 and 12 m. We recommend leaving
Po28 at 10.0 watts. (Does not apply to CW mode.)
This menu entry can be used in conjunction with the Elecraft KRC2
programmable band decoder to control equipment external to the K2.
Refer to the KRC2 manual for details.
Extended VFO Range (D19)
RTTY/Data Mode (RTTY)
RTTY/Data mode (mode letter lower-case r ), if enabled, provides four
independent crystal filter settings for use with data modes. To enable
RTTY/Data mode, set the RTTY menu parameter to ON . The M O D E
list will then include C , L , U and r . r -NORMAL mode uses lower
sideband, and r -REVERSE (with a "bar" over the r ) uses upper
sideband. To select r -REVERSE, hold the C W R V switch. (FINE RIT
is also very useful in data modes; see page 106).
Filter configuration (CAL FIL): r mode defaults to the same
settings as LSB and USB. Use CAL FIL (on 17 meters or below) to
modify the r -mode filter bandwidths or BFO settings as needed.
Speech compression (SSBCr): The SSBC menu entry will change
to SSBCr when r mode is selected. A setting of 1-1 (1:1, or speech
compression off) is recommended for RTTY/data.
Leave D19 set to the default, n (no), unless you have installed
varactor diodes D19 and D20 in conjunction with the K60XV option
(60 meters plus low-level transverter I/O). At that time the parameter
should be set to Y .
Note: Do not install D19 and D20 until the K60XV option is
installed.
K2/100 Mode Selection (PA)
If you have the KPA100 option installed, the PA menu entry shows
the 100-watt stage's operating mode. While editing the PA parameter,
tapping D I S P L AY selects the fan mode (nor , LoHi , Hi ). For more
details, refer to the KPA100 manual (Appendix G of the K2 owner's
manual, which is supplied with the KPA100 kit).
ELECRAFT®
109
Transverter Bands (TRN1-TRN6)
Six user-definable bands are provided for use with transverters. Once
enabled individually using the TRN1-3 / 4-6 menu entries, these
bands will appear in the band rotation following 10 meters. You can
use Elecraft XV-Series transverters and most other transverter types
with the K2.
Transverter switching: Up to six Elecraft XV-Series transverters can
be controlled automatically using the K60XV option (60 meter adapter
and low-level transverter I/O). Refer to the K60XV manual for further
details.
Transverter configuration: These bands are set up using the TRN13/4-6 menu entries. First, tap M E N U , select the secondary menu
(SEC ) using D I S P L AY , and scroll to TRN1 , 2 , or 3 . (Tapping
AN T 1 / 2 switches to TRN4-6 .) Next, hold E D I T to highlight the first
parameter. You can then tap D I S P L AY to rotate through the
parameters. Finally, change parameters as needed using the VFO knob
or B AN D + / B AN D - . Changes take effect when you exit EDIT mode.
ON / OFF
RF
IF
OFS
OUT
ADR
19
Set to ON to enable this transverter band
Transverter operating frequency (0-999 MHz;
GHz digits not used)
K2 band to use as the I.F. (7, 14, 21, or 28
MHz)19
Display offset (+/- 9.99 kHz); calibrate based
on transverter oscillator offset, if any
Power output limit, L0.01 -L1.27 mW
(requires K60XV) or H00.0 -H12.7 watts;
can reduce setting using POWER control
Elecraft XV-Series transverter selection
address (see K60XV manual)
When you first select a different I.F., the displayed A and B VFOs may end
up outside the intended RF band. To correct this, tune the VFO up or down to
the desired frequency, or use direct frequency entry.
Using transverter bands: When you switch to a transverter band
(using B AN D + / B AN D - ), the message TRN1, 2 or 3 is flashed.
The LCD shows up to 999 MHz by shifting one place to the right.
Note: If you select 10 Hz tuning steps with R AT E , the hundreds of
MHz digit will briefly disappear so you can see the 10-Hz digit.
Direct Frequency Entry on transverter bands is in-band only. For
bands over 99 MHz, the first digit is made part of the prompt. For
example, on a transverter band in the 430 MHz range, you'd see
- - - - 4 when you hold B AN D + and B AN D - together to initiate
Direct Frequency Entry. To get to 432.100 MHz, you'd then enter
32100 .
Controlling transverter relays: The 8R HOLD feature can prevent
excessive transverter relay switching in CW mode. To change the 8R
HOLD setting, locate the T-R menu entry (primary menu), edit the
parameter, and tap D I S P L AY to select 8r hold . (This is the default
setting and is recommended for use in all operating modes, whether or
not transverters are used.)
Using the K60XV option with transverters: In addition to 60 meter
coverage, the K60XV option provides a low-level, split RX/TX path
transverter interface. This interface can be selected on a pertransverter-band basis by adjusting the OUT field for an output value
in milliwatts (L0.01 -L1.27 ). In T U N E mode, power in mW is
displayed, plus LP for "low power" (e.g. P1.00 LP ).
The K60XV also provides a buffered relay keying output, and logic
outputs for transverter switching. Additional control capabilities are
available with the Elecraft KRC2 programmable band decoder. (Refer
to the K60XV and KRC2 manuals.)
ATU considerations: Use caution when connecting both a
transverter and an HF antenna to the KAT2: you could accidentally
transmit at high power into the transverter. For example, suppose
that you have TRN1 set up for an I.F. of 14 MHz and a 1.0-watt
power limit. If you switch the K2 to 14 MHz--where there is no power
limit--you must remember not to transmit into the KAT2 antenna jack
that is connected to the transverter.
ELECRAFT®
110
9. Circuit Details
Before reading this section you should become familiar with the Schematics
(Appendix B) and Block Diagram (Appendix C).
Signal Flow
System Overview
The block diagram (Appendix C) shows overall signal flow in the K2.
Transmit and receive paths are shown for sideband operation. For CW
transmit, the BFO signal is routed directly to the transmit mixer.
The K2’s modular design allows flexibility in configuration and provides for
future expansion. At the core of this modular architecture are the three main
circuit boards:
Front Panel
Control Board
RF Board
User interface, including display and controls
MCU, DC control, AGC, and AF amplifier
All RF circuitry, relays, and I/O controller (IOC)
This functional division allows related circuits to be grouped together, but
also provides a high degree of isolation between the analog and digital
sections of the transceiver. The RF board serves as a "mother board," while
the front panel and Control boards plug into the RF board at its front edge.
The front panel and Control boards are mounted back-to-back, with their
ground-plane layers forming a partial enclosure that helps minimize radiated
digital noise.
The K2’s custom enclosure is also modular. It is fabricated in six pieces, with
a unique 2-D fastener used at each joint and also for PCB support. This
design provides a rugged but light-weight enclosure that is ideal for field or
home use.
The top cover, which includes the upper portion of the rear panel, can support
a variety of built-in options such as an internal battery, automatic antenna
tuner, and RS-232 interface. The top cover can be replaced with a 100 W
power amplifier module, converting the K2 into a medium-power station.
The K2 receiver is a single-conversion superhet, utilizing double-tuned bandpass filters on each band and down-conversion to a low I.F (4.915 MHz).
This approach results in excellent CW and SSB performance. The low I.F. is
compatible with narrow, variable-bandwidth CW crystal filtering and allows
the use of fast I.F.-derived AGC. An I.F. of 4.915 MHz also results in nearly
no birdies across all nine bands. The BFO is microcontroller controlled to
allow upper and lower sideband reception on any band, as well as CW on
either sideband. AM signals can be received in SSB modes thanks to the
stable VFO, although AM transmit is not currently supported.
Individual (per-band) band-pass filters offer improved intermodulation
performance when compared to up-conversion designs that use only a single
low-pass filter to remove image products ahead of the receiver. Upconversion also requires the use of a second I.F. to obtain good CW
performance, increasing cost and producing additional spurious signals. (An
alternative is up-conversion followed directly by a product detector and audio
filter. While this results in minimal parts count, it was not considered since
the resulting CW and AGC performance would have been poor.)
On transmit signal flow is reversed, so the BFO is combined with the VCO to
generate an output at the operating frequency, which is filtered by the bandpass and low-pass filters. A highly stable power amplifier chain up to 10-15
watts on all bands, and the output level can be set in 0.2-W increments (0.1–
W increments below 10 W). The transmit strip is conservatively rated to
provide excellent reliability and immunity to high SWR. High-isolation PINdiode T-R switching is used to provide silent, no-relays QSK. (Please refer to
the RF Board section for further details.)
ELECRAFT®
111
Coverage of 160-10 meters is provided by a single wide-range VCO (voltagecontrolled oscillator). High-side and low-side injection are both used,
depending on the band, so the overall VCO range is limited to about 6 to 24
MHz. Only one VCO is needed, with a single high-Q inductor and three small
DPDT relays configured to select one or more fixed capacitors. The VCO is
driven by a PLL synthesizer. 5 kHz frequency steps are used at the PLL,
while 10 Hz increments are provided by a 12-bit DAC driving an 11 MHz
VCXO (PLL reference oscillator).
Crystal Filters and BFO Settings
4913.0
BFO
4913.5
4914.0
FL1
Signal 1
4914.5
FL2
4913.5
The signals you tune in on the K2's receiver are "shaped" by the crystal filter,
which passes only a narrow range of frequencies. The pitch of these signals is
determined by the BFO (beat-frequency oscillator). Figure 9-1 shows an
example of how these signals are related. The BFO frequency is below the
filter passband; this is the case for the CW "normal" and LSB modes on the
K2. Two different filters are shown: FL2 (narrow, for CW), and FL1 (wide,
for LSB voice). Frequencies in the 4915 kHz range are shown because this is
the K2’s intermediate frequency, or I.F.
FL2
Figure 9-2 shows the BFO positioned above the same two filters, which will
allow the K2 to receive USB and CW Reverse (opposite-sideband CW).
Since the upper boundary of the filter moves as the filter is widened, the BFO
frequency must move the same amount. BFO2 is used with FL2, and BFO1 is
used with FL1.
4915.0
Signal 2
Figure 9-1 CW Normal or LSB.
In this example, filter FL2’s bandwidth is set for about 1 kHz, and it is
centered at 4914.0 kHz. The BFO is set for 4913.0 kHz.
Signal 1 (4914.0 kHz) will be passed by FL2, and you’ll hear it at an audio
pitch of 1 kHz (4914-4913). Signal 2 (4915.0 kHz) will be rejected by FL2,
but passed by FL1, and heard at 2 kHz. The same BFO setting can be used for
both filters, because the lower boundary of the K2’s variable-bandwidth
crystal filter stays fixed as it is made wider. Only the upper edge moves
significantly.
4914.0
FL1
4914.5
4915.0
BFO2
4915.5
BFO1
Figure 9-2. CW Reverse or USB.
The CAL FIL menu function provides the means to control how wide the
filters are, and where the BFOs are located in relation to them. (The numeric
parameters you select using CAL FIL are translated into voltages that
control the filter and BFO by means of voltage-variable-capacitance diodes,
or varactors.)
Microcontroller (MCU)
The K2’s microcontroller is an integral part of all transceiver operations.
Firmware is used to advantage to provide many functions traditionally
provided by discrete control logic. For example, the VCXO (PLL reference
oscillator) is linearized on each band by a firmware auto-calibration routine,
with resulting tables stored in EEPROM. Another example is firmware ALC,
which is used on CW to maintain the user-specified power level across all
bands. The SSB adapter, when installed, provides its own optimized hardware
ALC.
Extensive use of firmware also results in many useful operating features not
usually found on transceivers in this price class. These features include builtin test equipment (frequency counter and digital voltmeter), auto-calibration,
dual VFOs, memories, split operation, RIT/XIT, and a versatile keyer.
Provisions have also been made in firmware to support a wide range of option
modules. (See full feature list elsewhere on the web site.)
ELECRAFT®
112
Latching Relays
Front Panel Board
Latching relays are used for all filter, VCO, and option switching, so there is
no relay current drawn during normal operation. This, combined with careful
power control at all stages in the transceiver, results in receive-mode current
drain as low as 100 mA. The latching relays are all controlled by a single
device, the I/O Controller (see below), which also handles other
miscellaneous I/O tasks on the RF board. DPDT relays are used for all filter
switching, reducing the number of relays needed by a factor of two. 50-ohm
switching is used for all filters, and this combined with careful layout and
guard-banding of the relays results in excellent filter input/output isolation.
The front panel PC board plugs into the RF board via a 20-pin single-row
connector, P1. The Front Panel is made up of a number of user-interface
elements as detailed below.
Co-Processors and the AuxBus
In keeping with the K2’s modular system architecture, much of the I/O
switching is handled by co-processors. There is only one co-processor in the
basic K2, the I/O Controller (IOC). Some option modules, such as the SSB
adapter, have their own co-processors. This distributed processing technique
allows future modifications to be made to option boards without changing the
transceiver itself. It also reduces cost of the basic K2, since fewer mainprocessor control lines are needed.
The IOC, as well as all co-processors on option modules, go into "sleep"
mode with their own 4 MHz clocks suspended during normal operation. For
this reason, there is virtually no digital noise on the RF board to cause
receiver EMI.
When the operator performs an operation that changes relay states, the main
microcontroller (on the Control board) wakes up the co-processors and sends
one of them a configuration command. These commands are transmitted on a
one-wire network called the AuxBus. The AuxBus network line sits at a logic
high during normal operation, and is only activated when needed. The
receiver is muted during commands, so the operator never hears any digital
noise due to AuxBus activity.
Most AuxBus transmissions occur due to operator requests such as a band
change. However, the AuxBus may also be used during transmit to relay
numeric data such as SWR or ALC from a coprocessor to the main
microcontroller. Waking up the coprocessors during transmit has no effect on
the transmitted signal.
The LCD, DS1, is an 8-digit 7-segment transflective type with three
backplanes (triplexed). Its driver, U1, receives display commands via an I2C
interface.20 The LCD backlight LEDs, D2 and D3, are used to provide enough
brightness to handle low-lighting situations ("NITE" mode in the menu),
while drawing only a small amount of current (<30 mA). However, they can
be turned off when ambient lighting is sufficient ("DAY" mode) because the
LCD is transflective, i.e. it can either reflect or transmit light. The LCD
displays the operating frequency and status messages, and also has 8
annunciators which indicate the settings of various controls.
A 10-segment LED bargraph, DS2, is used to display received and
transmitted signal strength and ALC level. Using the menu, the operator can
select OFF, DOT or BAR mode for the bargraph, with OFF or DOT modes
typically used to save current during battery operation. U3 and U4 are 8output MOSFET driver arrays which control the bargraph, among other
things. Q1 and Q2 form a brightness control. When the NIGHT(low) control
line is pulled to ground by U3, the bargraph supply voltage drops to 2.7 V,
resulting in about 6 mA/LED. The LCD backlight is also turned ON in this
case. When NIGHT(low) is left high for daytime use, each LED draws about
18 mA, and the LCD backlight is OFF.
A high-quality optical shaft encoder, Z1, provides 100 counts per turn. VFO
tuning steps of 10, 50, or 1000 Hz per increment are used, resulting in 1, 5
and 100 kHz per turn, respectively. The encoder is also used to modify
parameters in the menu. The encoder can be turned off by U3 to save current
under certain operating conditions.
S1-S16 are pushbutton switches. Switch data is read by U2, an 8-bit parallelto-serial shift register. Each switch has at least two functions: the top label
corresponds to a TAP (short press) and the bottom label corresponds to a
HOLD (long press, ~0.5s). Switch combinations are also supported, although
only two are used (BAND+ and BAND- together enter direct frequency entry
mode, and AGC with PRE/ATTN turns AGC on or off).
20
I2C stands for Inter-IC Communication, an industry standard serial
interface protocol used by Philips and other IC manufacturers.
ELECRAFT®
Potentiometers R1, R2 and R5 (Keyer Speed, Power Out, and RIT/XIT
Offset) are multiplexed onto a single A-to-D input of the MCU, the "VPOTS"
line, so their position can be read. Firmware hysteresis is used for these
controls to prevent noise from interfering with the readings, with more
hysteresis on transmit. The AF GAIN control is not read by the MCU; its
leads go directly to the input of the AF amp on the Control Board. (The entire
path from product detector to AF amp is balanced to prevent common-mode
noise pickup—see Control Board for details.) As is true of most modern
transceivers, the RF GAIN control actually controls the receiver’s IF gain; it
varies the DC control voltage on pin 5 of U12 (RF Board).
The circuitry associated with J2, the mic jack, is only present if the SSB
option is installed. P1 is a configuration header that the user can wire as
needed to support any of several industry-standard microphones with an 8-pin
circular connector. Q3 and its associated resistors are used to multiplex the
UP, DOWN, and FUNCTION lines from P1 onto the VPOTS line to allow
the mic to send commands to the MCU. The PTT line from the MIC activates
the DOT-PTT line to initiate transmit. The MICAF line, mic audio output, is
amplified and processed by circuitry on the SSB adapter (see Option
Modules).
Control Board
The Control board plugs into the RF board via connectors P1, P2, and P3
(along the bottom edge of the schematic). P1 handles the AGC signals while
P2 provide miscellaneous I/O. Redundant connections are provided for
ground, supply voltages, low-impedance signals (such as audio output) and a
few other critical signals.
U6 is a PIC18C452 microcontroller (MCU), with 8 k of EPROM, 300+ bytes
RAM, serial I/O, parallel I/O, and A-to-D inputs. It is self-contained with the
exception of its 4 MHz crystal oscillator, X2. Even when running at 4 MHz,
the PIC processor is very efficient: it only draws a few milliamps at 5 V.
Also, since the program and data memories are located on-chip, there is very
little noise radiation from the MCU.
113
To get the most out of the available I/O on the MCU, much of the
communication from MCU to the rest of the K2 is done via serial interfaces:
RS232: Used for communicating with a computer via P4
(Aux I/O)
2
I C:
Display driver data
SPI:
The serial peripheral interface is used to access various
peripherals, including the PLL and DACs.
AuxBus:
1-wire data network for co-processor control
Shift registers: serial-to-parallel shift registers are used to access
MOSFET LED drivers on the front panel; a parallel-toserial shift register on the front panel is used for reading
pushbuttons.
In addition to the microcontroller the Control board provides a number of
specialized hardware interfaces. Circuitry is described moving from left to
right, top to bottom on the schematic.
U10A and associated circuitry are used to accurately control power output as
well as provide CW waveform shaping. The keying waveform is sigmoidal
(S-shaped) on both rising and falling edges in order to provide totally clickfree keying.
Q9 and Q10 form a two-stage amplifier, supplying a square wave signal to
the MCU when the frequency counter is enabled and a probe is connected to
P6. The counter amp is turned off at all times except when one of the
calibration routines is being used.
The four outputs from the quad DAC (U8) provide: audio tones (via U10B),
BFO frequency control (U10D), and crystal filter bandwidth control (U10C).
Audio tone pitch, amplitude, and wave shape are controlled in firmware to
yield clean sidetone from 400-800 Hz, as well as general-purpose tones. The
bandwidth control line doubles as the transmitter driver bias control on
transmit.
Note: The sidetone signal is actually generated at pin 4 of U8, which is a
logic output, while sidetone volume is set by a D-to-A output of the DAC
using Q5 as a variable-drain-voltage saturated switch. The DAC cannot be
used to generate sidetone directly because the 60 dB channel-to-channel
isolation is not adequate to prevent slight modulation of the VBFO and
BVIAS lines on transmit.
ELECRAFT®
114
U7 provides 2 kbytes of non-volatile configuration data storage. This memory
is used for VCO lookup tables, CW messages, frequency memories and other
variables that must be permanently saved. The EEPROM can be written
millions of times without loss of data. During normal operation on a single
frequency (such as when in a QSO), the EEPROM is not accessed at all.
However, whenever the VFO is moved, a 30-second timer is triggered. Once
the VFO has stopped moving for 30 seconds, the EEPROM is updated with
the latest VFO frequency. In this way, the K2 always saves the most recent
"important" frequency. (The EEPROM update also takes place any time you
change bands or operating modes, etc., so you don’t have to wait for 30
seconds to record an important configuration change.) An alternative strategy
used by many rigs is to use battery-backed-up RAM, continuously recording
the operating frequency. We preferred to eliminate the backup battery, which
often has a high failure rate and must be periodically replaced.
The Control board provides a built-in voltmeter and ammeter. By jumpering
P7 appropriately, the operator can monitor either the internal 12 V supply
voltage or the voltage from a test probe plugged into P5. U3B buffers the DC
signal from the probe, and also is used in conjunction with Q11 to provide
supply current monitoring. The current sense resistor, which has a value of 50
milliohms, is located on the RF board (R115).
U4 is a low-dropout 8 V regulator, which is stable with a K2 input DC
voltage as low as 8.2 V. Since all signal-generating and signal monitoring
stages in the K2 run from this 8 V supply, the transceiver will function
normally even when running from very depleted batteries; most transceivers
use a higher regulated voltage for these stages and in some cases will not
operate reliably even at a battery voltage of 11 V. (Transmit power will be
scaled back and a warning message displayed if the battery voltage drops
below a critical value or if current drain is excessive.) U5 provides 5 V for
logic circuits on the front panel and Control board, but this signal does not
appear on the RF board, so noise is minimized.
8 V Switching: Q1 and Q2 provide stable +8 V sources on transmit (8T) and
receive (8R). (Q23 on the RF board is used to guarantee that 8R goes to 0 V
on receive to maintain proper reverse voltage on T-R switch diodes.)
An optional audio filter module (KAF2 or KDSP2) can be mounted on the
bottom of the Control board. These options provide analog or digital filtering
functions. The audio filter module has its own co-processor.
Q6 and Q7 disconnect the AF amplifier from the product detector on transmit,
which is necessary for clean QSK. U9 is an LM380 audio amp IC, supplying
approximately 1W of audio drive to a 4-ohm speaker in the cover of the K2.
Sidetone is injected post-volume control so that sidetone and receiver audio
volume can be controlled independently.
The AGC circuit is the only RF stage located on the Control board.
Mixer/oscillator U1 generates a low-level signal at about 5.068 MHz, then
mixes it with the 4.915 MHz I.F. signal from the RF board to produce a new
auxiliary I.F. of about 150 kHz. This auxiliary I.F. signal is then amplified by
U2B and detected by D1 to create a positive-going AGC voltage, which is
then routed back to the RF board to control the I.F. amp (U12). While it is
possible to generate the same AGC voltage by simply amplifying and
detecting the 4.915 MHz signal itself, this technique often necessitates
shielding of the AGC RF amplifier stages to prevent radiation of the I.F. or
BFO signals back into the receiver I.F. strip. We obtain all of the gain at 150
kHz instead, so the 4.915 MHz signal is not re-radiated. 150 kHz is high
enough to obtain fast AGC response—two orders of magnitude faster than is
possible when audio-derived AGC is employed.
RF Board
The RF board is the largest of the three K2 boards, and serves as a structural
element that the chassis and the other boards attach to. This board contains all
of the RF circuits (amplifiers, oscillators, filters, etc.). Refer to the RF board
schematic (Appendix B).
Sheet 1: Synthesizer
The K2 uses a PLL (phase-locked-loop) synthesizer IC (U4) in conjunction
with a wide-range, band-switched VCO (Q18). The synthesizer provides
approximately +7 dBm output from 6 to 24 MHz, which is then injected at the
transmit and receive mixers (sheet 2). Phase noise performance of the
synthesizer is very good despite its low parts count and absence of shielding.
The reference oscillator for the PLL IC is temperature-compensated by the
components on the thermistor PC board. This circuit works by applying a
variable offset voltage to varactor diodes D16 and D17 to compensate for
drift As temperature increases, the uncompensated oscillator would drift
down in frequency. The thermistor causes a slight increase in the bias voltage
to these diodes as the temperature increases. The relative values of RA-RD
and the thermistor, Rt, (see below) set the rate of gain change with
temperature.
ELECRAFT®
U4 provides coarse tuning (5 kHz steps). Fine steps are achieved using a 12bit DAC (U5) to tune a voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (Q19), which is
the PLL reference oscillator. The reference oscillator range needed on each
band varies in proportion to the VCO output frequency. To cover exactly 5
kHz in 10 Hz steps on each band, an automatic calibration routine is provided
in firmware. The DAC is swept from its highest output voltage down, and the
DAC word needed to select each 100 Hz step is recorded in EEPROM on a
per-band basis. 10 Hz steps are then interpolated based on the 100 Hz table
data. Crystal X1 in the PLL reference oscillator can be tuned by varactor
diodes D16 and D17 over a range of about 10 kHz, which is required in order
to tune the full 5 kHz on the lowest band (160 m), but still provides better
than 10 Hz resolution on the highest bands.
The synthesizer design is unique in that three inexpensive DPDT latching
relays are used to select one of eight VCO ranges, thus requiring only a single
high-Q VCO inductor (T5). The relays are optimally interconnected to allow
for maximum coverage of the nine HF bands, plus a large out-of-band tuning
range. Computer simulation was used to find a relay topology that allowed for
the use of standard 5% fixed capacitors along with the smallest practical
varactor diode capacitance. As a result, the VCO exhibits low noise on all
bands and has a low max/min tuning ratio on each band.
115
Sheet 2: Receiver and Low-Level Transmitter Circuits
The receiver is a single-conversion superhet with an I.F. (intermediate
frequency) of 4.915 MHz. The preamp and attenuator are switched in using
latching relays so that no current is required except when switching them on
or off. The mixer is a diode ring type, providing good dynamic range (Z6),
and is followed by a strong post-mixer amplifier, Q22. The current drain in
Q22 can be reduced by the operator using a menu option that turns off Q12.
A 5-pole variable-bandwidth crystal filter is used on CW (X7-X11). This
filter is optimized for use at low bandwidths (~200 to 500 Hz), but can be set
both narrower and wider as needed with only a small additional loss. The
shape factor and passband ripple content are optimized at around 300 Hz. (On
SSB, a separate fixed filter is switched in; this filter is located on the SSB
adapter.)
AGC is derived from the output of the I.F. amp by using an auxiliary, lowfrequency I.F. of about 150 kHz (see Control Board). The AGC signal is then
applied to pin 5 of the I.F. amp (U12).
In order to provide some allowance for unit-to-unit variance in T5, a much
higher value slug-tuned inductor (L30) is placed across T5’s high-impedance
winding. L30 has only a small effect on the Q of T5, but provides about a
20% tuning range. The combined parallel inductance is very small (only 1
µH), resulting in a very large C/L ratio on the lowest bands.
A second crystal filter (X6/X5) follows the I.F. amp to reduce wideband
noise. This filter is also tunable. Varactor diode D39’s capacitance is
increased during CW use, but on SSB is reduced, making the response quite
broad. Q25 turns on only if the optional SSB adapter is installed and its fixedbandwidth "OP1" filter is selected. This pulls capacitor C179 to ground,
which interacts with L34 to shift the second crystal filter's center frequency so
that it matches that of the OP1 filter.
U3 buffers the VCO signal. Q16/Q17 provide stable ALC to keep the VCO
voltage fairly constant over the entire frequency range despite variations in
the VCO transistor, Q18.
The product detector is a Gilbert-cell mixer/oscillator (U11). Due to the loss
in the second crystal filter, the input voltage to U11 never exceeds the range
that the device can handle.
Also shown on sheet 1 is the DC input circuitry (bottom right-hand corner),
which is designed to protect the K2 and its power supply from almost any
conceivable mis-connection or short. D10 protects the K2 from reverse
polarity at the DC input, while dropping only 0.1-0.2 volt. F1 is a thermal
self-resetting fuse that goes into a high-resistance state if a short or other
high-current situation exists anywhere inside the K2. F1 resets quickly once
the source of the short is removed. D12 provides reverse-polarity protection
for the internal battery, if applicable.
U11 also provides the BFO signal, which is tunable over about a 4 to 5 kHz
range by varactor diodes D37 and D38. X3 and X4 have carefully-controlled
characteristics and are well matched. As in the PLL VCXO (Q19, sheet 1),
the two crystals de-Q each other to increase the tuning range of the BFO.
On transmit, the BFO buffer/attenuator (Q24) is turned on. Q24’s drain
voltage is controlled by the microcontroller, providing BFO amplitude
control. Precision PIN diode D36 provides additional reduction in low-level
signal leakage when Q24 is turned off. U10 mixes the VCO with the BFO on
transmit, and video amplifier U9 increases the signal level while providing a
low-impedance output to drive the bandpass filters (sheet 3).
ELECRAFT®
116
Sheet 3: Filters and I/O Controller
The band-pass and low-pass filters are switched with latching relays to
minimize loss and current drain. Only five band-pass filters and seven DPDT
relays are required to cover nine bands (160-10 m). This is accomplished by
switching fixed capacitors in or out using two additional relays. For example,
on 160 meters, relay K3 places C13 and C14 across the 80 m band-pass filter.
But relay K3 also used to switch the 20 meter band-pass filter to 30 meters by
shorting C21 and C23 to ground. K6 places C32/C34 across the 15 m
inductors to select 17 meters, or C44/C46 across the 10 m inductors to select
12 meters. The band-pass response is a compromise on 80 and 160 meters but
on all other bands is similar to what would be obtained with separate filters.
The low-pass filters also serve double-duty in most cases; five filters cover 8
bands (80-10 m). The 30/20 m filter uses three pi-sections to provide good
roll-off of the 20 MHz second harmonic when operating on 30 meters. Most
of the filters are elliptic, aiding attenuation of specific harmonics. But elliptic
filters are not needed on 40 and 80 meters since these each cover only one
band. The 2nd harmonic attenuation provided by the push-pull power
amplifier is quite good even pre-filter (sheet 4).
DPDT relays are used for the low-pass and band-pass filters rather than the
traditional SPDT approach which requires twice as many relays. This is
possible by virtue of careful guard-banding techniques on both top and
bottom of the PC board in the filter areas. Isolation between input and output
of each filter is excellent across the entire frequency range.
The T-R switch (D1-D5) provides very high isolation using low-cost silicon
diodes with a PIN characteristic (1N4007). Q2 is a very high-voltage
MOSFET that provides a ground path on receive for D3 and D4, but on
transmit this transistor can easily handle the high voltages present on the
power amplifier collectors.
U1, a 28-pin PIC microcontroller (16F872 or 16F872A), drives all of the
latching relays and a few other I/O lines. U1 is referred to it as the I/O
controller (IOC) because it handles nearly all I/O functions for the main
microcontroller. It also has the job of determining whether the 160
m/RXANT option board is installed by sensing the presence or absence of the
two relays on the module. Finally, the IOC contains all of the per-band and
per-memory initialization data in ROM, which is sent to the main
microcontroller as needed to initialize EEPROM data tables. A number of
different regional band plans and other customized parameters can be
accommodated in U1’s data tables.
The latching relays are wired with a single common drive line so that when
one relay needs to be turned on or off, the others are pulled in the opposite
direction. This arrangement requires no drivers of any kind. U1’s I/O lines are
protected from relay transients by its own internal shottky clamping diodes to
6 V and ground. Measured transients are well within the current rating of the
clamping diodes. Transients are reduced in amplitude by the series resistance
of the other non-switched relays and U1’s own MOSFET driver impedance.
The relays are rated at 5 V nominal (250-ohm coils). The actual impressed
voltage is in the 5 V to 6 V range, depending on ambient temperature,
reflecting the best and worst-case sink/source current limits of the 16F872.
The IOC communicates with the main microcontroller over the 1-wire
AuxBus. U1’s 4 MHz clock is turned off and the device is in sleep mode at all
times, except when it is processing an AuxBus message, so there is no digital
noise on receive. The main microcontroller runs from a 5 V supply, while the
IOC runs from 6 V. The AuxBus is designed to accommodate devices
running at both voltage levels.
Sheet 4: Transmitter Amplifier
Q5 and Q6 are class-A pre-driver and driver stages, respectively. Q5’s bias is
provided directly by the 8 V transmit line (8T), while Q6’s bias is switched
on by the 8T line but is gated by Q10. This is necessary because the DAC
output that supplies the bias voltage for the driver is used as the crystal filter
bandwidth control voltage on receive. The bias to Q6 can be varied under
firmware control to optimize efficiency for CW vs. SSB and at different
output levels. This is useful in maintaining high overall efficiency during
battery operation.
Q7 and Q8 form a conservatively-rated push-pull power amplifier that can
easily supply 10 watts or higher output on all bands. Q11 and Q13 are used as
a bias voltage regulator. The bias regulator is effectively out of the circuit on
CW because of the large size of resistor R62, resulting in approximately a
class-B bias level. On SSB, resistor R63 is grounded by the I/O controller,
causing much more current flow through Q13 and stabilizing the bias for
class AB operation.
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 Packing Box Parts List
Designators
PCB3
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Bag, Wire Pack
Bag, Front Panel Parts
Bag, RF Parts
Bag, Control Parts
Bag, Misc. Parts
Value
RF
left side
right side
front panel
rear panel / heatsink
top cover
bottom cover
K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, K7, K8,
K9, K10, K11, K12, K13, K14,
K15, K16, K17
Latching Relay, 5V
Manual
K2 Manual
Description
Part Number QTY
Printed Circuit Board, RF
Chassis piece, painted
Chassis piece, painted
Chassis piece, painted/silk-screened
Chassis piece, painted/silk-screened
Chassis piece, painted/silk-screened
Chassis piece, painted
Wire, coax, heatshrink tubing
Front Panel board parts
RF board parts
Control board parts
Hardware and Misc. parts
E100086
E100076L
E100076R
E100072SS
E100075SS
E100073SS
E100074
E850005
E850003
E850001A & B
E850002
E850004
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
In plastic tube; 10-pin DIP
E640001
E740001
17
1
SP1
Speaker
4-ohm, 3-watt, high-sensitivity speaker
E980007
1
KN1
Knob, 1.6" diam
Main Tuning Knob, weighted, 6mm shaft E980013
1
KN2, KN3, KN4, KN5, KN6
Docs
Knob, 0.5" diam
Toroid Order Form
Small Control Knobs, 6mm shaft
5
1
Page 1
E980016
E740038
Box and Serial#
Appendix A
Items inside back of manual E850011
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Misc
Acrylic display bezel
Description
Part Number QTY
Covers LCD and LED bargraph (FRONT
PANEL)
E100080
1
HW
Thermal insulator,
TO220
Adhesive Thermal Insulators for Q6,
Q7, Q8 (RF BOARD)
S/N
Serial Number Label
Misc
Green filter w/
adhesive
Page 2
1.15” x 0.95” with adhesive strips.
(FRONT PANEL)
E700002
3
E980010
1
E980011
1
Box and Serial#
Appendix A
Appendix A
K2 Control Board Parts List (p/n E850002)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
C2, C20, C34, C43
C12, C24, C36
.001
.0027
Monolithic Cap, "102"
Monolithic Cap, "272"
E530001
E530055
4
3
C3,C5,C9-C11,C17,C18, C23,
C31,C35,C37,C39-C41,C46
C27
C6, C14, C16, C19, C30
C25, C26, C42
C4
.01
.022
.047
0.1
0.47uF
E530009
E530056
E530025
E530011
E530057
15
1
5
3
1
C21
33
Monolithic Cap, "103"
Monolithic Cap, "223"
Monolithic Cap, "473"
Monolithic Cap, "104"
Monolithic Cap,
p, "474"
E530064
1
C8
39
NPO disc cap, "39" or "390"
E530036
1
C7
330
NPO disc cap, "331"
E530043
1
C38
680
NPO disc cap, "681"
E530053
1
C1, C33
2.2µF
Electrolytic cap
E530023
2
C13, C32, C45
22µF
Electrolytic cap
E530012
3
C15
100µF
Electrolytic cap
E530061
1
C28, C29
220µF
Electrolytic cap
E530062
2
C22
var, 8-50pF
Ceramic trim cap (Green paint on screw
with RED Marking on side; or no
markings at all.)
E540000
1
D1, D2
1N4148
Silicon switching diode, small glass
body
E560002
2
L1
82 mH inductor, 5%
Shielded, cylindrical, dark gray
E690015
1
9)
Page 1
(
p g
Control
Appendix A
Appendix A
K2 Control Board Parts List (p/n E850002)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
P1
6P male, RA
Right Angle 6 pin connector
E620041
1
P2
18x2 male, RA
Right Angle 18 x 2 pin connector
E620043
1
P3
10x2 male, RA
Right Angle 10 x 2 pin connector
E620042
1
P4
5x2 pin male
5 x 2 pin connector; for Aux I/O
E620040
1
P5, P6
2 pin male
Includes locking ramp;
for Volt Meter, Freq. Counter Inputs
E620024
2
P7
Q1, Q2
Q3, Q4, Q5
Q6, Q7
Q8, Q11, Q12
Q9,Q10
R8
R7
R10
R9
R18, R19
R20
R16
R6
R12
R4
R3
R5
R11
R22
R21
R2, R17
3p male
2N3906
2N7000
J310
PN2222A
MPS5179
100, 1%
1.78k, 1%
196K, 1%
806K, 1%
0 ohm
2.7 ohm, 5%
10, 5%
100, 5%
820, 5%
5.6K, 5%
10K, 5%
33K, 5%
47K, 5%
82K, 5%
270K, 5%
3.3M, 5%
For voltmeter source selection
TO-92
TO-92
TO-92
TO-92
TO-92
(BLUE)
(BLUE)
(BLUE)
(BLUE)
Use short wire jumpers on back (see
text)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
(TAN)
E620007
E580000
E580002
E580012
E580001
E580014
E500059T
E500026T
E500051T
E500052T
n/a
E500055T
E500054T
E500010T
E500001T
E500007T
E500015T
E500057T
E500067T
E500119T
E500101T
E500021T
1
2
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Page 2
Control
Appendix A
Appendix A
K2 Control Board Parts List (p/n E850002)
PICTURE
Designators
R1
Value
Description
RP2, RP4
U1
U2
U3
U9
U7
50K Trimmer
470,5R ISO "10A3471G"
3.9K,5R ISO
"770103392"
5.1K,5R ISO
"770103512"
33K,4R ISO "8A3333G"
47K,5R ISO "10A3473G"
82K,4R ISO
"77083823"
SA602AN
LM833N
LMC6482AIN
LM380N-8
25LC320
AGC Threshold
SIP resistor pack, 10 pins; ALT:
"770103471"
SIP resistor pack, 10 pins; ALT:
"10A3392G"
Sip resistor pack, 10 pins; ALT:
"10A3512G"
SIP resistor pack, 8 pins; ALT:
"77083333"
SIP resistor pack, 10 pins; ALT:
770103473"
SIP resistor pack, 8 pins; ALT:
"08A3823G"
AGC Mixer (SA612 Alt.), 8 pins
Dual Op Amp, 8 pins
Dual Op Amp, 8 pins
Audio Amplifier, 8 pins
EEPROM; 4K x 8, 8 pins
U10
LMC660
U8
Part Number QTY
E520011
1
E510015
1
E510014
1
E510013
1
E510016
1
E510007
1
E510011
E600006
E600012
E600011
E600019
E600009
2
1
1
1
1
1
Quad Op Amp, 14 pins
E600025
1
MAX534
Quad, 8-bit DAC, 16 pins
E600031
1
U4
LM2930T-8
8 Volt regulator, TO-220 Pkg.
E600018
1
U5
78M05
Alt: 7805, 7805T,
L7805
5 Volt regulator, TO-220 Pkg.
E600024
1
U6
PIC18C452
MCU, Programmed, 40 pins
E610002
1
RP5
RP1
RP6
RP7
RP3
Page 3
Control
Appendix A
Appendix A
K2 Control Board Parts List (p/n E850002)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
X1
5.068Mhz
Crystal, HC49 (may be standard or lowprofile)
E660009
1
X2
MISC
4.000MHz
40 pin socket
Crystal, HC49 (standard)
socket for MCU
E660006
E620017
1
1
MISC
PCB1
2-pin shorting jumper For use with P7 (voltage source select) E620055
Control
Printed Circuit Board, Control
E100084
1
Page 4
1
Control
Appendix A
K2 Front Panel Board Parts List (p/n E850003)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
C1, C3
.047
Monolithic, "473"
E530025
2
C2, C9
D2, D3
.01
LCD Backlight Assy
Monolithic, "103"
LED Backlights mounted in Diffuser
E530009
E570004
2
1
D4, D5, D6
1N5817
(BLACK)
E560008
3
DS1
VIM-838-DP
4-character, 7-Segment multiplexed
LCD
E570003
1
DS2
10LED array
Hi-eff. Green LED bargraph
E570005
1
HW
Felt Washer, 1" OD
Mounts under main tuning knob
E700033
1
HW
J1
Spacer Set (made
from PCB stock)
socket
(4) 0.75" spacers for Backlight LEDs; (1)
spacing tool for push button switches
E100079
FP to RF Board
E620025
1
1
J2
8p male
Mic Jack; Male; PCB Mount, Round
1
Page 1
E620034
Front Panel
Appendix A
K2 Front Panel Board Parts List (p/n E850003)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Misc
Keycap, rect, black
Misc
Keycap, rect, gray
Description
Black keycaps for Push Buttons (
BLACK)
Part Number QTY
E980000
13
E980027
2
Misc
Band up/down keycap; S1, S3 (GRAY)
Rate / Lock Keycap; S7, (BLACK,
Keycap, square, black Square)
E980009
1
Q1, Q2
PN2222A
Plastic Body, TO-92
E580001
2
R1, R2, R4, R5
5K potentiometer,
linear taper
"B5K"; Keyer Speed, Power Out, I.F.
Gain, RIT/XIT Offset
E520004
4
R3
R10
R12
R9
R11
R6, R7
R15
R16
R14
5K potentiometer,
audio taper
33
120
220
470
4.7K
10K
15K
100K
"A5K"; Audio Gain Control
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
1/4W, 5% resistor. (TAN Color)
E520003
E500036T
E500022T
E500002T
E500003T
E500047T
E500015T
E500060T
E500006T
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Rubber bumper;
.040 or .047 thick,
x .312" square
120Ω SIP,
"770101121"
100K SIP, "10A1104G"
For top corners of FP PCB
SIP 10pin resistor pack; ALT:
"10A1121G"
SIP 10pin resistor pack; ALT:
"770101104"
E980017
2
E510012
1
E510010
1
RB1, RB2
RP2
RP1
Page 2
Front Panel
Appendix A
K2 Front Panel Board Parts List (p/n E850003)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8,
S9, S10, S11, S12, S13, S14,
S15, S16
switch, push button
Misc
40 pin socket
Front Panel push button switches
for LCD driver chip, U1
E640005
E620017
16
1
U1
PCF8566PN
LCD Driver chip, 40 pin
E600027
1
U2
74HC165N
8-bit parallel-in, serial-out shift register,
16 pin
E600028
1
U3, U4
TPIC6B595N
Alt: 6B595KA
8-bit serial-in, parallel-out shift register,
20 pin
E600032
2
Z1
PCB2
Shaft Encoder
front panel
100-count incremental encoder
w/straight pins; VFO main tuning control E640003
Printed Circuit Board, Front Panel
E100083
1
1
Page 3
Front Panel
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
Designators
C37, C38, C39, C49, C57, C64,
C77, C79, C80, C81, C82, C89,
C91, C100, C140, C167, C195,
C204, C207, C208, C216,
C223
C52, C53, C54, C55, C58, C61, .001
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
Monolithic Cap, "102"
E530001
28
C62, C63, C87, C95, C107,
C108, C109, C110, C113,
C114, C115, C118, C119,
C120, C121, C129, C135,
C141, C142, C143, C145,
C146 C155, C158, C159,
C160, C161, C163, C164,
C165, C168, C172, C175,
.01
C92, C177
.022
C90, C94, C117, C138, C156,
C157, C162, C166, C170,
C196, C224
.047
Monolithic Cap, "103"
Monolithic, "223"
E530009
E530056
43
2
Monolithic, "473"
E530025
11
C59, C65, C67, C86, C124,
C130, C131, C133, C139,
C151, C176, C178, C185
C45
0.1
1 pF
Monolithic, "104"
NPO, "1", black top
E530011
E530068
13
1
C33
2.2 pf
pF)3 3
p (alt:
(a t 2
3o
NPO, "2R2" or "2"
E530047
1
C22
pF)
NPO, "2R7", "3", "3.3", or "3R3"
E530065
1
C6
C68, C211
C28, C29, C219
C74
C198
C43, C47, C116, C213
4.7pf (alternate: 5 pF)
10
12
20
27
33
NPO, "4.7"
NPO, "10" or "100" (see page 9)
NPO, "12" or "120"
NPO, "20" or "200"
NPO, "27" or "271"
NPO, "33" or "330"
E530048
E530006
E530058
E530059
E530060
E530064
1
2
3
1
1
4
Page 1
RF
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
C221
C20, C24, C73, C203
C31, C35, C122, C228
C88, C153, C104, C214
C71, C174, C210
C5, C7, C144, C154, C179,
C197, C222
C84, C85, C202
39
47
56
68
82
NPO, "39" or "390"
NPO, "47" or "470"
NPO, "56" or "560"
NPO, "68" or "680"
NPO, "82" or "820"
E530036
E530014
E530015
E530007
E530038
1
4
4
4
3
100
120
NPO, "101"
NPO, "121"
E530016
E530041
7
3
C200, C212, C218
150
NPO, "151"; markings on rear side may
include: "041 RKF"
E530049
3
C182
C173, C199, C201, C220,
C229
C72
C19,C25,C42,C48,C150,C227
C169, C225
C30, C36
C12, C15
C127, C128, C226
180
NPO, "181"
E530008
1
220
270
330
390
470
560
680
NPO, "221"
NPO, "271"
NPO, "331"
NPO, "391"
NPO, "471"
NPO, "561"
NPO, "681"
E530042
E530050
E530043
E530051
E530004
E530052
E530053
5
1
6
2
2
2
3
C4, C8
C190, C192
C11, C16, C191
C96
C105, C106, C111
C93
C125
C126
C60, C137
C103
820
1200
1800
1uF
2.2uF
10uF
22uF
47uF
100uF
220uF
NPO, "821" (Do not confuse with 150pf)
NPO, "122"
NPO, "182"
Monolithic Cap (Thick) "105"
Electrolytic
Electrolytic
Electrolytic
Electrolytic
Electrolytic
Electrolytic
E530066
E530005
E530035
E530037
E530023
E530045
E530012
E530063
E530061
E530062
2
2
3
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
Page 2
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
var,5-30pF
ceramic trimmer (see below to tell from
50 pF)
E540001
4
C21, C23
D9
D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7
var,8-50pF
1N5711
1N4007
ceramic trimmer (red mark or bagged
separately)
orange glass body
large black body, silver band
E540000
E560004
E560001
2
1
7
D8, D11, D13, D18, D40, D41
1N4148
clear or blue glass body
E560002
6
D36
SMT1B
1
D10
95SQ015
SB530 (alternate:
1N5821)
pin diode supplied on pc daughterboard E120014
ultra-low-drop shottky diode, 9A, very
large black body
E560009
1
shottky diode, 5A, very large black body E560003
1
TO-92, 2 leads
D19-D20 supplied with K60XV option
E560006
6
D17, D21, D22, D29, D30, D31,
D32, D33, D34, D37, D38
1SV149
TO-92, 2 leads
E560005
11
F1
RGE300
Resettable fuse; (YELLOW) "G300"
Looks like a larger monolithic cap.
E980018
1
J8
10x2,female socket
10 x 2 female socket
E620038
1
J7
18x2,female socket
18 x 2 female socket
E620039
1
C44, C46, C32, C34
D12
D16, D23, D24, D25, D26, D39
(also D19-D20--see
description)
MV209
Page 3
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
J3
2.1mm jack
2.1 mm DC barrel connector
E620026
1
J6
6p,female socket
6 x 1 female socket
E620037
1
J4
BNC
Antenna connector
E620020
1
J1
SJ-373
Keyer Jack, Threaded, Stereo, Vertical
orientation
E620027
1
J2
Stereo+iso sw.
Headphone jack. Horizontal Orientation E620028
1
L10, L11, L12, L13
Variable Ind, 1µh
TOKO, 15/17m BPF, 10/12m BPF. Red
Line and small adjustment slot
E690002
4
TOKO, VCO, IF, 40m BPF, 80/160m
BPF, 20/30m BPF. No red line and large
adjustment slot
E690001
8
Variable Ind, 4.7µH
L30, L1, L2, L3, L4, L8, L9, L34 "T1005Z"
Page 4
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
L31
L33
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
12µH , Shielded
solenoidal, shielded (BLACK)
E690019
1
Pre-wound toroidal
inductor, 41 µH, 5%,
T44-7 core
FRAGILE LEADS--HANDLE WITH
CARE.
SEE TEXT FOR MOUNTING
INSTRUCTIONS USING 1/8W
RESISTOR
E690018
1
L21, L22, L23, L24
T44-10
L16, L17, L18, L19, L20, L25,
L26
T44-2
Toroid (BLACK); 12/10m LPF(.32µH,
.26µH); 17/15mLPF(.45µH)
E680009
Toroid (RED); 80m LPF(2.50µH);
20/30m LPF(.58µH, .44µH, .37µH); 40M
LPF (1.25µH, 0.89µH)
E680012
L5
RFC6
33µH solenoidal
0.68µH solenoidal
green body; orange-orange-black
green body; blue-gray-silver
E690007
E690008
1
1
RFC1, RFC2, RFC12, RFC13, 100µH solenoidal
green body; brown-black-brown
E690004
4
RFC4, RFC5, RFC8, RFC9
green body; brown-black-black
E690009
4
very small tan body; brown-black-brown
green body; brown-green-black
green body; brown-black-red
0.37" dia. ferrite core (GRAY)
RFC3, 47µH, 16T; RFC11, 100µH, 20T
RFC14, 18µH, 10T; RFC16, 47µH, 16T
0.37" dia. ferrite core (GRAY)
T1, 9:3T; T2, 12:8T;
T6, 10T bifilar; T7, 5:20T
Toroidal transformer on 0.50" dia. ferrite
core (GRAY). 5T bifilar.
Toroidal transformer on 0.50" dia. ironpowder core (YELLOW), 1.3µH, 16:4T
E690013
E690006
E690010
1
1
1
E680003
8
E680008
1
E680010
1
RFC15
RFC7
RFC10
10µH solenoidal
100µH solenoidal,
subminiature
15µH solenoidal
1mH solenoidal
RFC3, RFC11, RFC14, RFC16
T1, T2, T6, T7
FT37-43
T3
FT50-43
T5
T50-6
Page 5
4
7
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
T4
Binocular core
2:3:1:1, Balun Core; Square, Two Holes E690011
1
Z1, Z2
Ferrite Bead
2 (GRAY) ferrite beads ea. on bare wire
(see text)
E980029
4
P1
20 x 1 ,male, RA
20 pin male, right angle. To Front Panel,
J1
E620029
1
P5
2p,male
2 pin male. For Speaker; Locking Ramp E620024
1
Q5, Q21, Q22
2N5109
Pre-Amp, Post Amp, Pre-Driver
E580013
3
Q7, Q8
2SC1969
Push-Pull Finals
E580008
2
Q6
2SC2166
Driver
E580007
1
Page 6
RF
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
Q10, Q12, Q17, Q20, Q23
Q18, Q19, Q24
Q11, Q13, Q16, Q25
Q2
2N7000
J310
PN2222A
ZVN4424A
TO-92
TO-92
TO-92
Slightly Thinner TO-92 Style
E580002
E580012
E580001
E580005
5
3
4
1
R115
R116
R68
R67
R50
R42, R53, R54, R83
R76
R82, R84
R43, R78, R112
R15, R55, R56, R92, R97
R45, R47, R74
R7
R35, R36, R94, R113
R6, R8, R60, R64, R89
R30, R48, R49, R61
R85
R58
R1, R2, R63, R77
R20, R46, R98, R99
R10, R40, R72, R88, R90
R11, R12, R41
0.05 ohm
5.1 megohm
226
1.5k
1.5 ohm
4.7 ohm
10
18
22
33
47
68
82
100
120
150
180 ohm
220
270
470
560
1%, 3W Current Sense, (BLACK)
5%, 1/8W (grn-brn-grn); for L33--see
text
(BLUE) 1%, 1/4 watt
(BLUE) 1%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%,1/2 watt
(TAN) 5%,1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/2 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
E500050
E500086
E500033T
E500034T
E500025T
E500062T
E500054T
E500061T
E500028T
E500036T
E500019T
E500058T
E500038T
E500010T
E500022T
E500011T
E500049T
E500002T
E500039T
E500003T
E500046T
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
3
5
3
1
4
5
4
1
1
4
4
5
3
Page 7
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
R75, R80
680
R91, R93, R100
820
R38, R39
1K
R79, R81
1.8K
R5, R19, R24, R25, R34, R44,
R62, R66, R73, R95, R96
2.7K
R114
3.9K
R59
4.7K
R110, R111
5.6K
R13, R14, R29, R31, R32, R65,
R101
10K
R33
15K
R28
27K
R9, R16, R17, R21, R37, R69,
R107
100K
R18
1M
R22
3.3M
100K,3R ISO; "6A3RP4,RP5
104G"
100K,4R ISO; "8A3RP6
104G"
RP3
n/a
10K,4R ISO; "8A3RP2
103G"
TP1, TP2, TP3
test point, female
Description
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
(TAN) 5%, 1/4 watt
SIP; resistor pack, 6 pins; ALT:
"77063104"
SIP; resistor pack, 8 pins; ALT:
"77083104" or "B104G"
Thermistor board installed here (see
text)
SIP; resistor pack, 8 pins; ALT:
"77083103"
VFO, BFO, PLL REF test points
Part Number QTY
E500040T
E500001T
E500013T
E500004T
2
3
2
2
E500005T
E500009T
E500047T
E500007T
11
1
1
2
E500015T
E500060T
E500056T
7
1
1
E500006T
E500024T
E500021T
7
1
1
E510017
2
E510018
n/a
1
0
E510005
E620036
1
3
U1
16F872
Relay Driver PIC; I/O Controller;
programmed
E610004
1
U2
78L06AWC
TO-92, 6v Reg. For relays
E600001
1
Page 8
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
U3, U9
LT1252
U5
LTC1451
U6
U10, U11
Description
LMC662
NE/SA602
8 pin DIP, VFO Buffer; TX Buffer
8 pin DIP, 12-Bit DAC for Reference
Freq. Of PLL
8 pin DIP, (rail-to-rail out); PLL Loop
filter
8 pin DIP, mixer; alt: NE/SA612
U12
SMT1A
U8
78L05
U4
W1, W2, W3, W5, W6
X1 (X2 not used)
Part Number QTY
E600020
2
E600016
1
E600026
E600006
1
2
IF Amp/AGC SMC on daughterboard
with 2 ea. 4-pin headers.
E1200013
1
5-volt reg. (100mA)
E600029
1
MC145170P2 (or P1) 16 pin DIP, PLL
1" bare wire
Use component leads
E600016
1
0
12096 kHz
PLL reference oscillator crystal; HC-49
E850007
1
X3, X4
4915.2 kHz
BFO crystals; matched set; HC-49
Typical labeling: ECS D 4.91 -S
E850008
2
X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11
4913.6 kHz
Filter crystals; matched set, HC-49
Typical labeling: ECS V 4.9136-S
E850006
7
Z5
Ceramic resonator w/caps; 0.2%
4.000MHz Resonator tolerance
E660001
1
Page 9
RF
Appendix A
K2 RF Board Parts List (p/n E850001A and E850001B)
PICTURE
Designators
Value
Description
Part Number QTY
Z6
TUF-1 or TOP-1
Balanced diode mixer
E980025
1
S1
MISC
Power Switch
Power Switch Keycap; rectangular
E640006
E980023
1
1
MISC
DPDT
Keycap; TAC-BLK
28 pin socket, 0.3"
DIP
Socket for U1
E620011
1
MISC
PLL Upgrade parts
Small envelope; contents listed on page
49 of the manual
E850146
1
HW
heatsink TO5 Flush
Crown heatsink; for Q22
E700029
1
HW
standoff, 1/8"H
x 1/4" D, phenolic
(COLOR: BROWN)
For PA Transistor Mounting
E700034
2
HW
stem bumper, 0.5"
dia.,
black rubber
For L33 (BFO)
E980005
1
HW
washer, nylon, #4
0.375" diameter (For T5)
E700035
1
HW
4-32, nut, nylon
4-32,screw, nylon x
1/2"
nut, nylon (For T5)
E700021
1
screw, pan head, nylon (For T5)
E700022
1
HW
Page 10
RF
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 Misc. Bag Parts List (p/n E850004)
Designators
HW
Value
Description
Part
Number
QTY
internal tooth
fillister head, STAINLESS 2-56 x
1/8”,slotted, for LCD bezel
E700010
41
HW
#4 lockwasher
2-56,screw , 1/8",
STAINLESS
E700023
4
HW
HW
2-D Fastener
4-40 nut, Steel-ZN
Chassis fasteners
E100078
E700011
11
18
E700008
11
E700015
56
E700025
E700030
1
2
E700032
6
E700026
5
E700007
2
HW
pan-head Phillips screw, black oxide steel
(incl. spares)
pan-head Phillips screw, black oxide steel
4-40 screw, 3/16", black (incl. spares)
4-40 screw, 82 deg. Flt 3/16”, flathead Phillips, 82 deg, 0.21 dia
Hd, black
head, black oxide steel (front panel)
4-40 screw 1/2", black Phillips, for mounting PA transistors
4-40 screw 7/16", steelZN
Phillips, for mounting feet and tilt stand
4-40 standoff 1/4" long
x 3/16"
Threaded
4-40 standoff, 1/2" x
1/4" Dia.
Threaded hex 0.5" x 0.25" dia.
HW
HW
Shoulder washer, nylon,
black
For PA transistors
Cable tie - Small
For speaker wiring and RF probe
E700001
E980002
2
4
HW
Tilt stand set + 4 feet
Two oval front feet, tilt stand, two rear feet
E980019
1
HW
#4 washer, fibre, black
For speaker and PA transistor mounting
E700031
6
SPK-J2
1/8” phone jack, mono
w/switch
Panel-mount jack for ext. speaker
E620035
1
HW
HW
HW
HW
HW
HW
4-40 screw, 3/8”, black
Page 1
Misc., Probe, Wire
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 Misc. Bag Parts List (p/n E850004)
Designators
Value
Description
Part
Number
QTY
SPK-J1
2 pin female conn.
Housing
0.1” spacing w/locking ramp, int. speaker
plug
E620021
1
ACC-P1
2.1mm male conn.
Mates with DC power jack
E620032
1
ACC-P2
stereo 1/8” phone plug
Plug for hand key/keyer/paddle/computer
input
E620033
1
Misc
For 2-pin speaker housing (SPK-J1)
E620022
2
Misc
female crimp pins
plastic tuning tool, p/n
MARS-12
1
Misc
Allen wrench
For aligning slug-tuned inductors (GREEN) E980012
Long-handled, for large knobs and for
Control board removal
E980004
Misc
Allen wrench
Short-handled, for small knobs
1
Page 2
E980008
1
Misc., Probe, Wire
Appendix A
PICTURE
Appendix A
PICTURE
K2 Misc. Bag Parts List (p/n E850004)
Designators
PICTURE
Description
Part
Number
QTY
K2 Probe Assemblies Parts List (p/n E850036 envelope in E850004 Misc bag)
Designators
FCP-C1
RFP-C1
RFP-D1
FCP-E1
Appendix A
Value
Value
Part
Number
Axial Leads (like a resistor); counter probe E530067
Monolithic capacitor, for optional RF probe E530009
For RF probe; germanium
E560000
For counter probe
E620044
Description
10pf cap
.01 µF cap
1N34A diode
1 pin male probe tip
QTY
1
1
1
1
FCP-J1, VMP-J1 2 pin female housing
For counter and voltmeter probes
E620021
2
Misc
Misc
Misc
Misc
RFP-R1
For counter and voltmeter probes
For RF probe (ground)
For RF probe (DMM positive lead)
For RF probe (DMM negative lead)
5%, 1/4W; For RF probe
E620022
E700074
E700076
E700075
E500048
3
1
1
1
1
female crimp pins
Aligator clip, insulated
Banana plug, red
Banana plug, black
4.7M Resistor
K2 Wire Bag Parts List (p/n E850005 bag)
#26 Red Enamel Wire
#26 Green Enamel Wire
Green solid hookup
wire, #24
White solid hookup
Wire, #24
Black stranded hookup
wire, #24
For toroids
For toroids
Part
Number
E760002
E760004
Insulated wire for T4, misc. wiring
E760008
3 ft
Insulated wire for T4, misc. wiring
E760013
1 ft
For RF probe
E760016
6"
For counter and RF probes
E760010
3 ft
Misc
RG174 Coax Cable
#24 Dual-conductor
speaker wire
For speaker and ext. speaker jack
E760012
2 ft
Misc
Grill Cloth
Must be cut to speaker size; see text
E850089
3x3"
Misc
Heat Shrink; 3/16" dia.
For counter probe.
E980028
4"
Designators
Misc
Misc
Misc
Misc
Misc
Misc
Value
Description
Page 3
QTY
30 ft
8 ft
Misc., Probe, Wire
Relay Table
Diodes
SET Relays
MV209, 1SV149
Band
BPF
LPF
VCO
160m
80m
+60m
*40m ALT
40m
30m
20m
17m
15m
12m
10m
K2
K2, K3
K1, 60m-K1
K1
K1
K3, K4
K4
K5
K5, K6
K6, K7
K7
160m-K1
K8
K12
K12
K12
K9
K9
K11
K11
K10
K10
K13
K13,
K13,
K14
K14,
K13,
K13,
K15
K13,
K13,
1Nxxxx
K14
K14
K15
K14, K15
K15
K14, K15
K15
Transistors
2N7000
2N3906
PN2222A
ZVN4424
MPS5179
S
E
2SC2166
2SC1969
2N5109
C
J310
+ 60 meters is available only if the K60XV option is installed.
*40m ALT applies if D19-D20 are not installed.
NOTE: All relays are single-coil latching type and are
G
D
B
C
D
S
G
C
shown in the RESET position in schematics.
Relay pins 5 and 6 are not connected internally.
E
B
B C E
Integrated Circuits
VCO Table
Band
160m
80m
60m
***40m ALT
40m
30m
20m
17m
15m
12m
10m
PLASTIC DIP
VOLTAGE REGULATORS
(DUAL-INLINE PACKAGE)
Fixed Cap., pF
Total Cap., pF*
VCO Freq.
at band edge**
C75 (470)
C72 (270)
C71+C73 (129)
C71+C73 (129)
C71 (120)
C73+C74 (67)
C74 (20)
none (0)
C73 (47)
C74 (20)
none (0)
525-629
325-429
215-259
163-209
154-203
102-131
55-84
35-64
82-111
55-84
35-64
6715 (subtract)
8415 (subtract)
10165 (subtract)
11915 (subtract)
11915 (subtract)
14915 (subtract)
18915 (subtract)
22915 (subtract)
16085 (add)
19975 (add)
23085 (add)
* This includes capacitance of varactor diodes D23-D26 on all bands, D21-D22
on 80 -160 m, and D19-D20 on 40 and 60 meters (if applicable). Only a
portion of the indicated capacitance range is actually used to cover
each Amateur band segment. VCO frequency can be calculated based on
a total inductance of 0.95 µH (T5 in parallel with L30).
** Based on an I.F. of 4915 kHz (e.g., 6715 - 4915 = 1800).
5250 kHz used as 60-meter lower band edge (pending U.S. FCC ruling).
2930T-8, 78XX
78L05, -06
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
GND
OUT GND IN
COUNT PINS STARTING AT
PIN 1 AND GOING COUNTER-
IN
CLOCKWISE (8-PIN DIP SHOWN)
OUT
GND
Special Symbols
Jumper
= On bottom of PC board.
Elecraft
K2 Schematic Key
By W. Burdick
E.Swartz
Date
Rev.
D
10/23/02
***40m ALT applies if D19-D20 are not installed.
Appendix B
Sht.
1 of 1
15
35
BANDSTORE
ANT1/2
TUNE
S4
MENU
EDIT
NB
S6
D7
RATE
LOCK
#0
S7
LEVEL
D3
D0
9 10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
100K
R12
120
2
S0
C9
1
R1 5K
GND
74HC165
Keyer Speed
/SPD RD
5
4
3
14
13
C3
.047
D4
R2 5K
SR CK
U3
6B595
SR DOUT
5A
SR WRT
/SR RD SR CK SR DIN 5A
C2
.01
Power Out
/BANK1
To RF Board, P1
D5
J1
5A
8
GND
5K
/DOT-PTT
5
RP3
10K
Q3
2N3906
V POTS
4
4.7K
5A
R14 100K
R3
5A
AF Gain
1
R6
RP3
cw
ccw
3
/MIC RD
5K (audio taper)
These components are supplied with SSB adapter.
5A
V POTS
R7
P1
Mic Config.
cw
ccw
D6
1N5817
V POTS
RP3
10K
R13
68.1K, 1%
/BANK2
ccw
cw
2
.01
C4 C5 C6 C7
.01 .01 .01 .01
RIT/XIT Offset
R.F. Gain
MIC AF
6
C8
R5 5K
R4
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4.7K
IDAT
7
GND
9
ICLK
5V
7
8
/SR RD
6
6
7
ENC A
FUNC
6
SR CK
5
5
5
SR DIN
4
UP
4
SR WRT
DN
8
3
3
4
3
SR DOUT
PTT
RP3
10K
7
2
AUXBUS (NC)
2
2
8
1
ENC B
1
AF
cw
ccw
J2
Mic
1
cw
ccw
8
VCC
16
/QH
7
QH
9
SER
10
CLK
12
6
H
G
F
E
D
C
5A
U2
2
11
SH/LD
1
B
A
ENC A
ENC B
CLK INH
18
1
15
/Q7
SOUT
GND
10
16
15
17
GND
2
5A
11
/Q6
GND
/Q4
/Q5
SIN
SRCK
3
19
14
6
5
7
8
13
/SRCLR /Q3
/Q2
RCK
12
4
/Q0
/Q1
/G
VCC
2
9
17
16
15
14
7
6
5
4
18
SOUT
10
GND
/Q7
GND
11
/Q6
19
GND
/Q5
SIN
3
/Q4
SRCK
13
/SRCLR /Q3
8
/Q2
RCK
12
/Q1
/Q0
VCC
/G
9
V+
B
A
3
Shaft Encoder
1
Z1
V-
2
First switch label corresponds to switch TAP,
Second label corresponds to switch HOLD.
S7 - S16 can also be used as a numeric keypad.
(spare)
4
MSG
REC
#9
D0
D7
9 10
/MIC RD
5A
/BANK2
/BANK1
R15
10K
/ENC RD
U4
6B595
S16
8
/SPD RD
DS2
XIT
PF2
#8
S15
7
LED Array
RIT
PF1
#7
S14
6
R16
15K
.01
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D6
5
8
XFIL
AFIL
#6
Pushbutton Switches
RP1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
2V
4
7
S13
D2
D1
3
6
AGC
CW REV
#5
20
2
5
A=B
SPLIT
#3
D3
S12
D5
D1
S5
S3
S2
S1
S0
15
S4
S5
S6
BP3
BP2
S7
BP0
4
PRE/ATTN
SPOT
#4
S11
21
S8
S10
BP1
S11
VLCD
S9
S12
A2
VSS
A1
S13
S15
A0
SA0
S16
OSC
10
5
IDAT ICLK
3
D4
D4
6
1
2
S10
/BANK2
D6
25
S14
S17
CLK
S18
S20
SCL
/SYNC
120
1
VDD
S21
SDA
RP2
4.0V DAY (18mA/LED)
2.7V NIGHT (6mA/LED)
(based on LED Vf=1.9V)
30
S19
S22
S23
PN2222A
C1
.047
S9
(S0 through S23 connected to DS1; only S0 and S23 shown)
40
Q2
Q1
A/B
REV
#2
/BANK1
U1
PCF8566
LCD Driver
S23
/NIGHT
MODE
VOX
#1
S8
D5
R10
33
R11
470
DISPLAY
RF/ALC
S2
D2
S3
R9
220
/BANK2
COM1
COM2
5
BAND+
RECALL
S1
1B,C,DP
COM3
4
1A,G,D
1F,E,AN
2B,C,DP
2A,G,D
2F,E,AN
3B,C,DP
3A,G,D
3F,E,AN
4B,C,DP
4A,G,D
4F,E,AN
5B,C,DP
5A,G,D
5F,E,AN
6B,C,DP
6A,G,D
3
/BANK1
7
10
VIM-838-DP 8-DIGIT LCD
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S4
S3
S5
20
6F,E,AN
7A,G,D
7F,E,AN
2
COM3
COM2
1
8B,C,DP
COM1
D3
8A,G,D
D2
Bargraph
Brightness
Control
25
8F,E,AN
DS1
5A
S1
30
7B,C,DP
Backlight
LEDs
S2
S0
5A
Elecraft
By W. Burdick
E. Swartz
K2 Front Panel Board
Rev.
C
Date
10/6/02
Appendix B
Sht.
1 of 1
1
-
MCLR
V SMTR
ALC
8
RP2
V SENSE
1
RA1
RB5
IDAT
RA2
RB4
/SR RD
RA3
RB3
SR DOUT
V POTS
RA5
RB1
SR WRT
ENC A
RE0
RB0
SR DIN
10
RE1
VDD
RE2
VSS
RP4
82K
RP5
470
RP4
82K
3
X2
C21
33
6
5A
15
3
C38
680
C22
8-50
2
P6
Q9
Q10
MPS5179
MPS5179
RD6
/DASH
RD5
RX
OSC2
RD4
TX
RC7
RC6
/MUTE
RC2
RC5
SCK
RC3
RC4
RD0
RD3
RD1
RD2
/DAC2CS
20
/PLLCS
25
Note: Current sense resistor
is R115 on the RF board.
3
0-25.5V
(0.1V res.)
1
V SENSE
C1
2.2µF
VSS
C25
0.1
7
8
10
12
14
VOL2
8
C27
Q4
18
RX
/DAC2CS
AF OUT
PD2
V ALC
AUXBUS
V BIAS-XFIL
8T
EXT ALC
8R
12V IN
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
VOL2
2
4
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
1
3
.022
4
5
6
P1
P2
To RF Board, J7
PD1
V BFO
8T
ENC B
8R
VOL1
6
8
10
5
7
9
P3
12
14
16
18
U9
5A
11
13
15
17
RP4
82K
8
+
22µF
R20
2.7Ω
6
RP4
82K
19
8
C32
LM380N-8
5
20
7
RP5
470
C29
220µF
9
L1
82 mH
RP5
470
10
R16
10
12V
C28
220µF
7
C41
.01
To RF Board, J8
Elecraft
To RF Board, J6
K2 Control Board
By W. Burdick
E. Swartz
NOTE 1: Jumpers are used at R18 and R19. They must be removed if the Audio Filter option is installed.
VOL1
VOL3
AF Amp
V POTS
16
C26
0.1
+
6
12V 5A 8A
8R
3
RP1
3.9K
Q7
J310
D
C23
.01
8
R4
5.6K
V AGC
RP6
5.1K
2
D
2N7000
6
G
AF OUT
R.F. GAIN
1
5
G
C30
.047
1
7
8
Q2
2N3906
S
Q6
J310
10
U2A
LM833
6
RP6 5.1K
C3
.01
S
TX
8R
3.3M
/MUTE
7
R1
50K
AGC THR.
Mute
v+
5
cw
1
2
+
R2
8R 3.3M
8A
4
3
R17
3
4
2
C8
39
4
V RFDET
12V 5A 8A
2
NC BYPASS
2
5.1K
3
C19
9
1
0Ω
1
IN1
RP6
4
ccw
I.F. OUT
8
R19
J1
J2
-
C2
.001
U2B
nc
C7
330
+
+
5
5
R18
1
3
5
Q1
2N3906
5A
.047
.001
4
2
7
3
6
4
2
5
V+
RP6
5.1K
PD1
12V
OUT
6
1
Q3
10
8A
D1
1N4148
AUXBUS
GND
R3
10K
SDO
IN2
R5 33K
C9
.01
SDI
9
C14
C11
Q12
PN2222A
47K
Audio
Filter
GND
8A
U10C
10
RP3
PD2
SCK
5
8V Switching
RP1
3.9K
1
8
9
5A
6
V SMTR
2
7
3
+
/SLOW AGC
7
U7
25LC320
C4
0.47µF
RP6
5.1K
RP2
4
C6
.047
X1
5.068MHz
SCK
EEPROM
C16
.047
OUT
GND
IDAT
AGC
V BIAS-XFIL
-
8
0Ω
.047
ICLK
/AGC OFF
C10
.01
/WP
78M05
IN
C44
Not Used
7
/HOLD
U5
R7 1.78k, 1%
I SENSE
6
4
VCC
SDO
5V Reg.
PN2222A
0.00-5.10A
(.02 A resolution)
U3B
V-
3
/CS
47K
+
9
RP1
3.9K
Q11
RP3
82K
U10D
7
8T
ENC A
7
-
196K, 1%
3
2
/DAC1CS
8A
SR DIN
6
8
6
9
8
/EECS
21
C15
100µF
U3A
LMC6482AIN
4
SR DOUT
+
1
+
SR WRT
5
-
RP2
10
RP7
33K
OUT
GND
SR CK
C17
.01
10
RXD
+
1%
2
/CS
5
(NOTE 1)
IN
C13
22µF
R10
1
SCLK
DOUT
11
11
U4
8
2
+
R9
8
/CLR
14
-
5A
12
DIN
V BFO
+
13
13
8V Low-Dropout Reg.
R8
100
Voltage Sense
U1
NE602
7
8A
4
12
14
82K
LM2930T-8
C42
0.1
D2
1N4148
DGND
12V
3
806K, 1%
PDE
/LDAC
5A
/SR RD
2
VDD
2
P7
1
AGND
UPO
MCU
Current Sense
12V IN
1
REF
.01
C40
U8
MAX534
18C452
EXT INT
P5
2
6
8
TXD
2.2µF
U10B
.001
U6
Voltmeter Input
- +
5
C20
1
Voltmeter Source
4
4
/DOT-PTT
+
7
-
C36
.0027
C35
.01
15
OUTD
OUTA
3
RP7
33K
VSS
RC1
2
3
OSC1
RC0
COUNT
100kHz-40MHz
RD7
ENC B
4
1
Freq. Ctr
Input
2
1
C37
.01
VDD
8
C33
+
6
5A
SCK
RP5
470
4.000MHz
6
5
16
OUTC
OUTB
/DOT-PTT
V RFDET
5
C39
.01
LMC660
5
7
V PWR
5A
30
4
RP7
33K
Quad, 8-bit DAC
SDO
4
SR CK
RP3
47K
3
.0027
Q5
2N7000
1
5A
RB2
/AGC OFF
5V FCTR
35
RA4
R12 820
EXT ALC
C12
.0027
ICLK
/SLOW AGC
RP3 47K
82K
RB6
/DASH
10
9
* mod; solder on back (see text)
Part of CW key shaping
2
5
40
RB7
RA0
VOL3
7
3
4
I SENSE
V ALC
.001
C34
12V
.01
1
5A
6
5
RP3
47K
C24
SIDETONE
2
U10A LMC660
*
6
5
C5
Q8
PN2222A
+
AUXBUS
R6
100
/PLLCS
8T
C31
.01
R21 270K
82K
C45
22µF
4
3
8R
+
2
1
RXD
C43
.001
R22
AUXBUS
3
R11
47K
RP7
33K
.01
C46 .01
AF OUT
P4
TXD
C18
8A
*
("D3" on PCB)
TONEVOL
V PWR
Aux I/O
Rev.
F
Date
1/27/04
= on bottom of PC board
Appendix B
Sht.
1 of 1
PLL Reference
Oscillator
PLL Synthesizer
12.090-12.100 MHz
12.096MHz
X1
Q19
8B
TP3
100 µH
D
1
G
L31
X2
(NOTE 1)
12µH
S
C84
120
R21
4
D16
MV209
FIN
5
7
8
RFC14
18µH
D17
10K
PH R
PDOUT
DIN
6
SCK
3
RP2
REFOUT
4
/PLLCS
PH V
VSS
/ENB
LD
CLK
FV
DOUT
FR
27K
15
14
R24
13
12
R25
6
C88
68
10
-
5
2.7K
2.7K
11
1
SCK
+
C92
.022
(NOTE 3)
R29
10K
2
SDO
4
VOUT
LD /CS
REF
DOUT
GND
3
7
2
6
-
5
1
8A
8B
U6A
(Vout = 0 to 4.096V)
LMC662
2, 3
C175
.01
RD 1.8K
RB 12K
RF
10K
nc
9
R11
560
.01
nc
Q17
D22
D21
~2Vpp
2N7000
1SV149
R9
100K
D
VFO ALC
G
C60
D11
S
3
4
C58
.01
R10
470
1N4148
2
VFO Range Selection
Relays are shown in RESET
position. See relay table (key).
9
7
C90
.047
220µF
RX VFO
4
C63
8B
100µF
C103
6
-
R12
560
2
8
K13
+
R14
10K
C61
.01
OUT
8
C73
47
RC
2.2K
Rt 10K
Thermistor
RE 10K
1N4148
R33
15K
C74
20
1
8B
1.2µH
3
7
C89
.001
8
6, 7
K14
+
12-Bit DAC
D8
8B
5B
78L05
IN
RA 33K
9
U8
RFC16
47µH
4
3
TP1
2
4
8
+
7
2
1
U3
LT1252
C64
.001
3
T5
+
3
/DAC2CS
DIN
Buffer
TX VFO
4
8
D20
D19
MV209
D13
1N4148
2
D26
10K
3
4
7
5B
R13
S
R17
100K
D25
K15
(NOTE 2)
8
Q18
J310
R32
10K
10µF
4V
8B
VCC
D
G
10K
120
LMC662
2.7K
CLK
MV209
D23
R31
R30
7
C93
9
C65
0.1
33
C68
10pF
U6B
R19
U5
LTC1451
R15
D24
R20
270
C100
.001
RFC10
1mH
16
U4
MC145170
1SV149
C67
0.1
VFO
R28
+
10K
2
R22
3.3M
C87
.01
C85
120
OSCOUT
3
SDO
100K
RP2
1
C86
0.1
VDD
OSCIN
2
4.7µH
8B
C94
.047
C91
.001 (NOTE 3)
C96
1µF
.01
C95
5B
J310
D18
1N4148
L30
RFC15 (NOTE 3)
C75
470
C71 C72
82 270
(NOTE 2)
R16
C59
0.1
C62
.01
100K
Q16
PN2222A
R18
1M
4V
4, 5
Thermistor Board
(replaces RP3 on PC board)
SCK
/DAC2CS
/DOT-PTT
AF OUT
PD2
V ALC
AUXBUS
8T
EXT ALC
8R
12V IN
V POTS
ENC A
SR DOUT
IDAT
C196
.047
14 16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
2
4
6
8
10
12
14 16
18
3
5
7
9
11
13 15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
5
7
9
11
13 15
17
RGE300
SDO
0.05Ω, 1%, 3W
R36
82
C106 2.2µF
SB530
17
18
19
S1
Power
20
R.F. GAIN
16
5A
14 15
IDAT
13
ICLK
12
V POTS
11
/SR RD
10
ENC A
9
SR CK
8
SR DIN
7
SR WRT
6
SR DOUT
5
ENC B
4
AUXBUS
3
MIC AF
VOL1
2
Q23
2N7000
8T
Elecraft
By W. Burdick
E. Swartz
Phones
Speaker
D12
OFF
+
2
P5
J2
Board
P1
1
1
Panel
R113
82
VOL3
+
8R
Front
/DOT-PTT
+
ON
Current Sense
VOL2
R35
82
12V IN
R115
AF OUT
C105
2.2µF
F1
19
/DASH
/PLLCS
VOL1
VOL3
SR DIN
AF OUT
12V 5A 8A
2
3
95SQ015
1
+
1
D10
Aux. 12V
20
J8
PD1
V AGC
12
12V
R.F. GAIN
I.F. OUT
VOL2
J7
6
1
8R
10
V BFO
5
8
ENC B
4
6
8T
3
C1
.001
/DOT-PTT
/DASH
2
4
8R
1
2
SR WRT
R1
220
V BIAS-XFIL
P3
SR CK
R2
220
C2
.001
12V 5A 8A
J6
ICLK
Key/Keyer/Paddle
Control
Board
/SR RD
J1
V RFDET
J3
12V DC
NOTE 1: X2 is not used.
NOTE 2: D19-D20 are supplied with the K60XV option. They must not be installed unless the K60XV option is
also installed (60 m band and transverter I/O). C71 must be changed to 120 pF if D19-D20 are installed.
NOTE 3: These components improve PLL stability; they must be soldered on the back of the board (see text).
C111
2.2µF
K2 RF Board
Rev.
F
Date
1/27/04
Appendix B
Sht.
1 of 4
C165
8R
12V
C52
.01
R72
470
2.7K
R73
K16
Noise Blanker
C158
.01
J12
+7dBm
R74
47
7
4
7
K17
4
18
8
3
C142 .01
.01
R82
C160
.01
C143
.01
9
2
C141
.01
9
3
2
C53
.01
8
RFC12
100µH
R78
22
RX VFO
R81
1.8K
C159
.01
4
RFC11
100µH
C163
.01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D6
1N4007
R7
68
R6
100
1
Z6
TUF-1
C145
.01
T6
R8
4
100
1
12V
2
C161
.01
3
Rcv. Mixer
Attenuator
(Sh. 3)
R5
R75
680
-10dB
2.7K
R89
680
R83
4.7Ω
R79
1.8K
W5
NB Bypass
R84
18
100
R88
470
R90
470
+14dB
C162
C164
.01
C146
.01
R77
220
Buffer
.047
8R
Q22
2N5109
R80
RF Preamp
R76
10
D7
1N4007
C170
3
Q21
2N5109
BPF
AUXBUS
12V
2
8
R85
150
.047
8R
Post-Mixer Amp.
R97
33
-5dB, Z= 150Ω
HI IP
Q12
2N7000
NOTE: If Noise Blanker is installed,
R88 and R90 must be removed,
and R89 replaced with a jumper.
12V
U9
LT1252
7
4.9136 MHz Variable-Bandwidth Crystal Filter
3
+
6
2
-
R92
33
IF Amp
V BIAS-XFIL
4
R95
2.7K
R93
820
R101
10K
RFC13
100µH
V XFIL2
(NOTE 2)
Q20
RP4
R94
82
C55
.01
8T
D29
6
4
2
2N7000
RP4
1
RP4
1
3
RP5
3
5
4
C157
.047
2
W2
X7
X8
X9
X10
W3
X11
D31
3
2
AGC
D41
5
6
7
8
D29-D34: 1SV149
2
V AGC
SSB Control
3
3
J9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
8
4
.01
C179
100
C183
.01
MIC AF
V RFDET
8T
D39
MV209
I.F. OUT
Adapter
V-
BFO
Q24
J310
C168
.01
41µH
D
7
C144
100pF
3
C155
.01
D36
5082-3081
TP2
BFO Buffer/Attenuator
7
D37
1SV149
C169
270
2
RP6
100K
D38
1SV149
4
G
5
R99
RP6
100K
C173
220
8
(NOTE 1)
strong signals (from nearby transmitters). These diodes
must be soldered on the back of the PC board (see text).
V BFO
82
X4
270
NOTE 2: D40 and D41 were added to improve handling of extremely
PD1
7
4.917MHz
R98
NOTE 1: Remove C167 when SSB Adapter is installed.
C177
.022
6
C174
S
2
6
3
PD2
5
2
C176
0.1
1
2
V+
X3
Q25
PN2222A
1
U10
NE602
3
1
C186
.01
8A
.001
Aux. AF
U11
NE602
V-
2nd Xtal Filter
V+
5
C154
100
1
EXT ALC
C167
C153
68
TX VFO
/DOT-PTT
8R
SSB
0.1
8
R110
5.6K
C181
V ALC
8T
820
X5
1
XFIL Out
AUXBUS
C156
.047
R91
820
X6
12
XFIL In
Xmit Mixer
2
J10
1
C178
R107
100K
C184
.01
3.9K
1
R100
8A
L34
4.7uH
C182
180
R114
J11
J5
V XFIL2
4
D33
D32
Product Det.
U12
MC1350
1
3
4
330
D30
22
D40
T7
6 D34
1
C150
0.1
RP5
4
2
R112
1N4148
5 .047
RP5
C185
8R
C166
RP4, RP5: 100K
5.6K
C54
.01
R96
2.7K
L33
0.1
R111
C151
3
RP6
100K
C172
.01
390
6
RP6
100K
Elecraft
K2 RF Board
By W. Burdick
E.Swartz
Rev.
F
Date
1/27/04
Appendix B
Sht.
2 of 4
12V
RFC4
10µH
+
C119
.01
C126
47µF
C133
0.1
R45
47
C135
.01
Z1
C127
T2
RFC5
12:8, FT37-43
10µH
Q7
3
C122
56
C115
.01
680
2SC1969
2
LPF
R53
4.7Ω
4
1
RFC8
10µH
R55
33
(Sh. 3)
C129
.01
5
C
A
6
1
3
R58
2
4
1/2W
T3
2
3
C116
33
8T
C120
.01
C121
.01
R49
120
1
RFC6
R54
4.7Ω
RFC9
10µH
B
180
8
0.68µH
Q8
7
T4
2:3:1:1
2SC1969
C128
680
Q6
2SC2166
R40
C118
470
.01
R48
120
Z2
R47
47
R50
C131
0.1
1.5Ω
1/2 W
Q5
PRE-DRIVER
Power Amplifier (PA)
2N5109
C124
0.1
C125
22µF
R42
NOTE: WIND T4 2:2:1:1 FOR
BETTER EFFICIENCY AT 5W
(SEE "MODIFICATIONS" SECTION)
+
(Sh. 3)
R41
560
D
C130
0.1
4
T1
9:3, FT37-43
R44
2.7K
R56
33
Driver
4.7Ω
S
C117
R43
22Ω
0.047
Q10
2N7000
8T
PA Bias
G
D
8T
R46
270
R59
R61
120
4.7K
Pre-Driver
Q13
PN2222A
V BIAS-XFIL
Q11
PN2222A
+
C137
100µF
C138
.047
R60
100
/CLASS AB
R63
220
Elecraft
R62
2.7K
K2 RF Board
By W. Burdick
E.Swartz
Rev.
F
Date
1/27/04
Appendix B
Sht.
4 of 4
T-R
BANDPASS
FILTERS
T-R
T-R
POWER
AMP
(15W)
DRIVER
LOW-PASS
FILTERS
AGC
4.915MHz
ATTEN.
AND
PREAMP
POSTMIXER
AMP
RCV
MIXER
NOISE
BLANKER
BUFFER
PLL
SYNTH.
VCO
6 - 24MHz
T-R
CRYSTAL
FILTERS
XMIT
MIXER
T-R
BAL.
MOD.
MCU AND
SUPPORT
CIRCUITS
BFO
4.915MHz
I.F. AMP
PROD.
DETECTOR
AUDIO
FILTER,
AF AMP
Shaft Encoder
KEY
Common
Transmit
Receive
DISPLAY
AND CONTROLS
Appendix C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
W. Burdick/E. Swartz
Rev. D 1-9-04
Appendix E, Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting (000-049)
If you have any difficulty with your K2:
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Problem
000 Unit appears to be
completely dead when
power switch is turned
on (no display, no
audio)
Closely examine all PC boards for poor solder joints and incorrect,
broken or missing components.
Look for your problem in the Troubleshooting Tables (below).
Follow the step-by-step receiver and transmitter Signal-Tracing
procedures at the end of this section. Also included are complete DC
Voltage Tables for all ICs and transistors.
ƒ
ƒ
Troubleshooting Tables
ƒ
ƒ
There are five troubleshooting tables (listed below). Within each table,
problems are identified by 3-digit numbers in the ranges shown. In most cases
you’ll know which table to look in based on the symptoms you observe. If in
doubt, start with the General Troubleshooting table.
General Troubleshooting
Control Circuits
Receiver
Transmitter
Operation and Alignment
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
000-049
050-099
100-149
150-199
200-249
003 LCD is dim
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
When referring to components on the various K2 boards in the table, we will
sometimes use a shorthand form such as “RF-U11,” which means U11 on the
RF board.
004 Display turns on
but unit still appears
functionally dead or is
“running slowly”
INFO Messages
If you see a message such as INFO 100 on the LCD, look up the
corresponding entry in the troubleshooting tables. Note: INFO messages
can be cleared by pressing any switch. However, the cause of these messages
should be investigated before continuing to operate the transceiver.
005 No display, but
audio is OK
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
1
Troubleshooting Steps
Make sure your power supply or battery is
connected, turned on, and isn’t plugged in
backwards
Check power supply and battery fuses if
applicable
The K2’s internal self-resetting fuse, F1, may
have gone into a high-resistance state due to
a short from the 12-V line to ground; unplug
the power supply and check for such shorts
Examine power cable for shorts or opens
Verify control board is plugged in and that its
connectors are fully seated
Check for 12 VDC at the power jack
Make sure speaker, battery, and other internal
option connectors are not swapped or
plugged in backwards
Measure the +5V and +8V regulated power
supplies. If either is incorrect, check the
regulators (050).
Check the MCU (075)
Check values of R16 and R15 on the front
panel
Check continuity from LCD driver (U1) to
LCD. Also look for bent pins on driver.
Check the MCU, Control-U6 (075)
Verify that the control and front panel boards
are plugged in correctly
The MCU oscillator may be shorted out due
to solder flux residue, especially if you used
water-soluble flux solder (030)
Remove the bottom cover and verify that the
front panel connector is properly mated with
the RF board
If the front panel is plugged in correctly but
the problem still persists, check all LCD
voltages and control lines (060)
009 LO BATT
displayed
010 Battery voltage
too low for proper
voltage regulation
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
011 No audio, but
display is OK
012 Display, VFO
knob, switches, or
potentiometers do not
function correctly or
are intermittent
015 Current drain
excessive on receive
016 Current drain
excessive on transmit
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
P7 on the control board may be jumpered for
ext. 12V. Move the jumper to the "12V" pos.
Battery voltage may be below 10.5V.
Recharge the battery as soon as possible.
If you saw INFO 010 on the LCD, your
battery voltage is too low (< 8.5V). This
usually happens on transmit when your
battery is weak. Disconnect the battery from
the K2 and measure its voltage; if the battery
voltage quickly rises back to 11 or 12V, the
K2 may be loading the battery down. But if
the battery stays stabilizes at under about 10
V when measured outside of the K2, it has
become fully discharged or may be defective.
If you suspect the K2 is pulling the voltage
down, tap any button to clear the INFO
message then use D I S P L AY to show the
voltage and current drain. If the current drain
is > 200 mA with no signal and the bargraph
OFF, something is shorting either the 12V
line or one of the regulators (050).
Make sure that a working antenna is
connected; check audio filter option, antenna
switch, tuner, SWR bridge, etc.
See Receiver Troubleshooting (100)
Front panel or control board may not be
plugged in correctly
Check the MCU (075)
Check all regulated supply voltages (050)
RP1 or RP2 on the front panel board may be
installed backwards.
Check receive-mode current drain (140)
ƒ
ƒ
018 Supply voltage
drops when K2 is
turned on
ƒ
ƒ
019 Supply voltage
drops too low when
transmitter is keyed
025 Battery won’t
charge up to the
correct voltage, or
discharges too quickly
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Connect the K2 to a known 50 ohm load
(preferably a dummy load); if current drain
returns to normal, you probably have a
mismatched antenna and will have to
improve the match or reduce output power
If you have set the power level control
significantly above the level that the
transmitter is capable of, current may
029 Small error in
actual vs. displayed
frequency
2
ƒ
increase significantly; try reducing the power
setting or use CAL CUR to set up a
current limit
Use voltage/current monitor mode to see if
the power supply voltage drops below 11V
on transmit; if so, you may be exceeding the
capability of your power supply or battery
(025)
If the supply voltage and antenna impedance
are correct, the driver or PA transistors may
not be operating efficiently (150)
Use voltage/current monitor mode to see if
the receive-mode current drain is too high
(015)
If voltage drops but current drain is normal,
you probably have a power supply problem
or a battery that is not fully charged (025);
review power supply requirements
(Specifications)
Use voltage/current monitor mode to see if
transmit-mode current drain is too high (016)
If voltage drops but current drain on transmit
is normal, you probably have a weak battery
or inadequate power supply (025)
Batteries must be charged using the right
voltage or their usable life will be greatly
reduced; if you have the K2 internal battery
option, refer to the charging instructions in
the option manual
Battery life can be extended by reducing
power output and by turning off selected
features using the menu; see Operation
Always disable the K2’s internal battery
using the rear-panel battery on-off switch if
you plan to use an external battery or a
reduced-voltage power supply that is
inadequate for charging purposes
Make sure your 4.000-MHz oscillator
(control board, X2) is calibrated. Two
methods are provided in the Operation
section (Advanced Operating Features).
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
030 VFO frequency
jumps or drifts, or
operating frequency
appears to be entirely
incorrect
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Make sure the bottom cover is installed when
doing CAL FIL and CAL PLL . Also, if
you calibrate at room temperature but operate
the radio at much lower or higher
temperatures, calibration will be worse.
Re-do CAL FIL after calibrating the
4.000–MHz oscillator
Re-do CAL PLL after calibrating the
4.000-MHz oscillator
Use CAL FCTR with probe on TP1 and
tune very slowly through about 10 kHz of
VFO range; if you see any sudden jumps of >
50 Hz over this range even after doing CAL
PLL, your 12.096-MHz oscillator crystal may
be defective (RF, X1).
You must align both the VCO and BFO using
the CAL PLL and CAL FIL before
operating the K2; otherwise the VFO cannot
be tuned properly and the synthesizer may
not be locked (see Operation as well as RF
board Alignment and Test, Part II)
Make sure the supply voltage is above 8.5V
at all times or the 8V regulator may not
function correctly.
If you used solder with water-soluble flux,
you may have conductive paths all over the
PC boards. These can cause numerous
problems with the VFO, BFO, and logic
circuits (anything high impedance). Try
cleaning the entire board with hot water and a
Q-tip, or follow solder manufacturer’s
recommendations (except immersion).
If you used CAL FIL to change the BFO
settings, make sure you placed the BFO on
the correct side of the zero-pitch value for
each operating mode (see Operation, Filter
Settings)
If you tune beyond the lock range of the
VCO, the frequency will stop changing and
may “hunt” near the end of this range. If you
ƒ
are in a range that the VCO should be
capable of tuning, re-check VCO alignment
(see RF board Alignment and Test, Part II)
If the displayed frequency is “garbage,” see
Resetting the Configuration to Defaults in
Advanced Operating Features.
Control Circuits (050-099)
Problem
050 Regulated
voltage(s) incorrect
ƒ
ƒ
051 General problem
with control circuits
(switches, knobs,
display, bargraph, T-R
switching)
052 +5V too low
(< 4.75V)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
3
Troubleshooting Steps
Remove all option boards, since any one of
them might be causing a short on a regulated
supply line
Make sure that the DC input voltage at J3 is
> 8.5 (the minimum voltage needed by the
voltage regulators)
If +5V is too low (< 4.5V) go to 052
If +8V is too low (< 7.5V) go to 053
Check all DC voltages using the voltage
tables (later in this section). Start with the
control board.
If the problem involves the front panel,
measure those voltages next. If the problem
is with T-R switching, check the RF board
voltages next. You may have RP1 or RP2 on
the front panel board installed backwards.
Remove the front panel to see if it is was
pulling the 5V line low. If not, the problem is
likely to be on the control board.
Pull the control board out and inspect the
entire 5V line looking for heat-damaged
components or shorts. The schematic can be
used to identify components on the 5V line.
Remove the microprocessor to see if it is
loading the 5V line down.
Unsolder the output pin of the 5V regulator
and bend it up slightly to break contact with
the PC board. If the voltage is still too low
measured at the pin, replace the regulator.
053 +8V too low
(< 7.5V)
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
060 No display on
LCD
Inspect the entire 8V path on the RF and
control boards. Look for heat-damaged
components or solder bridges.
Unsolder the output pin of the 8V regulator
and bend it up slightly to break contact with
the PC board. If the voltage is still too low
measured at the pin, replace the regulator.
There are a number of places where you can
easily break the 8V line to eliminate parts of
the circuit in your search for the problem.
One example is RFC16 on the RF board. If
you lift one end of this inductor it will
disconnect the entire synthesizer from the 8V
line.
A number of circuits have resistors in series
with the 8V line, for example R112 in series
with the I.F. amplifier (U12). If you measure
voltage on both sides of these resistors you
may find a circuit that is drawing high
current or is shorted. Example: If you
measured 7V on one side of R112 and 3V on
the other, it would indicate that U12 had a
current drain of 180 mA, which is much too
high (I = E/R = 4/22 = 0.18).
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
065 Relay Problem
ƒ
ƒ
4
If the bar-graph is also not working, check
the 5V regulator (052)
Remove the front panel hardware and panel
from the front panel PC board and inspect the
entire board for shorts or incorrect
components. You may have LCD driver U1
in backwards or it may have a bent pin.
Check the values of R15 and R16 on the
bottom of the board; these resistors set the
voltage for the LCD itself.
Re-install the front panel board and turn on
the K2. Using a voltmeter, measure the
voltages on pins 16 and 17 of front panel
connector J1 (ICLK and IDAT). These lines
should show DC voltages between 0 and 5V
due to data transmission from the
microprocessor to the LCD driver. If the
voltages are fixed at either 0 V or 5V rather
than being somewhere in-between, the MCU
may not be functioning (075)
If you suspect a ground short in any relaycontrolled circuit (LPF, BPF, VCO) you can
simplify debugging by pulling out the control
board, then turning power ON and back OFF.
This places all relays in the RESET condition
(see schematic).
If you hear no relays on power-up, check the
IOC (080)
075 Possible MCU
problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
080 IOC Problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Measure the voltage on pin 32 of the MCU
(U6, control board). If it is not 5V, check the
5V regulator (052).
Remove the control board and carefully
inspect the microprocessor. Make sure it is
not installed backwards, has no bent pins, and
is seated firmly in its socket.
Verify that the MCU oscillator components
all have the correct values and are soldered
properly, with no shorts (X2, C21, C22).
Listen for the 4-MHz oscillator signal using
another ham-band receiver. If you can't hear
the signal, try putting a 1M resistor across X2
on the control board. Also try rotating C22.
If you saw the message INFO 080 , the
I/O controller (IOC, RF-U1) or other auxBus
device did not respond to messages from the
main processor (MCU). Turn power OFF and
back ON; if you hear some relays switching
on power-up, the IOC may be OK, and the
problem is likely to be with the AuxBus
(081)
If you do not hear any relays switching on
power-up, your IOC (RF-U1) may be
defective. Inspect U1 carefully to see if you
have installed it backwards or if any pins are
bent.
Pull U1 out, check its pins, then re-install it,
making sure all pins make good contact with
the IC socket. Check the 4-MHz oscillator
(075).
Remove the bottom cover and verify that all
pins of U1’s socket are soldered, as well as
those of the 6V regulator (RF-U2), and U1’s
4 MHz oscillator (RF-Z5).
With power ON, check all voltages
associated with U1. You should see 6V at
pins 1 and 20 at all times, even when the IOC
is sleeping (not being accessed by the MCU).
081 AuxBus problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
090 EEPROM test #1
failed
ƒ
091 EEPROM test #2
failed
ƒ
ƒ
5
You may have an option board installed that
is causing a problem with the AuxBus. Try
removing each option board and turning
power off and back on.
Verify that R64 is installed (RF board, near
U1).
Check the voltage at pin 1 of the IOC (RF,
U1). If it isn’t approximately 6V, U2 may be
bad (6V regulators).
Check the voltage at pin 28 of the IOC (RF–
U1). It should be between 5 and 6V. If it is
zero volts, you probably have a short
somewhere on the AuxBus line. Turn power
OFF, then measure pin 28 of U1 to ground. If
it is a short, pull the control board out to see
if the short is on that board.
If the voltage at pin 28 is between 5V and
6V, try pressing the B AN D + button a
number of times while watching the voltage
carefully (use an oscilloscope if possible).
The voltage should drop below 5V briefly if
the MCU (CTRL-U6) is sending a message
to the IOC. If the voltage does not change at
all, the MCU itself may not be sending
AuxBus messages.
Check the AuxBus signal at the MCU, pin 40
(CTRL-U6). If you don’t see this voltage
drop below 5V briefly when the band is
changed, the MCU may not be functioning
(075).
If you saw the message INFO 090 or
INFO 091 on the LCD, one of the
EEPROM write tests has failed.
Check all voltages on the EEPROM (CTRLU7).
Remove the control board and inspect U7 and
surrounding traces. Verify that U7 is properly
soldered.
110 AF amp not
working
Receiver (100-149)
Problem
100 Low (or no) audio
output from receiver,
or general receiver
gain problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Troubleshooting Steps
If you hear audio output on some bands but
not all of them, check the band-pass and lowpass filters and T-R switch (120)
Make sure you have headphones or speaker
connected, and AF GAIN not at minimum
Check for missing audio filter option
(KDSP2 or KAF2) or their bypass jumpers
Check the key jack for a short to ground
Make sure RF GAIN is at maximum
The AGC threshold control (R1, Control
board) may be set incorrectly. Typical
voltage at U2 pin 5 is 3.80 volts (no antenna,
RF GAIN at max). You can set R1 for a
slightly higher voltage at U2 pin 5 to increase
the no-signal I.F. gain. If R1 is adjusted,
you'll need to re-adjust CAL S HI and CAL S
LO (S-meter).
If you have the 160 m/RXANT option board
installed, you may have menu entry RANT
turned ON but no receive antenna connected;
this may affect only one band since RANT
can be set individually for each band.
Peak the band-pass filters if you have not
already done so
Check for ground shorts in the LPF and BPF
by first resetting all of the relays (065)
Turn the AF GAIN to maximum
If you don’t hear any “hiss” at the receiver
output, troubleshoot the AF amplifier (110)
Check the 8V regulated supply voltage and
troubleshoot if necessary (053)
Measure the 8R line (+8V receive) at the
anode of D6 on the RF board. It should be 8V
+/- 0.5V. If not, look for a problem in the 8V
switching circuitry (control board).
Try using signal tracing (see procedure later
in this section)
ƒ
ƒ
114 AGC or S-meter
not working
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
120 Signal loss only
on some bands
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
6
Use the menu to set a sidetone level of 60
(ST L 060 ). Hold S P O T . If you hear a
strong tone, the A.F. amplifier itself is
probably working; check the mute circuit
(CTRL-Q6 and Q7) and trace the volume
control lines back to the product detector
(RF-U11)
Remove the control board and inspect the
entire A.F. amplifier and mute circuit for
mis-installed components, shorts, and opens
If AGC appears to be working but the Smeter isn’t, try re-calibrating the meter using
CAL S HI and CAL S LO . If the Smeter is “stuck,” you may have an open,
short, or incorrect component in the area of
U2 on the control board.
Make sure the RF gain control is at
maximum
If the AGC and S-meter are both not
working, you may have a dead 5.068 MHz
oscillator crystal, X1 (control board). Listen
for the 2nd harmonic of X1 at about 10.136
MHz while touching a screwdriver blade to
pin 7 of U1 (NE602). If you can’t hear this
signal, try soldering a 22 k resistor from pin 7
to pin 3 on U1 (NE602).
If you have the 160 m/RXANT option
installed, make sure you have menu entry
rANT set to OFF , or if it is ON that you
have a receive antenna connected
If K60XV option connectors are installed
(J13 and J15 on RF board), but the module is
removed, install C6 and W6.
Peak appropriate band-pass filters
Inspect T-R switch components and voltages
Trace signal from band-pass filters to the
antenna using an RF signal generator
Make sure the VCO is oscillating on affected
bands by using the frequency counter
140 Receiver current
drain is too high
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
If you saw the message INFO 140 , your
receive-mode current drain was measured at
over 500 mA during normal operation.
Continue with the checks below.
Use DISPLAY to show voltage and current
on the LCD. If the current shown is > 300
mA with no incoming signal or > 200 mA
with the bargraph turned OFF and no signal,
you may have a short or excessive load on
the 8V or 8R lines (053).
You may have the speaker and/or external
speaker jack wired incorrectly. This can place
a short across the audio amp output, causing
very low audio output (if any) and current as
high as 500 to 800 mA.
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Transmitter (150-199)
Problem
150 General
Transmitter problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
155 Power output is
low or zero
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Troubleshooting Steps
If power output is too low, go to 155
If power output slowly increases during keydown, go to 160
If current drain on transmit is too high for the
given power level or you see HI CUR, go to
175
If the transmitter output power seems to be
unstable go to 160
If the transmitter stops transmitting by itself
go to 170
If the keyer isn’t working properly, go to 180
Use the signal tracing procedure
You may have CAL CUR (current limit) set
too low; 2.00 A recommended at 10 W
Check power output when using a 50Ω
dummy load; if the output is correct on a
dummy load but not when using an antenna,
your antenna is probably not matched
Install the bottom cover (all six screws) to
prevent RF pick-up by low-level circuits
Check all component values in the RF
ƒ
ƒ
160 Power output
fluctuates
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
7
detector; you may have two resistors
swapped (R67/R68, R66/R69) or the wrong
detector diode (D9, should be 1N5711)
You may have a short in the LPF or BPF;
reset all of the relays before trying to look for
shorts (065)
Examine transformers T1-T4 carefully; these
must be wound as indicated in part III of the
RF board assembly section (see this section
for drawings)
Check all DC voltages in the transmitter (RF
board, Q5/Q6/Q7/Q8) as well as the ALC
circuitry (control board, U10A and RF board,
Q24).
One component that should be checked
specifically is R50 (driver), which can open
if the driver current goes too high.
Make an RF probe and signal-trace through
the transmitter to find where signal is lost
(see probe and procedure later in this section)
Check for any components getting hot
Turn the K2 OFF and remove the heat sink;
inspect all parts and check for shorts or opens
If you stay in key-down (T U N E ) mode for
several seconds, it is normal to see some
increase in power; this is due to slow junction
heating in the final amplifier transistors. It is
not indicative of a problem unless current
drain is too high for the given power output.
If power goes up and down significantly
during normal keying, you may have a
poorly-matched antenna OR you may have
power set too high for your battery or power
supply to handle; try reducing power to see if
it stabilizes
If you have seen a slow (10-20Hz) oscillation
superimposed on the transmitter's output
signal, it could be due to ALC modulation.
Increase the value of R98 (RF board) to the
largest size that permits full output on 10 m.
If the transmitter is truly unstable
ƒ
170 Output power
drops to zero suddenly
ƒ
175 Current drain too
high on transmit (or
HI CUR warning)
ƒ
ƒ
180 Keyer Problem
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
(oscillating) even when connected to a 50-Ω
load, you may have an incorrect component
value or a toroid-winding error; go through
the checks at 155
Make sure none of the diodes in the T-R
switch circuits are in backwards
If you have transmit power set too high for
your battery or power supply, the supply
voltage may drop so low on transmit that it
resets the MCU (CTRL-U6) or the I/O
controller (RF-U1). Reduce power.
You may have power set higher than the final
amplifier can achieve, resulting in overdrive
of all transmitter stages. Try reducing power
to see if normal current drain is observed at
lower power levels
Damaged PA transistors or other components
could cause inefficiency in any stage of the
transmitter. Check all DC voltages and
components; signal trace if necessarily (155)
If the keyer is stuck at a fixed speed or the
sidetone pitch won’t change, go into the
menu and see what sidetone pitch your have.
If it’s not in the range of 0.40-0.80 kHz, you
may have bad data in the EEPROM. See
“Resetting the Configuration to Defaults” in
the Advanced Operating Features section.
If the keyer is generally erratic when
transmitting and seems to get worse as power
is increased, you probably have RF leaking
into the keyline. Try bypassing your key with
.001 µF capacitors; also try 100 µH RF
chokes in series with the paddle and ground
connections.
If your antenna is connected directly to the
rig with no coax (i.e., internal ATU), the only
way to cure RF problems with the keyer and
other circuits may be to reduce transmit
power, seek a better antenna match, or
improve your ground system
Operation and Alignment (200-249)
Problem
201 EEPROM
initialized
ƒ
230 BFO not
connected to frequency
counter
231 VCO not
connected to frequency
counter
232 CAL PLL on
wrong band
ƒ
235 PLL ref. oscillator
range error
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
8
Troubleshooting Steps
INFO 201 is an informational message
only, not a problem indication. You will see
INFO 201 one time on power-up. The
only other time you might see this message is
if you install a new version of the firmware
that requires a reformat of EEPROM. (In
most cases new firmware should not cause an
EEPROM reformat, however.)
INFO 230 is displayed if you try to use
CAL FIL without the frequency counter
connected to the BFO test point (RF-TP2)
INFO 231 is displayed if you try to use
CAL PLL without the frequency counter
connected to the VCO test point (RF-TP1)
INFO 232 is most likely to be displayed
if you use CAL PLL without first
selecting 40 meters.
INFO 235 is displayed if CAL PLL
cannot complete VFO linearization due to
inadequate PLL reference oscillator range
(RF-Q19).
You may have the frequency counter probe
on the wrong test point (should be on TP1)
Re-test the PLL reference oscillator using the
procedure described under “PLL Reference
Oscillator Test” in Part II of the RF board
Alignment and Test section.
If the PLL reference oscillator range is found
to be inadequate, X1 may be defective. Also
check D16, D17, C84, C85, and L31 for
proper value.
Signal Generator
Signal Tracing
A simple crystal oscillator (Figure 2) can be used in lieu of a signal generator.
This oscillator takes its output from the crystal itself, resulting in fairly low
harmonic content. This results in very slight “pulling” of the oscillator
frequency as you adjust the output level, but this is of no concern for signal
tracing. The oscillator will run on voltages as low as 8 V, but 12 V or more is
recommended to guarantee enough output for all signal tracing steps. The
components are not critical, and can vary 20% with little variation in
performance. Nearly any NPN RF transistor will work in the circuit.
Signal tracing is the primary method by which radio equipment is tested and
repaired. You can solve nearly all receiver and transmitter problems yourself
by following the steps in this section carefully.
RF Probe Assembly
Your K2 kit includes a complete RF probe, including the PC board, coax,
and connectors. The switch spacing tool, which you used in assembling the
Front Panel, doubles as the PC board for the probe. The RF probe (Figure
1) converts RF signals to DC so they can be measured using a DMM. The DC
readings on your DMM will be approximately equal to the signal voltage in
Vrms (root-mean-square).
E1
probe
tip
E2
C1
.01µF
R1
4.7Mohm
+
COAX,
24" (60 cm)
P2
10 MHz (see text)
2N2222A,
2N3904, etc.
P1
RF OUTPUT
Level
(-)
5601⁄2
To DMM
ground
22K
-
(+)
D1
1N34A
.01µF
8-14VDC
39pF
10K
150pF
50 or 1001⁄2
(non-inductive)
Figure 1
Assembly Instructions: Use a discarded lead from a large diode such as an
SB530 or 95SQ015 as the probe tip (E1). It should be about 1" (2.5 cm) long.
All other components for the probe can be found in the MISCELLANEOUS
bag. An insulated alligator clip is provided for ground (E2). It should be
connected to the board using 4" of black insulated hookup wire. Two banana
plugs are supplied for connecting the probe to your DMM (P1-P2). Use
RG174 coax between the probe board and the banana plugs. The coax should
be secured to the board using one cable tie. Thread the cable tie through the
two holes provided, near the coax end of the board.
Figure 2
Any crystal frequency that falls in or near a ham band can be used, but 10
MHz is recommended since our signal tracing measurements were done using
this band. If you have only completed the K2 up through part II of the RF
board (40 m), you'll have to use a crystal in the 6.8 to 7.5 MHz range.
You may wish to build the oscillator into an enclosure fitted with a BNC
connector and level control. Use short leads for all wiring. Use very short
leads (2”) or coax to connect the signal generator to the K2’s antenna jack.
To use the Probe: Connect E2 to the nearest ground test point, and plug the
banana jacks into your DMM. Set the DMM for DC volts (20 or 30 V scale).
Avoid touching the tip or discrete components while taking measurements.
9
Preparation for Receiver Signal Tracing
1.
2.
3.
Verify that basic display and control circuits are functioning.
Using your DMM, check the 5-V and 8-V regulator outputs.
Measure the voltages on the anodes (right end) of D6 and D7 (on the RF
board, near the I/O controller, U1). In receive mode, D6’s anode should
be at about 8 V, and D7’s should be near 0 V.
4. Connect the RF probe’s output to your DMM’s +/- DC input jacks.
5. Select a 2 or 3-V DC range.
6. The DMM should read close to 0.000 V DC. The reading should increase
when you touch the RF probe tip with your finger.
7. Turn on the K2 and switch to 30 m (or the appropriate band for your
signal generator). Select CW Normal mode.
8. Using the menu, select OPT PERF .
9. Use CAL FIL to set up CW normal filter FL1 for a bandwidth of
1.50 . If you can hear some noise on your receiver, set up the BFO for
this filter as described in the Operation section of the manual. Otherwise,
set the BFO to the factory default value.
10. Exit CAL FIL , then select the 1.50-bandwidth filter using X F I L .
T-R Switch
Band-Pass
Filters
XMTR
Low-pass
Filters
U1 (I/O Controller)
Synthesizer
RCVR
PLL Reference Oscillator and VCO (RF board schematic, sheet 1)
1.
Figure 3
2.
Receiver and Synthesizer
3.
In the following steps you’ll use the RF probe and other techniques to find the
stage where the received signal is getting attenuated. (Figure 3 shows the
approximate location of the synthesizer, receiver, and other circuits on the RF
board.) You can then use voltage tables, resistance checks and close
examination to find the bad component or connection.
4.
5.
Perform all measurements in the order listed. In general, your measurements
can vary 20-25% from those shown and still be acceptable. Space is provided
to record your own measurements (in pencil), which will be very useful if you
need to re-test a particular circuit after repairs.
10
Connect the RF probe’s ground clip to the ground jumper near the
synthesizer circuitry.
Reference Oscillator Output: Measure the reference oscillator signal at
pin 1 of U4 (MC145170), which is near the front-left corner of the RF
board (near the control board). Expected: 0.8-1.8 Vrms. Actual: ______.
VCO Output: Measure the VCO signal at pin 3 of U3 (LT1252).
Expected: 0.30-0.40 Vrms. Actual: ______. If this signal is zero, you
may have the secondary winding of T5 reversed.
VCO Buffer Output: Measure the signal on pin 6 of U3. Expected:
0.60-0.75Vrms. Actual: ______.
Check the VCO frequency (RF Board, Alignment and Test Part II).
BFO (RF, sheet 2)
Mixer, I.F. Amplifiers, and Crystal Filter (sheet 2)
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Attenuator Off Test: Measure the signal at the end of R72 closest to
Q21. Expected: .077 Vrms. Actual: _____.
2. Preamp Off Test: Measure the signal at the end of R73 closest to Z6.
Expected: .077 Vrms. Actual: _____. (Preamp gain will be tested later.)
3. Composite Mixer Output: Measure the signal at the right end of R80.
Expected: .079 Vrms. Actual: _____.
4. Post-Mixer Amp Output: Measure the signal at the case (collector) of
Q22 (2N5109). Expected: 2.20 Vrms. Actual: _____.
5. -5 dB Pad Output: Measure the signal at jumper W2, near the crystal
filter. Expected: 1.40 Vrms. Actual: _____.
6. Crystal Filter Output: Touch the RF probe to jumper W3, near the
crystal filter. Adjust the VFO for a peak in the DMM reading. Expected:
0.35 Vrms. Actual: _____. If this reading is low, it may be due to a nonoptimal setting of the BFO in CAL FIL. Try a different BFO setting, then
adjust the VFO for peak again and re-measure the filter loss. (Note: this
measurement exaggerates the filter loss because the input to the filter is a
composite of many signals besides the desired one.)
7. T7 Step-Up Ratio: Measure the signal at U12, pin 4 (MC1350).
Expected: 0.4-0.8 Vrms. Actual: _____. Note: Limited by D40-D41.
8. I.F. Amp Saturated Output: Measure the signal at U12, pin 8. It may
be anywhere between 0.00 and 0.30 Vrms. Adjust the signal generator
level until the DMM reads approx. 0.15 Vrms. (If your signal generator
is running from a 9-V battery you may have trouble getting the output
this high. Try running the generator from 12V or more in this case.)
9. 2nd Crystal Filter Output: Measure the signal at U11, pin 1 (NE602).
Expected: approx. 0.27 Vrms. Actual: _____.
10. Product Detector Saturated Output: Measure the signal at U11, pin 5
(NE602). Expected: 0.58 Vrms. Actual: _____.
BFO Output: Measure the signal on U11, pin 6 (NE602). Expected:
0.20-0.70 Vrms. Actual: ______.
Use the menu to select CAL FCTR . Press EDIT again to confirm; the
display will now show a frequency reading (it will depend on where you
have the frequency counter probe connected).
BFO Buffer Output: Measure the amplitude of the signal at TP2 using
the RF probe. Expected: 0.025-0.070 Vrms. Actual: _______.
Exit CAL FCTR . Check the BFO frequency (RF Board, Alignment
and Test Part II).
Low-Pass Filter, Bandpass Filter, and T-R Switch (RF, sheet 3)
Turn both the attenuator and preamp OFF using P R E / AT T .
Set RF GAIN to minimum.
Set AF GAIN to about 10% and connect a pair of headphones.
Switch to the 30 m (or the correct band for your signal generator).
Connect a signal generator or test oscillator to the antenna jack. Set the
signal generator for 0.14 Vrms as indicated by the RF probe.
6. If possible, tune the VFO until you hear the signal. It may be quite strong
even if your receiver is attenuating the signal somewhere. Find the
approximate signal peak by ear. Set AF GAIN to minimum.
7. Align the band-pass filter for the current band if possible: (a) Put the RF
probe on the banded end (cathode) of D6 (to the left of the I/O controller,
U1); (b) adjust the band-pass filter for the current band for a peak
indication on the DMM (on 30 m: adjust L8 and L9).
8. Aligning the band-pass filter may have changed the input impedance of
the receiver. Put the RF probe back on the antenna input and adjust the
signal generator for 0.14 Vrms again.
9. Low-Pass Filter Output: Measure the signal at jumper W1, near the PA
transistors (Q7/Q8). Expected: 0.13 Vrms. Actual: _______.
10. T-R Switch #1 Output: Measure the signal at W6, which is just to the
right of the transverter/60 meter option connector, J13 (near the back
edge of the board). Expected: .093 Vrms. Actual: _______.
11. Band-Pass Filter Output: Measure the signal at the left side of D6.
Expected: .086 Vrms. Actual: ______.
12. T-R Switch #2 Output: Measure the signal at the right side of D6.
Expected: .077 Vrms. Actual: ______.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AGC (Control Board)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
11
Disconnect the RF probe from the DMM. Connect the DMM’s (-) lead to
chassis ground.
Turn the signal generator completely OFF (remove its power).
Set RF GAIN to maximum.
No-Signal AGC, Max. IF Gain: Measure the DC voltage on pin 1 of U2
(LM833). Expected: 3.6 V. Actual: _____.
Set RF GAIN to minimum.
6.
7.
8.
9.
No-Signal AGC, Min. IF Gain: Measure the DC voltage on pin 1 of U2.
Expected: 4.6 V. Actual: _____.
Turn the signal generator back on.
AGC @ Saturation: Measure the DC voltage on pin 1 of U2. Expected:
6.9 V. Actual: _____. Adjust the VFO to make sure this voltage is at its
peak.
I.F. Amp AGC Input: Measure the DC voltage on pin 5 of U12 (RF,
sheet 2). Expected: 5.0 V. Actual: _____.
Final Steps
If you have completed receiver signal tracing and any necessary repairs, you
should then do the following:
1.
2.
Product Detector and AF Amp (RF, Sheet 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
Set up the DMM to read AC volts (use a 2 or 3-V meter range).
Touch the (+) lead of the DMM to pin 5 of U11 (NE602). Decrease the
signal generator level until the AC voltage at pin 5 reads .025 Vrms. (The
K2’s RF GAIN control should still be at minimum.)
Disconnect the headphones and speaker. Turn the AF GAIN control to
maximum.
Measure the signal at the speaker jack, P5 pin 1 (near the on/off switch,
S1). Expected: 1.6 Vrms. Actual: _____.
Transmitter
The following procedure can be used to isolate problems with the transmitter
(the transmitter area of the RF board is identified in Figure 3). CW mode is
used for these tests. If you’re having difficulty with the SSB adapter, make
sure the transmitter works on CW first, then proceed with the signal tracing
instructions in the SSB adapter manual.
I.F. Amp Noise Gain (RF, sheet 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Re-install the bottom cover and heat sink.
Re-do calibration of the VCO, BFO, band-pass filters, crystal filters, etc.
as needed (see RF Board Alignment and Test, parts I, II, and III). If you
peaked L8 and L9 when signal tracing through the 30-m band-pass filter,
you’ll need to re-peak C21 and C23 on 20 m.
Leave the frequency counter cable connected to TP2 (BFO)
Connect the speaker and re-install the top cover.
Once you find a location where the signal appears to be much lower than
expected, stop signal tracing and check that circuit. Check all component
values and DC voltages (see DC Voltage Tables). Closely examine the PC
board for unsoldered pins and solder bridges. One of most likely causes of a
transmitter problem is a poorly-soldered toroid lead. Re-heat any suspect
leads or solder joints.
Turn the signal generator off and disconnect it from the antenna jack.
Connect a 50-ohm dummy load.
Turn off all nearby equipment (especially computers or signal sources).
Set AF GAIN to maximum. Set RF GAIN to minimum.
Make sure the preamp and attenuator are both OFF.
Verify that FL1 is selected (bandwidth = 1.50), as well as CW Normal
mode.
AF Output, Min. IF gain: Setup the DMM for its lowest AC volts
range. Measure the signal at the speaker jack, P5 (near the on/off switch,
S1). Expected: 0.000-0.001 Vrms. Actual: _____.
AF Output, Max. IF gain: Set RF GAIN to maximum. Measure the
signal at P5, pin 1. Expected: 0.007-0.013 Vrms. Actual: _____.
Preamp Noise Gain: Turn on the preamp. Measure the signal at P5.
Expected: 0.030-0.060 Vrms. Actual: _____.
Noise Increase w/Antenna: Connect an antenna. The signal at P5 should
increase substantially even if atmospheric conditions are quiet. A typical
reading on 30 or 40 m is 0.20-0.40 Vrms. In general, the longer or higher
your antenna is, the greater the noise increase will be.
Preparation for Transmitter Signal Tracing
1.
2.
3.
12
Make sure basic display and control circuits are functioning before
attempting transmitter testing.
Remove the SSB adapter (if installed) and install temporary jumpers at
J9 and J10. Temporarily re-install C167 (.001 µF or higher) between pins
7 and 12 of J11. (See RF board, sheet 2.)
12 V supply check: Use your DMM to check the DC voltage at the
cathode (banded end) of D10 (right edge of the board). Expected: 9 to 14
V. Actual: _____. Verify that the same voltage (or slightly lower) can be
found on the case (collector) of Q5 and the tab (collector) of Q6 when the
K2 is turned on and is in receive mode.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Sidetone (Control Board)
If you don’t have an RF probe, you can build the one from Figure 1.
Note: do not use the RF probe to directly measure the transmitter’s
power output unless you have the power set for 2 W or less. The 1N34A
diode in the RF probe may be damaged at higher power levels.
Test Shared Circuits: Do the receiver signal tracing (above). This tests
a number of circuits that are shared by both transmitter and receiver,
including the VCO, BFO, BFO buffer, T-R switches, band-pass filters,
and low-pass filters. It’s important not to skip this step, even if the
receiver seems to be working correctly. Shared circuits that are working
marginally may affect the transmitter more than the receiver, so their
actual output levels must be measured.
Set up the K2 for 40 meters (about 7100 kHz), CW Normal mode.
Plug in a 50-ohm dummy load (10-W or higher rating).
Set the power level to 5 watts.
Connect a hand key or keyer paddle to the key jack.
Connect a speaker or headphones.
Use the menu to set ST L 030, ST P 0.50, and T-R 0.05.
Select hand key mode (INP HAND ).
Set up a transmit current limit of 2.50 amps using CAL CUR .
Note: If the sidetone is already functioning correctly, you can skip this
section.
1.
Make sure you’re in CW mode. The sidetone will not function in SSB
modes.
2. Disconnect the headphones and speaker.
3. Use the menu to set ST L to 255 (maximum sidetone level).
4. Use the V O X button to select CW TEST mode (the mode letter will then
flash). This is a safe setting for sidetone tests, since there is no power
output.
5. Set your DMM for AC volts, 2 or 3-V range. Touch the positive lead of
the DMM to pin 4 of U8 on the control board (18C452). (This is the
source of the sidetone signal.)
6. Key the transmitter using the hand key (T U N E does not activate the
sidetone). Measure the AC voltage on pin 4 of U8. Expected: 2.5 Vrms.
Actual: _____. Un-key the transmitter.
7. Move the DMM probe to the drain of Q5 (control board, 2N7000). Key
the transmitter and measure the AC drain voltage. Expected: 2.4 Vrms.
Actual: _____. If this is zero, either Q5 is defective or there is no drain
voltage supply from pin 1 of U8 (MAX534, D-to-A converter).
8. Measure the AC voltage on pin 7 of U10 (LMC660). Expected: 0.5
Vrms. Actual: _____.
9. Measure the AC voltage on pin 8 of U9 (LM380). Expected: 0.5 Vrms.
Actual: _____.
10. Measure the AC voltage on pin 6 of U9. Expected: 0.5 Vrms. Actual:
_____. This signal should also be present on the speaker jack, P5 pin 1
(RF board).
11. Return the ST L setting to 030.
12. Use the V O X button to put the transmitter back into OPERate mode.
Basic voltage checks (RF schematic, sheet 2)
Note: When using T U N E to key the transmitter, be sure to tap T U N E again
within 5 seconds or less each time. This will reduce the chance of damaging
any components in the transmitter that are consuming excess power.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Switch to voltage/current display mode using D I S P L AY .
Hold T U N E to key the transmitter, and verify that supply voltage does
not drop by more than about 0.8 V. If it drops more than this, either your
power supply is inadequate or the transmitter is drawing excess current.
Actual transmit-mode voltage: _____ V. Current: _____ A.
Return to normal display mode using D I S P L AY .
Measure the key-down DC voltages on the anodes (right end) of D6 and
D7 (near U1, the I/O controller). During transmit, the voltage on the
anode of D7 should be about 8 V, and on D6, near 0 V. Actual TX-mode
voltages, D6: _____ V; D7: _____ V.
Use T U N E and note the actual power output: _____ W.
ALC (control board)
1.
2.
3.
13
Make sure the POWER control is set for 5 watts, and that you’re in
CW/Operate mode.
Set up the DMM for DC volts, 20 or 30-V range.
Power Control Test (VPWR line): The VPWR line, pin 2 of U8
(MAX534), is where transmit power control begins. On key-down, the
microprocessor (U6) starts increasing the voltage on VPWR until it sees
the desired power indication from the RF output detector (RF board,
4.
5.
2.
sheet 3, lower right-hand corner). To test VPWR, set the DMM for DC
volts, then measure the DC voltage on pin 2 of U8 when T U N E is
pressed. Expected: 0.7-2.5 VDC. Actual: _____.
If VPWR reading is high (> 4.5 V): The ALC software will set VPWR
to its highest level (about 5 V) if the transmitter cannot be driven to the
requested power level. This happens for one of two reasons: (a) the
transmitter gain is low (or transmitter isn’t working at all); (b) the RF
detector has an incorrect component. Check all component values in the
RF detector. If you can’t find a problem with the RF detector, continue
with the next signal tracing section (transmit mixer, etc.).
If VPWR reading is low (< 0.4V): VPWR can be too low because: (a)
the ALC software is being “fooled” by a signal from the RF detector that
says the power is higher than it really is; (b) because U8 on the control
board is defective or has a pin shorted to ground or not soldered. Check
all component values in the RF detector (RF, sheet 3). If these appear
correct, check DC voltages on U8 (control), as well as resistance to
ground on all pins.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Transmit Mixer, Buffer, Band-Pass Filter, T-R Switch (RF, sheets 2-3)
Note: The measurements in this section and the next may vary widely,
especially if you do the measurements on a band other than 40 m. However,
the ratio between any two back-to-back measurements should remain fairly
constant, and is a good indication of gain or loss of a stage in the transmitter.
For example, the ratio of measurements in steps 3 and 2 below is about 12.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DC Voltage Tables
Connect the RF probe to the DMM. Set the DMM for a 2 or 3-V DC
volts range.
Xmit Mixer Output: Measure the key-down signal at U10, pin 4.
Expected: 0.016 Vrms. Actual: _____.
Buffer Output: Measure the key-down signal at U9, pin 6 (LT1252).
Expected: 0.200 Vrms. Actual: _____.
Band-Pass Filter Output: Measure the key-down signal at W6.
Expected: 0.030 Vrms. Actual: _____.
T-R Switch #1 Output: Measure the key-down signal at the anode of
D1. Expected: 0.029 Vrms. Actual: _____.
The tables on the following pages provide DC voltages for all ICs and
transistors on each of the three boards, as well as the diodes in the T-R switch
(RF board). Typically, your readings will match these within 10%.The
voltages were measured using a high-impedance DMM (10-11 Megohm).
The K2’s internal voltmeter can also be used for most measurements.
Receive-mode voltages are listed except as noted. Most of the Control board
measurements were made with the Front Panel module removed for easier
access. Exceptions are indicated by (**).
Equipment Setup: Supply voltage 14.0 V; no antenna; LCD = NITE; GRPH
= DOT; receive mode; no headphones or speaker connected; RF GAIN midrange; AF GAIN minimum; OFFSET mid-range.
Pre-driver, Driver, and PA (RF, sheet 4)
1.
Driver Input: Measure the key-down signal on the base of Q6
(2SC2166; pins are labeled B, C, E). Expected: 0.026 Vrms. Actual:
_____.
Driver Output: Measure the key-down signal at the tab (collector) of
Q6. Expected: 1.8 Vrms. Actual: _____.
PA Input (Q7): Measure the key-down signal at the base of Q7
(2SC1969 on bottom of the board; pins are labeled on the top). Expected:
0.38 Vrms. Actual: _____.
PA Input (Q8): Measure the key-down signal at the base of Q8.
Expected: 0.38 Vrms. Actual: _____.
RF Detector Input: Measure the key-down signal on the anode (nonbanded end) of D9 (1N5711, middle of the right edge of the board).
Expected: 2.0 Vrms. Actual: _____. (This voltage should be fairly
constant regardless of the band used.)
PA Transistor Tests: If the PA input voltages were higher than
expected, but the RF detector input was too low, one or both PA
transistors could be defective. After checking DC voltages and
transformer leads, turn off power to the K2 and use your DMM’s
diode/transistor test range to test the transistors. With the DMM’s
positive lead on the base of Q7, you should measure about 0.6 k to the
emitter or collector. With the DMM’s negative lead on the base of Q7,
you should measure about 1.3 k to the emitter and > 3 k to the collector.
These also apply to Q8.
Pre-Driver Output: Measure the key-down signal at the case (collector)
of Q5 (2N5109). Expected: 0.120 Vrms. Actual: _____.
14
CONTROL BOARD (Front panel removed except ** = CAL FCTR mode w/front Panel plugged in; * = approximate and/or may fluctuate)
Ref.
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Pin
E
B
C
E
B
C
S
G
D
S
G
D
S
G
D
G
S
D
G
S
D
E
B
C
E
B
C
E
B
C
E
B
C
VDC
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
7.3
7.5
0.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
0 or 5
0-5
2.7*
5-6*
5-6*
2.7*
5-6*
5-6*
7.0**
7.7**
8.0**
0.0
0.7**
2 **
0.0
0.7**
2**
0.2*
0.9*
13.5
Ref.
Q12
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
Pin
E
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IN
GND
OUT
IN
GND
OUT
VDC
6.3
7.0
8.0
1.4
1.4
0.0
6.9
6.9
8.0
7.5
8.0
6.9
6.9
6.9
0.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
8.0
0.4*
13.7
13.7
0.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
13.7
13.7
0.0
8.0
13.7
0.0
5.0
Ref.
U6
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
VDC
5.0
0.0*
5.0*
0.2*
2.6*
4.7*
0-5*
0-5*
0 or 5
5.0**
5.0
0.0
2.3*
2.4*
2**
0-5*
2.7*
0.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
15
Ref.
U6
U7
U8
Pin
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
VDC
0.0
0.2*
0.8*
5.0
1.2*
0.2*
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
0-5*
5.0**
5.0
0.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
0 or 5
5.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
0-5*
0-5*
Ref.
U9
U10
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
VDC
0.4*
.02*
.02*
0.0
0.0
6.7
13.7
6.8
7.7*
5.0*
5.0*
8.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0-8*
0-8*
0-8*
0.0
0-8*
0-8*
0-8
Ref.
Pin
VDC
FRONT-PANEL BOARD (* = approximate and/or may fluctuate; ** = not accessible due to LCD)
Ref.
Q1
Q2
U1
Pin
E
B
C
E
B
C
VDC
2.7
3.4
5.0
2.7
3.4
5.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
Ref.
U1
U2
Pin
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
VDC
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.0
0.2*
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
0.1*
0.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
Ref.
U3
U4
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
VDC
0.0
5.0
0.8*
>0
>0
4.0*
2.0*
5.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.02*
0.2*
3.1*
0.8*
4.0*
0.1
3.6*
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.0
3.6*
>0
>0
>0
>0
5.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.02*
0.2*
0.0
16
Ref.
U4
Pin
15
16
17
18
19
20
VDC
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4*
0.0
0.0
Ref.
Pin
VDC
Ref.
Pin
VDC
RF BOARD (Shaded areas indicate transmit-mode voltage measurements)
Ref.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Q2
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q10
Q11
Pin
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
S
G
D
E
B
C
B
C
E
B
C
E
B
C
E
S
G
D
E
B
C
VDC
0.0
7.5
8.0
7.5
8.0
7.5
8.0
7.5
0.0
8.0
8.0
7.5
0.0
7.5
0.0
8.0
0.0
0.6
1.3
12.4
1.1
13.3
0.4
0.6
13.4
0.0
0.6
13.4
0.0
1.6
8.1
1.6
0.0
0.6
1.3
Ref.
Q12
Q13
Q16
Q17
Q18
Q19
Q20
Q21
Q22
Q23
Q24
Pin
S
G
D
E
B
C
E
B
C
S
G
D
G
S
D
G
S
D
S
G
D
E
B
C
E
B
C
S
G
D
G
S
D
VDC
0.0
6.0
0.0
0.6
1.3
7.5
0.0
0.6
2.2
0.0
2.2
2 to 3
-1.0
2 to 3
6.3
0.0
0.8
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
1.6
2.3
13.2
1.3
2.0
12.5
0.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
1.2
1.3
Ref.
U1
U2
U3
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
IN
GND
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
VDC
6.0
6.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.15
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.5
13.7
0.0
6.0
0.0
4.3
4.1
0.0
0.0
17
Ref.
U3
U4
U5
U6
Pin
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VDC
4.3
8.0
0.0
2.1
2.4
0.0
2.3
5.0
5.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
2.0
0 to 4
5.0
0 to 8
0 to 4
0 to 4
0.0
4.0
4.0
0 to 8
8.0
Ref.
U8
U9
U10
U11
U12
Pin
IN
GND
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VDC
8.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
6.9
6.9
0.0
0.0
6.9
13.8
0.0
1.4
1.4
0.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
5.5
6.1
1.4
1.4
0.0
5.0
5.0
6.1
5.6
6.1
7.9
7.9
0.0
2.5
3.9
2.5
0.0
7.9
Ref.
Pin
VDC
J1
C19
C30
K6
C31 C32
K4
C22
C42
C34
C25
C24
K2
C9
L1
L3 C13 C4 K3
C5 J15
K7
C33
L5
K5
C7
C48
C35
J2
S5
S3
S1
C7
C6
C8
X1
R1
S6
S4
S2
C9
C10
+C1
R3
1
U6
+
C93
C17
R4
D2
RP6
5.1K
U5
P1
U4
R3
C4
C15
7805
2930
U3
LINEAR
R1
AUDIO
8V
U6
R12
5V
Q3
R4
C5 C6
D4
C7 C8
Q2
Q1
LINEAR
10K
D5
U3
1
T2
J7
SSB
1252
C177
J5
1
C172
J11
U9
1
R1
C20
D37
X3
U7
R10
P2
U2
25
R60
C2
R11
R9
25
X2
C22
Q1
4 3 2 1
10
R62
1
J1
J2
1
R17
Q7
Q6
R16
Z1
Q2
20
S7
L34
Q25
R82
D3
+
1
R88
R89
+
Q8
1
C3
R14 R5
S14
S11
R6
R7 S8
P3
C181
+
S15
S12
S9
1
SPKR
P5
X8
X7
S1
Q10
C38
Q9
L1
P6
COUNTER
S16
1
K2 FP Rev. B
C 2002 ELECRAFT
D6
S13
S10
K2 CONTROL Rev. B
C 2002 ELECRAFT
RP5 RP4
470
82K
1
D12
X11
X10
X9
D29
F1
AUX 12V
1
- + P3
C196
C212
AUX
RF
1 P6
L20
RP2 82K
U10
W3
J10
J6
C41
C30 C32+
C39
C33
C40
C35
C36
LMC660
LINEAR
R20
3
R115
C24 1 RP3
47K
C29
R113
R111
X6
4
1
RP4
100K
D33
2 T7 1 RP5
100K
D32
C166
D31
J9
W2
1
1
D9
C77
C229
C226
+ J3
C202
C220
C221
L24
J12 C170
R83
C162
R85
R84
Q12 R68
R67
C227
K11
K10
C222
C201
C192
C199
L17
L19
C214 L22
K9
C203
R90
D30
W5
C164
3 8 0 U9
D3
1
Q22
L25 K12
L23
C163
R79
Q23
D39
C176
X5
C169
C165
R107
RP7
Q5 33K
C28
+
R101
TP2
MAX534
C111
1
C178
D38
R81
R80
L18
J4
C218 L21
7
4
3
6
C126 C225
C160
Q24
Z6
R97
C168
U8
Elecraft
RF Probe
320
T6
K17 R73
U1 AND ITS SOCKET ARE MOUNTED
ON THE OTHER SIDE
C21
15
C19
T4
Q13 C138 +
C155
C167
INSTALL SOCKET FIRST
PIC18C452
C18
Z2
2
Q8
8
B
K8
W1 C197
C191
C 2002 ELECRAFT
C153
X4
1
Z1
T3
5
C190
J14
K2 RF Rev. B
+
RP6 100K
R93
C146
B
C
E
D
Q11
C
3
4
A
C
E
B
RFC3
Q7
D4 C114
C137
Q2
Q21
C57
C141
R8
Z5
4.7M
Q4
C44
C11
1
C140
C139
C124
1
2
Q6
R37
R39
FRONT PANEL BOARD
RFC16
Q3
C16
DS1
LINEAR
R2
+
D2
1
1
40
R7
C158
R91
1N34A
RP1 3.9K
Q11
1
C1
.01
D1
LIFT
C175
CONTROL
BOARD
C42
E2
U4
1 4 5 1 U5
TP3
Q20
R92
R78
K16
C63
C144
R13
R14
C154
R15
R24
BEVELED CORNER
RP3
R13
DS2
C1 RP2 1 2 0
1
+
C14
+
C53
R12
TP1
1252
R11
U1
B C E
D3
16C72 (SOCKET)
C52
R6
4
3
R61
R59
R64
C125
+
C116
U3
R46
RFC13
C55
L13
Q10
2
Q5
R38
T1
D1
1 D2
1
R45
L11
C36
C37
L9
145170
J8
1
R41
R40
J13
L2
80m
6482
P5 EXT INT
12V
P7
TIP
E1
R35
R36
R22
C89
R6 R7 R8 R9 R10
+
C67
U8
C64
R17
C58
D24 D26
C92
C94
R25
D23 D25
RFC14
10K
662
J2
P4
R21
R20
C86
1
RP3
C84
C85
C106 C105
+
Q19
RP2
10K
D17
+
R5 R2
X2
C2
C3
C4
D1
D16
X1
1
R30
R28
C95
D20 D22
C100
R31
C71 R32
C96 R33
D19 D21
D6
D7
C15
C8
K1 L4
L12
C43
Q17 Q16
C45 C47
C59 C44
C46
D11
R16
T5 C61
R9 R10
C79
1
3
C81
C80
4
C82
2
L30
K13
K14
K15
L10
L8
R2
C11
R1
C39
Appendix F
Parts Placement Drawing, Top
Appendix F
Parts Placement Drawing, Bottom
X
Download PDF